Home

Service Guide - Agilent Technologies

1. e5070bse4014 298 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Table 5 5 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0372 8 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 2 1400 0611 1 CLAMP CABLE 3 0515 2216 4 SCREW MACH 4 0 x 40 PN T20 4 0361 1875 RIVET PLASTIC 5 1400 1334 1 CLAMP CABLE 6 E5070 01267 1 BRACKET PS N Dn ta C N oo 7 0515 0372 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 8 1420 0356 1 BATTERY LITHIUM CR2032 3V 22A HR e 2 oO
2. e5070bse057 292 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Table 5 2 Top View Cables Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 2 04287 61607 0 1 FLAT CABLE 3 E5070 61616 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 4 E5070 61623 8 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 5 E5070 61624 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 6 E5070 61692 2 1 WIRE ASSY Opt 1 5 7 E5070 61692 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY Opt 1E5 1400 1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE e 2 oO n Chapter 5 293 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx 42301396 and below Top View Miscellaneous Parts
3. e5070bse162 Testing DRAM on the Motherboard When the A20 digital motherboard is replaced with a new one it is advisable to perform the DRAM test before proceeding to the BIOS setup utility procedure Confirm the DRAM count in accordance with the following procedure Step 1 Connect the external keyboard and mouse to the E5070B E5071B rear panel connectors Step 2 Turn the instrument on Wait until the E5070B E5071B boots up Do not press any key until the E5070B E5071B measurement view appears PN a o gt Step 3 Press key on the front panel Step 4 Click Misc Setup in the softkey menu Step 5 Click Control Panel in the softkey menu Step 6 Scroll the function viewer to find System icon and double click System This opens System Properties window as shown in Figure 4 60 Chapter 4 263 Figure 4 60 Procedure Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
4. E5070B S N 42300633 thru 4231100 E5071B S N MY42301397 thru 4232454 e5070bse3015 Chapter 6 453 Step 1 Step 2 Replacement Procedure A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 above Tools Required TORX screwdriver T8 T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 41 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B S N 42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 388 ase the clamped cables from the clamps item 1 on the cover NOTE Keep the mylar cable
5. Bottom 50706 5005 Chapter 6 389 Replacement Procedure A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 5 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Step 2 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the A27 mass storage disk drive Step 3 Lift the mass storage disk drive Figure 6 5 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Removal e5070bse096 Replacement Procedure Step 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure Step 2 Restore backup files onto the new mass storage disk drive as described in Restore Backup Files onto the New Mass Storage Disk Drive on page 391 Step 3 Calibrate the touch screen as described in Calibration of the Touch Screen on page 391 390 Chapter 6
6. e5070bse082 Chapter 6 403 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Replacement Procedure DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below There are two DIMM256MB memory module on the A20 digital motherboard It cannot replace only DIMMs when an E5070B serial number is after MY42300633 or when an E5071B serial number is after MY42301397 It is necessary to replace an A20 digital motherboard Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Cutting plier or scissors Removal Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 396 If it is a version where the E5070B 71B doesn t have the removable hard disk assembly skip this step Remove the A26 LCD Interface as described in A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK 4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix MY4232454 and below on page 444 Cut the cable tie item 1
7. Geo je Wl Glo 5070 4001 312 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Table 5 12 Top View Major Assemblies Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0950 4773 3 1 A50 POWER SUPPLY 2 0960 2357 1 USB USBTMC INTERFACE CARD 3 E5070 66521 5 1 A21 ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD 4 E5070 61007 9 1 A24 GPIB CARD 5 E5070 61006 7 1 A23 HANDLER I O BOARD 6 0960 2432 1 1 A20 DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD 7 04287 61001 8 1 FAN ASSY 8 See Table 5 37 1 A28 FDD ASSEMBLY 9 E5070 61004 9 1 FAN ASSY 10 E5070 61005 0 1 FAN ASSY 11 E4991 66505 7 1 5 CRYSTAL OVEN Opt 1E5 12 See Table 5 46 1 A6 RF SWITCH TEMP CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY Ch apter 5 313 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Top View Cables Figure 5 13 Top View Cables Ole y Jd eesjo jo 1 Golo e5070bse4003 314 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Table 5 13 Top View Cables Ref
8. 6 e5070bse301 4 Chapter 6 457 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Replacement Procedure A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 43 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B S N 42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 388 Release the clamped cables from the clamps item 1 on the cover Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Disconnect the cables item 5 connected through the cover The item 5 is not connected in the E5070B E5071B without the option 016 Release the cable from the clamps item 6 on the LCD Disconnect the cable item 7 connected to the front panel keyboard Disconnect the cable item 8 connected to the inverter Remove the four TORX T15
9. 2000 EE a N m BNC f Adapter 159 eoueuuoJegd 72 BNC m BNC m Cable e5070bse003 Step 2 Initialize the frequency counter Set the frequency counter as follows Controls Setting Gate time 1 sec 50 MQ 500 Step 3 Press Preset and Enter to initialize the 5070 5071 And press 55 Power Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function FW 3 60 and above and press Servise Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function FW 3 54 and above Then set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 50 MHz Center 5 0 J Ma Frequency span 0 Hz 0 The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value Step 4 Press and to make a Single sweep measurement Wait for frequency counter reading to settle Step 5 Record the frequency counter reading to a 1 Hz resolution in the performance test record Test result column for the Frequency accuracy test Chapter 2 35 Performance Tests 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 2 Frequency accuracy test setup 3GHz E5070B 5071B aea E 5986 Frequency Counter ggou CO 0000 gt aa 00 aaa aaa 2000 Lf
10. 550 M 1 0 0 17 1 05 G 1 0 0 17 1556 1 0 0 19 2 05 G 1 0 0 20 3 00 G 1 0 0 20 RF Output Level Linearity Test Port1 CW Frequency 10 MHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 Chapter 2 131 U 3 9 E D 2 n Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 3 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75
11. 501 How to make E5070B E5071B Firmware Installation Disk 501 How to update the E5070B E5071B firmware 2 501 Firmware Update for revision A 09 10 or later 2 503 Required Equipment bile ben be beled bee bake EP p LE eS nd o 503 Location of the latest E5070B 71B Firmware 503 How to update the E5070B E5071B firmware 2 2 503 D Computer Virus Check Computer Vitus Checked et eae EN ed Be BEETS EAR EE RS Oa Se Be 508 geet 508 How to check the drive and D of 5070 5071 508 E Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply 2 2 518 Power Requirements o exegit ieee SO eh eee ME WEA ee E Gye e D e E er 518 Power Cable RC RR be e p dee e ales 518 Turning the Power ON and tages be e eR tebe re Re Mee 520 Turmngthe power ON EIE hs ee aR gp hs le 520 Turing the power ees p pes mu TA Rue ETE AC Ree 520 F Messages Error Messages eR RR EE UN CARS bade Steeles 523 c c 523
12. 461 Tools Required s nres saris e oe exea EC RUHK pe ECRIRE LOREM e t RR I Reg 461 Removal Procedure cus ee Seni eder ed ee redes GER 461 Replacement Procedure 5 gll I E pA Ce e ARR HER URDU 461 Connector 2 22 462 Tools Required sse ebbe aac ate SERERE RES ed 462 Removal Procedure wi ess tes eee bee RE Ree ic de eel 462 Replacement Re RA US AGA Re RR RR RR 464 7 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures ead LER CO UU Pete eR LE 466 A Manual Changes Manual Changes PISA Ed qu Ig De IESU De TRU SUPE De 472 B System Recovery System Recovery es e Sate ER ree ee RR RU RR Bed ace saat RR BOR dass a c PE SO 474 Types of system ecOveries Ob SEEN RU Sok E REPE Ah donned yeaa UR 474 Notes on executing the factory recovery function 474 Procedure to execute the factory recovery for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and 475 Procedure to execute the factory recovery for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and abOVer 5 isto pr ee
13. 290 Top View Major Assemblies 290 Top View Cables inane IPC CE pieno UC PPS ED 292 Top View Miscellaneous 1 294 Top View Under Power 22 296 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts 298 Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive 1 1 300 Top View Major Assemblies 14 300 Top View Cables 4 deu UD HERUM esr unb eb wedge esto watt e b e cb dg 302 Top View Miscellaneous 7 304 Top View Under Power 1 2 306 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts 4 308 Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 abOVe auus e ete pita us alates mun sham ale E EE 310 Top View Removable Hard Disk 1 310
14. aan 000 2 N m N m Cable x OSL m m m Chapter 2 115 U 3 3 D 2 n Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Introduction This section contains calculation sheets for each performance test that requires additional calculations to determine the final test result Use the calculation sheet in this section as an aid for recording raw measurement data and calculating the performance test results Calculation sheet entries are provided only for performance tests in which calculations are required to obtain the test results 2 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Flatness Test E5070B and E5071B Frequency Hz Power meter reading dBm Test result equation a REF 50M 10M a REF 550 M 1 05 G a REF 1 55G a REF 2 05 G 3 006 a REF E5071B only Frequency Hz Power meter reading dBm Test result equation a REF 4 25G a REF 5 05 G a REF 6 05 G a REF 7 05 G a REF 8 05 G a REF 8 5G a REF
15. osL m m e5070bse035 Step 31 Perform the full 2 port calibration Step 10 through 27 in accordance with Table 2 27 Step 32 Perform Step 29 and 30 Record the directivity source match and load match values in the performance test record Port 2 table Options 313 314 413 and 414 only NOTE Perform Step 33 and 34 for the option 313 314 413 and 414 instruments only Step 33 Perform the full 2 port calibration Step 6 through 27 in accordance with Table 2 27 Step 34 Perform Step 29 and 30 Record the directivity source match and load match values in the performance test record Port 1 through Port 3 tables for Option 313 314 and Port 1 through Port 4 tables for Option 413 414 Chapter 2 109 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Table 2 27 Test setup Select Ports settings and calibration sequence Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection Ports Figure for calibration 213 214 1 2 Figure 2 41 Port 1 Open Open to Port 1 Port 1 Short Short to Port 1 Port 1 Load Load to Port 1 Port 2 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 2 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 2 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Figure 2 44 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 29 and 30 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Lo
16. 232 ToiCheck the Mouse s 5 enr kek P E OE TS aries i S 232 To Check the cei bow oe bead eee bens be PS c eta 232 To Check the Video 1 233 To Check the External Trigger 233 To Check the MRR OO BANS URS nee 233 To Check the Printer Parallel 4 237 To Check the GPIB oats oo bbe be ABEL be REO ep ERU Es 238 To Check the USB USBTMC Interface 238 Troubleshooting Using External 1 239 Contents of the external test re eR ee RR ab ve ee Rn 239 Test equipment required for external test 239 Execute the External Ee Y ARE AER 240 Contents External Test Failure Troubleshooting 254 Performance test failure troubleshooting 0 260 Recommended adjustment for performance test 260 Performance test failure troubleshooting
17. Frequency Hz Test limit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 250 11 3G 15k k 0 64 With Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Test limit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 50 11 3G 3 00 k k 0 64 Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Level Accuracy Test Port 1 Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement dBm Hz dB dB uncertainty dB 0 50M 0 65 0 16 Level Flatness Test Port 1 at 0dBm relative to 50 MHz reference Frequency Hz Testlimit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10M 1 0 0 37 142 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Frequency Hz Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 550 M 1 0 0 17 1 05 G 1 0 0 17 1556 1 0 0 19 2 05 G 1 0 0 20 3 00 G 1 0 0 20 RF Output Level Linearity Test Port1 CW Frequency 10 MHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0
18. 260 To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below 262 To Identify the Motherboard Installed 262 Configure the Motherboard 245 252 De eReHR Rer ERIS be Ue Pg ees 262 Testing DRAM on the 263 To Confirm or Set the BIOS 264 To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY 42301397 and iier eb ru er hb ted sete ere ree etd 279 To Identify the Motherboard Installed 279 Configure the Motherboard oec e Sea eme eee eye er eee 279 Testing DRAM on the Motherboard 2 279 To Confirm or Set the BIOS 280 5 Replaceable Parts Ordering Information 225 hope ER BSR RR ER ee Sas 288 Direct Mail Order System EP URL P EE E RP LER Nn 288 Exchange Assemblies eb e Uv eH ee DETIENE ERE 289 Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and
19. Chapter 6 411 20 D gt U O D Q Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Table 6 2 Step 4 Replacement Procedure 1 Source Board Replacement 1 Source Board Replacement Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver Box wrench 5 8 inch e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 18 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Remove the two 5 8 inch nuts item 1 fastening the BNC connector on the rear panel Disconnect the all semi rigid cables and the termination connected to the board referring to the figures as shown in Table 6 2 The label on the semi rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 20 on page 327 214 Figure 5 21 on page 328 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 28 on page 341 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 313 Figure 5 22 on page 330 314
20. n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Top View Under Power Supply for E5070B S N MY42401987 and above E5071B S N MY42404510 and above Figure 5 16 Top View Under Power Supply e5070bse8001 320 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Table 5 16 Top View Under Power Supply Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61661 4 1 WIRE ASSY 1400 0493 2 CLAMP CABLE 2 E5070 61663 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 3 E5070 6 1662 5 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 4 E5070 61664 7 1 FLAT CBL ASSY Opt 016 5 5070 61667 1 USB CABLE ASSY 6 E5070 61617 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY Opt 214 E5070 61618 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY Opt 314 414 7 E5070 61614 7 1 WIRE ASSY YELLOW 8 E5070 61613 6 1 WIRE ASSY ORANGE Opt 31x 41x 9 E5070 61612 5 1 WIRE ASSY RED Opt 31x 41x 10 E5070 61615 8 1 WIRE ASSY BROWN Opt 21x E5070 61611 4 1 WIRE ASSY BROWN Opt 31x 41x 11 E5052 61626 1 FLAT FLEXIBLE CABLE DVI 12 1400 3361 1 CLAMP CABLE Chapter 5 321 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceab
21. N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable e5070bse004 Step 6 Connect the BNC cable to the frequency counter input channel measurable for a 3 GHz input signal See Figure 2 2 Step 7 Press Center 31 to set the frequency to 3 GHz Step 8 Perform Step 4 and 5 36 Chapter 2 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Performance Tests 2 RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST 2 RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST Description This test checks the level accuracy and frequency flatness of the E5070B E5071B test port output signal The level accuracy is checked for an output power level setting of 0 dBm at 50 MHz using a power meter The frequency flatness is tested by measuring the power level at 12 frequency points from 10 MHz to 8 5 GHz and calculating the differences of the power meter readings from the level at 50 MHz Specification I 5 9 3 D 2 o n Lan Level accuracy lt 0 65 dBm 23 5 C 50 MHz 0 dBm Flatness E5070B lt 1dBm 23 5 C 10 MHz to 3 GHz 0 dBm relative to 50 MHz E5071B lt 1dBm 23 5 C 10 MHz to 8 5 GHz 0 dBm relative to 50 MHz The level accuracy and flatness specifications apply to Port 1 only The levels for other ports are given as supplemental performance characteristic Test equipment Power meter Agilent E4419A B Power sensor Agilent E4412A Procedur
22. key NOTE If you want to quit the BIOS option setting and exit the BIOS setup utility without saving changes in the setup select Exit Without Saving and press Enter Table 4 14 BIOS setup utility windows and references Window Contents of setup utility Ref page n o Standard CMOS The default settings of all the Standard on Features CMOS Setup options The procedure to set page 267 date or time is also described Advanced CMOS The default settings of all the advanced on Features CMOS Setup options page 268 Advanced Chipset The default settings of all the Advanced on Features Chipset Setting options page 270 Integrated Peripherals The default settings of all the Peripheral on Setup options page 271 Chapter 4 265 Table 4 14 NOTE Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 below 188 setup utility windows and references Window name Contents of setup utility Ref page Power Management The default settings of all the Power on Setup Management Setup options page 273 PnP PCI The default settings of all the PCI Plug and on Configurations Play Setup options page 275 PC Health Status The default setting of the CPU temperature on the system beeps for a warning alarm page 276 Frequency Voltage The default settings of t
23. D 507005 088 Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts page 287 for the latest cabling too Chapter 6 445 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 CAUTION Step 1 Replacement Procedure USB USBTMC Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above USB USBTMC Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N MY424011
24. erShating ans Nenas Internet Protocol Install Uninstall Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in taskbar when connected Cancel amp 5070buj041 6 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Figure D 4 appears If Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected you select Use the following IP address 1 in Figure D 4 and then enter the IP address 192 168 0 1 2 in Figure D 4 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 3 in Figure D 4 If a specific IP address and subnet mask have been assigned press the OK button Appendix D 509 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Figure D 4 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings E atically ci 7 IP address 192 168 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server L o n Altemate DNS server _ 1 Advanced 5070 061 7 Inthe Internet Prot
25. n Chapter 5 299 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Top View Major Assemblies Figure 5 6 Top View Major Assemblies e5070bse3001 300 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Table 5 6 Top View Major Assemblies Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0950 4773 3 1 A50 POWER SUPPLY 2 54810 66525 1 1 A26 LCD INTERFACE CARD 3 E5070 66521 5 1 A21 ANALOG INTERFACE BOAR 4 E5070 61007 9 1 A24 GPIB CARD 5 E5070 61006 7 1 A23 HANDLER I O BOARD 6 0960 2432 1 1 A20 DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD 7 04287 61001 8 1 FAN ASSY 8 See Table 5 37 1 A28 FDD ASSEMBLY 9 E5070 61004 9 1 FAN ASSY 10 E5070 61005 0 1 FAN ASSY 11 See Table 5 37 1 A27 MASS STORAGE DISK DRIVE ASSEMBLY 12 E499 1 66505 7 1 5 CRYSTAL OVEN Opt 1E5 13 See Table 5 46 1 A6 RF SWITCH TEMP CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY Chapter 5 301 e 2
26. 00 DO O e5070bse028 Figure 2 40 6dB Fixed Attenuation Z5623A H01 Ld N m N m Cable Power Sensor GPIB Controller Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B 0000 9 0000 aano aa ae 0000 oo lt go aad ga mmnm CTETES 900 e5070bse029 6dB Fixed Attenuation Z5623A H01 Mr 27 N m N m Cable lt Power Sensor 96 GPIB Controller Chapter 2 NOTE Step 1 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Description This test checks the directivity source match load match transmission tracking and reflection tracking which are the key S parameter measurement hardware characteristics These characteristics are tested using the Agilent 85032F Calibration Kit at 3MHz 10 MHz as well as 50 MHz increments from 50 MHz to 3 GHz up to 8 5 GHz for the E5071B After a full two port SOLT calibration is performed for each test port VBA test programs
27. oo 0099 Cable e5070bse010 Step 17 Select S parameter from menu in accordance with Table 2 8 48 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Table 2 8 S parameter settings for Trace Noise CW Test Option 313 314 413 414 1 523 543 2 532 534 Step 18 Set the center frequency to 3 MHz Step 19 Perform Step 8 through 12 for each of the S parameters shown in the first and second rows in Table 2 8 Chapter 2 49 D a 3 5 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST 5 CROSSTALK TEST Description This test checks the crosstalks between test ports of the 5070 5071 The crosstalk is tested by performing through measurements with two test ports connected together and short ended isolation measurements with the test ports terminated with N type Short devices A through calibration is performed to have the through measurement data as the reference to which the isolation measurement data is compared With segment sweep points for a specified frequency range a swept measurement with the short ended test ports is repeated 16 times and the measurement data is averaged The worst crosstalk value is determined from the peak value of the average data Specification Serial Prefix MY421 or JPIKK E5070B 120 dB
28. 116 Chapter 2 NOTE 3 RF Output Level Linearity Test Serial Prefix MY421 or JPIKK Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies listed below 5070 E5071B for serial prefix 10 MHz and 3 GHz 10 MHz 3 GHz and 4 25 GHz MY421 or JPIKK CW frequency Hz Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0 10 a REF 9 a REF 8 a REF 7 a REF 6 a REF 5 4 3 a REF 2 a REF 1 a REF 1 a REF 2 a REF 3 a REF 4 a REF 5 a REF 6 a REF 7 a REF 8 a REF 9 10 2 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n 117 NOTE Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 11 a REF 12 a REF 13 a REF 14 a REF 15 a REF Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies listed below E5071B for serial prefix CW frequency 6 GHz MY421 or JPIKK Hz Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0
29. N m N m Cable e5070bse009 70 Chapter 2 Figure 2 24 e5070bse01 1 NOTE Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 Step 23 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B Ere aa anon 0000 QQ 0000 ag 0000 oo lt 0900 aaa aaa um m D m 3 5 N m N m Cable To avoid possible variance in measured values do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements Press 4 gt and Enter J to perform Thru calibration Wait until the calibration is completed Press C gt lt gt to perform Done Press C4 C to select Select Ports in reference to the position of Done and press Enter Change Select Ports setting as shown in the second row in Table 2 17 Press gt Enter to perform Thru calibration Wait until the calibration is completed Disconnect the N N cable and connect the Load termination to each test port as shown in the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 19 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 20 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 21 Press CY gt and Enter to perform Isolation calibration Press gt and Enter to perform Done
30. 382 Tools ie NOEs SRS Rp E AG Fes RUE 382 Procedure zo Picea ur bd x E er dE oet desbedaceuebs st 382 Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx 42301396 and below EU ees er bd E beg bugs 384 Tools uoce ente b E pe bere PCR I eR e PERI 384 Procedure UL ELE Pies e E eU E UHR Reque O Bada 384 Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru 292454 po PSU PREND PRETI ORIS PER IE e tse bis ee ou Vs 386 SHORES qu ep Semis sR mes FUA 386 Procedure 2 ep RE IMP LU Eee o epe e e ese bens ee xS 386 Front Panel Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above 388 Tools oo Ep eR hu ote bee bebe snb bb erba s 388 Procedute x onre ED b pese eu ed ees EP p 388 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive 390 Tools Required sa err DIM AUR EIC SERI ECRANS EE s 390 hes vg BEIC E ete bate ees 390 Replacement Procedure i sid CERNERET 390 Restore Backup Files onto the New Mass Storage Disk Dr
31. d CE bI uL e eda sees es 64 Procedute ecce quu SRR RE ION SIR 64 System Dynamic Range test 4 2 77 T DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST 5 suopte btebupp setae shag sree sa 82 Contents Description CR LE E e Butts Sulake epe tope Si ole be 82 Test Equipment eee eee EUER e eee eee Ir EVE Nees Pres 82 Proced fe ives ru oa ie an ad c RA RR a Pe ecg td ee equ M Rd Saks 83 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 8 97 Description oec cat d eos e eb espe en ep wie ERE 97 Specificatioti PR EURO ENSE ORE EA eee aite See Tete oes 97 Test Equipment bI P ER ERR RR eR RC LE IER ERA 97 Procedufe n bode Glo buck get EE 97 E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet 116 Introduction tue er eee Ne GOES Wie leche Meco OMI Wave wen BAER 116 2 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness 116 3 RF Output Level Linearity Test 1 117 4 Trace Noise CW Test sacs r pitas E EpL Ure E 125 7 Dynamic Accur cy Whe aS Sree ete alas Wn PERN eres 127 5070 Performance Test Record for Seri
32. ees e aide 523 op 523 pec 524 bE es Sg ee oh heh eR Le ee Hw 524 E tu Ee ehh Ar ee ch e t ect ete be ed wee ts 525 bee cen c Re oe PRO NT E HE pe eco te C ee 526 Els cac dc eae e Ce eee ull Cede s Ree VR A Ed S REUS 526 jc 526 cM 528 16 Contents ete ah b ee pe Et C bete ets cbe 528 IN eee dettes edat X ehe e ee ect ett 528 529 Pie eesti e e eet item 529 531 532 532 Neb ME 533 miter eee etes nos ERR DE RU Wee eng 534 ta edes oth dut eere ee e Tee o Re de gt 534 Warnng Message cc sube ch ERR EQUES be ae Reb eee 536 17 Contents 18 an Q 2 gp 3 D 5 General Information The Service Manual is a guide to servicing the 5070 5071 ENA Series Network Analyzer The manual contains information requisite to do performance tests adjustments troubleshooting and repairs 19 NOTE General Information Precautions Precautions This section describes cautions that must be observed in operating the 5070 5071 Software Installed The Windows operating system installed in this machine is customized fo
33. E5071B only CW frequency Hz s dev nU Trace noise level dB rms Test result equation 4 25 GHz 6 GHz Trace noise level 7 5 GHz 20 log 1 s dev x 109 8 5 GHz 126 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet 7 Dynamic Accuracy Test Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each of the S parameters listed below Option 213 and 214 S21 and S12 Option 313 and 314 S21 512 and S31 Option 413 and 414 S21 512 531 and S41 NOTE A dynamic accuracy calculation example is shown at the end of the calculation sheets S Parameter 10 dBm to 100 dBm a 2 1 2 Pm dB Tx dB Port Port Char Running True 8 setting OFF D A D A a dB 10 0 10 REF REF x 15 5 10 lt Tx DA15 Tx DA10 Pm DA15 Pm DA10 gt DA20 10 10 _ _ Tx DA20 Tx DA10 Pm DA20 Pm DA10 gt DA20a 0 20 Adjust source power for Pm db DA202a Tx dB DA20a Tx dB 9 DA20 DA20b 0 20 REF20 REF20 DA25 5 20 Tx DA25 Tx DA20b Pm DA25 DA20b gt True D A Running D A dB DA25 True D A dB DA20 DA30 10 20 Tx DA30 Tx DA20b Pm DA30 Pm DA20b gt True D A Running D A dB DA30
34. 60 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 60 90 Chapter 2 Table 2 22 Step 48 Step 49 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Z5623A attenuator settings 1 setting A2 setting GPIB command dB dB DA65 5 60 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 60 DA70 10 60 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 60 DA70a 0 70 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 70 DA75 5 70 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 70 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E N DA80 10 70 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 70 DA80a 0 80 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 80 DA85 5 80 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 80 DA90 10 80 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 80 DA90a 0 90 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 90 DA95 5 90 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 90 DA100 10 90 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 90 Dynamic accuracy tests at 10 dBm to10 dBm Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 10 dB and the second attenuator A2 to 0 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 a
35. 0 frmDynamicRange2 txtVal5 Text CSng 20 10910 MaxValG 0 frmDynamicRange2 txtVal6 Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValH 0 frmDynamicRange2 Show Else Buff MsgBox Error This program is designed for the E5070B E5071B then please use the corresponding programs vbOKOnly SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST 19 5 3 D 2 o n End If End Sub Chapter 2 81 NOTE Table 2 21 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Description This test checks the dynamic accuracy of the E5070B E5071B The dynamic accuracy is tested at 1 195 GHz for each receiver port using the Agilent Z5623A with option 01 Dynamic Accuracy Test Kit A block diagram of Z56234A is shown in Figure 2 31 The 1 195 GHz source signal of E5070B E5071B goes through the Z5623A s first attenuator variable from 0 dB to 11 dB in 1 dB steps and second attenuator variable up to 100 dB in 10 dB steps and is measured with the receiver port The test procedure checks the measured receiver input power for each 5 dB increment in the range from 10 dBm to 100 dBm The ratios of the measured receiver input powers to the reference input level of 10 dBm are calculated and compared to the attenuation values of the Z5623A The 1 195 GHz signal flow is split with a power splitter present between the two attenuators in the Z
36. MY421 2 5070 058 5 41 8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix or MY421 E5071B serial prefix JPIKK or MY421 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5087 7137 1 SWITCH RF SPDT Opt 21x 31x 41x 2 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 PN T10 Opt 21x 31x 41x 3 5087 7137 1 SWITCH RF SPDT Opt 31x 41x 4 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 PN T10 Opt 31x 41x 5 5070 01265 0 1 PLATE SWITCH e 2 oO v n Chapter 5 357 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Figure 5 42 A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial 2 piesa prefix MY422 and above 2 5070 058 5 42 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5087 7272 1 SWITCH SPDT Opt 21x 31x 41x 2 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 PN T10 Opt 21x 31x 41x 3 5087 7272 1 SWITCH SPDT Opt 31x 41x 4 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 PN T10 Opt 31x 41x 5 5070 01265 0 1 PLATE SWITCH 358 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial pr
37. Figure 4 48 NOTE Table 4 8 e5070bse127 b Select the S parameters for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 48 Follow the instruction Clicking Select All button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box SHORT all ports dialog box Connect SHORTS to All Ports e5070bse128 c Connect type N Short terminations to all the test ports For more information on the Dynamic Range tests setup see Table 4 8 Dynamic Range tests setup Test parameter Connect Short Sweep freq span IFBW Nop and terminations to RF power settings Automatic 12 All the test ports 3 MHz to 3 GHz E5070B E s 3 MHz to 8 5 GHz E5071B 521 3 kHz BW 101 max source power 523 Opt 313 314 413 414 531 Opt 313 314 413 414 532 Opt 313 314 413 414 534 Opt 413 414 S41 Opt 413 414 543 Opt 413 414 248 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Dynamic Range tests are in progress e When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 49 Figure 4 49 Dynamic Range test results example E5071B Opt
38. column in Port 1 table for the uncorrected system performance test Load match test for port 1 g Set Parameter Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2 53 Figure 2 53 Load match test window Parameter Load Match Response Port 1 zi Stimulus Port 2 About 5070 258 h Press OK button The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in Figure 2 54 or Figure 2 55 Figure 2 54 Load match for E5070B UNCORRECTED SYSTEM Lx 3M to 3G 5070 262 Chapter 2 105 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 55 Load match for E5071B 3M to 3G EE 3G to 6 G 6 G to 8 5 G Hz 5070 259 i Record the displayed values in the performance test record Test results column in Port 1 table for the uncorrected system performance test Transimission Tracking test for port 1 j Set Parameter Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2 56 Figure 2 56 Transmission Tracking test window UNCORRECTED SYSTEM x Parameter Transmission Tracking Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 gt About e5070bse172 k Press OK button The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in Figure 2 57 or Figure 2 58 Figure 2 57 Transmission Tracking for E5070B Frequency Ranges Hz dB 3M
39. z 6 Zo NS Aso R e5070bse3009 Table 5 28 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61633 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61634 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61606 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61603 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61605 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61604 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61671 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61687 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61672 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 0955 0208 5 1 U WAVE ATTN 4DB 12 1810 0118 1 2 TERMINATION COAX e 2 D Q D U e m 7 Chapter 5 341 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 Figure 5 29 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 M EE x Y WEEDS TU TEET 5070 3010 342 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Table 5 29 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61633 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61635 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASS
40. A26 Display Board No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process To Execute the External Test on page 240 To Check the Video output on page 233 A27 Mass Storage Perform HDD Hard Disk Drive in Inspect the Booting Process Disk Drive Spot Adjustment of the program Calibration of the Touch Screen for opt 016 Removable Hard Perform HDD Hard Disk Drive in Inspect the Booting Process Disk Drive Spot Adjustment of the program Calibration of the Touch Screen for opt 016 A28 FDD No adjustment needed To Check the FDD on page 232 50 Power Supply No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process Assembly 468 Chapter 7 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC A51 LCD Not adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process To Execute the External Test on page 240 To Check the LCD on page 231 Touch panel for Calibration of the Touch Screen Inspect the Booting Process To Execute the External Test on page 240 To Check the LCD on page 231 52 Inverter Board No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process To Execute the External Test on page 240 DIMM No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process Chapter 7 469 n T 20 O m D Q D n
41. ER REM 26 Power Meters That Be Tested Using This Procedure 26 Equipment Used for the Power Meter Accuracy 26 Description of the Test i sce ee SONIA erected tres Baten 26 TEST RECORD FOR POWER METER ACCURACY 5 30 2 Performance Tests Introduction o EORR E A be D ES UR ORA 32 Test Equipmient Required os bue ek BR A RRR EE BG WEAR IN ee eR 33 Softkey Selection Procedure for Performance 33 1 FREQUENCY 1 pes 34 Description o ae todd ee e e oO DP 34 Specification ecc srt Eee LIARS ea EN 34 ee bated SEE EA 34 eae EY DM Seep eRe HN REFUS SUR 34 2 RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS 86 37 44 5 eH ERE GLO LEN 37 deseo eg bs ebbe iv t bis wih recA aire hs 37 Je stequipment oss tse Aes Gp ber CE pisos EP I ope ES 37 Proced
42. o o gt 4 273 Figure 4 67 Table 4 18 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Power Management Setup window CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2881 Award Software Power Management Setup ACPI Function Power Management Video Off Method Video Off In Suspend Suspend Type Suspend Mode HDD Power Down Soft Off by PHR BTTN Wake Up by PCI card Intruder Detection PWRON After PHR Fail Resume by Alarm lateCof Month Alarm Wemm ssJ Alarm CPU Thermal Thrott ling Disabled User Define DPMS Yes Stop Grant Disabled 15 Min Instant ff 1 Disabled Disabled On 58 8 1 Disabled 8 0 8 B 4 Reload Global Timer Events Press Enter Item Help Menu Level gt Allows you to enable disable the Advanced Configuration and Power Management 14 gt lt Enter Select F5 Previous Values ACPI Function Power Management Video Off Method Video Off In Suspend Suspend Type HDD Power Down Soft Off By Power Bttn Wake Up by PCI Card Intruder Detection PWRON After PWR Fail CPU Thermal Throttling Resume by Alarm Reload Global Timer Events gt Primary IDE 0 gt Primary IDE 1 gt Secondary IDE 0 274 PU PD Value 10 5 ESC Exit F1 General Help F6 Setting 1 D
43. Disabled 269 Table 4 15 NOTE Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below gt Other Boot Devices Disabled gt Swap Floppy Drive Disabled gt Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled Console Redirection gt Console Redirection Disabled gt Agent Connect Via NULL gt Agent Wait Time min 1 gt Agent After Boot Disabled The setting is different from that of Load Setting 2 Defaults on page 266 gt means sub menu Advanced Chipset Features Advanced Chipset Features options are displayed by choosing Advanced Chipset Features using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 65 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 16 If there is any difference select it using J and 1 keys and change the option setting by pressing or keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press EJ key 270 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Figure 4 65 Advanced Chipset Features window CMOS Setup Utility Copyright 1984 2001 Award Software Advanced Chipset Fea
44. To exit the front panel test press key three times e If multiple keys fail to work a problem in A22 front interface board or A21 analog interface board is suspected Also check the flat cable between the A21 and 22 e If only a specific key doesn t work check first if the key is subsided in the panel Ifthe rotary knob doesn t work check the A22 board involving the RPG To Check the Touch Panel Option 016 only Procedure By touching the LCD display panel select or change the setting of a function in the softkey menu and then perform the same operation with hardkeys If the touch panel doesn t work correctly whereas the hardkeys function normally a failure seems in the touch screen controller assembly 5183 4184 or touch panel LCD assembly E5070 60102 The touch panel is not replaceable independently of the LCD e Check the cable between the touch screen controller and the serial interface connector on the A20 digital motherboard e fno problem is found in the above checks a failure in the A20 digital motherboard is suspected To Check the LCD Procedure Press key Click Service Menu and then Test Menu in the softkeys menu Click Display in the test menu The whole of the LCD screen turns Red Green Blue White and Black every 2 seconds and returns to the measurement view If the color test screen doesn t appear correctly perform step 4 PN e 47 gt O e 3 K
45. a Eie HI e TT AA O 1 m 328 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Table 5 21 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61674 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61606 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61603 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61605 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 6 1604 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61673 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61687 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 0955 0208 1 U WAVE ATTN 4DB 11 1810 0118 1 2 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 329 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and 421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 313 Figure 5 22 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 313 20907 ue Era A rae j ee te e5070bse067 330 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Table 5 22 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 313 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1
46. ale ke A2 Receiver Lower Vernier p x e6070ase2006 Test port failed in the test Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 2 port Opt 213 214 Upper Upper 3 port Opt 313 314 Lower Upper Upper 4 port Opt 413 414 Lower Upper Upper The upper and lower A2 boards have the same part number Test port configuration e5070bse047 PN o gt Chapter 4 259 Troubleshooting Performance test failure troubleshooting Performance test failure troubleshooting This section describes the adjustment and troubleshooting procedures used when the E5070B E5071B fails the performance tests If the performance of the instrument is critical for the test limits and seems to be adjustable perform first the adjustment s related to the failed test When the test result is far from the tolerance of the test or the performance is not adjustable isolate the faulty assembly in accordance with the Performance tests failure troubleshooting procedure Recommended adjustment for performance test failure Table 4 12 shows the recommended adjustments when the performance test fails Select the adjustment program corresponding to the recommended adjustment and perform the adjustment NOTE There are no adjustment related to the crosstalk system dynamic range and uncorrected system performance Table 4
47. 365 8515 8 PHP Mene e vetet 366 Keyboard sae seta eked Lp Shae bale RET UU 367 LCD and Inverter Assembly for E5060B S N MY42401986 and below for E5061B S N MY42404509 and Ld CE 368 LCD and Inverter Assembly for E5070B S N MY42401987 and above for E5071B S N MY42404510 and above c e CA CREDAS e ed besote be res 369 Standby Switch Assembly for E5070B S N MY42401986 and below for E5071B S N MY 42404509 and below x ee e C ROSAS Rhe e aoc 370 Standby Switch Assembly for E5070B S N MY42401987 and above for E5071B S N MY42404510 and above bisa eae ak ake UR b LR EC C t RR RE 371 11 Contents 12 Removable Hard Disk Assemblies for E5070B S N MY424 1101and above E5071B S N MY42402455 ANG ADOVE cd c V sU EE NA X le a NE NN fec 372 CoyerAssembly D rk eR eR RR RU RS Boe bc Gl RTO ARES 374 Cover Assembly 2 375 L bel n Rear Pace s oc Es ee CD RUBER che 376 Other Parts soo eun Are SU ee EHE ON een RE MR ew 377 Power Cables and Plug Configurations 1 378 Replacement Procedure Replacing an Assembly ee veel ate as puc pee pe due ex 380 Required Toolse s REVUE BUD de SER EMI NC Mee a 381 Outer Gover Removals deed ates be Abb eb anne
48. Replacement Procedure N Connector Replacement Table 6 6 Reference Figure Option Figure 414 Figure 5 25 on page 336 for 5070 with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 20 D gt U O D Q for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 30 on page 344 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above Step 6 Remove the washers and nuts from the N connectors Step 7 Remove the N connector from the holder Figure 6 46 N Connector Removal e5070bse099 Chapter 6 463 Replacement Procedure N Connector Replacement Replacement Procedure Step 1 Fasten the new N connector to the holder NOTE Match the dents on the holder and the juts on the connector File the hole of the holder smooth if the new N connector cannot be inserted into the hole easily Step 2 Replace the N connector holder by inverse procedure of removal NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement 464 Chapter 6 0 n T 20 D 2 0 Q e D Q D n Post Repair Procedures This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the E5070B E5071B operation after an assembly is replaced with a new one
49. Sh Aga C ERRORES pae a eee 414 Replacement Proced re sity Subs Eee e eve mee ewe eger de er rie d 415 Module Disassemble Procedure 416 Board Disassemble 2 416 Level Vernier Replacement 2 RR e aa SEE ERREUR 418 Tools Required ee bt eee RUE Oe 418 Removal Procedure eres RAAT Wa Sle ha RR RE CR RO 418 Replacement Procedure iler MER aed reta 419 Fan amp Switch Control Board 420 Tools epe II We reete e de 420 Removal Procedure is scr etg OAS RAR uli dea ee B RNC CR Ru aN 420 Replacement Procedure cieenebk es LE PUE E ener eee perte E ptis 420 Fan Replacement ERE Ceo ep aA ea ean Mobs RUE 422 Fan and2 eeu eA eee Ae Geet 423 FaN a zc e ee See ee ce cet 424 7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix or MY421 E5071B S N prefix or MY421 Option 214 314 and 414 426 13 Contents 14 Tools Required RD Sas EUR UR tg eG
50. Sig 426 Removal Proced re eee SN eee erre P S HE eee d ers 426 Replacement os RS eoe ea C pre RIO RR RU 426 A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix MY422 and above E5071B S N prefix MY422 and above Option 214 314 and 414 13 428 Tools M 428 Removal Procedure etos Ct ERU RR RR AR RUE RR E RR 428 Replacement Procedure ceto PRSE eH tee EIU HERE eie mem 428 AS RF Switch 431 Tools Required ep E HVS Wyn eel wees BOSH 431 RF Switch source board 0 431 RF Switch receiver board 6 41 434 A4 Power Amp Module 14 1 436 Tools Required e C NT ERR ANI UR ees 436 Removal Procedure oer Ee RR E ERREUR ER RR RES E BERE 436 Replacement Procedure eL epe ere ERU Pee d ree ets 436 A10 Analog Motherboard 438 Tools Requited ee eret e eR eC teet Gin xt d ee ie He eI 438 Removal Procedure sup Reb Ree ae U
51. Virus Warning fluick Power On Self Test Boot Up NumLock Status IDE HDD Block Mode Gate AZ Option Typematic Rate Setting matic Rate Chars Secur ity Option Disabled Enabled On Enabled Fast Disabled 258 Setup 05 Select For DRAM gt 64MB Non 0S2 Summary Screen Show Cache Setup gt Boot Seq amp Floppy Setup Console Redirection Disabled Press Enter Press Enter Press Enter Item Help Menu Level gt Allows you to choose the VIRUS warning feature for IDE Hard Disk boot sector protection If this function is enabled and someone attempt to write data into this area BIOS will show a warning message on screen and alarm beep Enter Select PU PD Value F10 Save ESC Exit F1 General Help F5 Previous Values F6 Setting 1 Defaults Setting 2 Defaults Virus Warning Quick Power On Self Test Boot Up NumLock Status IDE HDD Block Mode Gate A20 Option Typematic Rate Setting Security Option OS Select For DRAM gt 64MB Summary Screen Show gt Internal Cache L1 gt CPU L2 Cache CPU L2 Cache ECC Checking Boot Sequence amp Floppy Setup gt First Boot Device gt Second Boot Device gt Third Boot Device Chapter 4 Disabled Enabled On Enabled Fast Disabled Setup Non OS2 Enabled A 2 2 Enabled Enabled Ist IDE HDD Disabled
52. oO 72 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Top View Cables Figure 5 7 Top View Cables e5070bse057 302 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage dis
53. u lt 5 m 5 See HHS FHSS RAB a gt gt OS n 9 GHA o 9 gt QU cod n o 5 vo 2 3 z a cd 56 S S e 2 5 2 vo x o s t Y m 5 e e Ur uw S S eS Ss of v v oon oO lt m o 6 eb ii 0 oon Chapter 5 350 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Cover Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JPIKK MY423 and below E5071B serial prefix MY423 and below Figure 5 34 Cover Assembly Table 5 34 Cover Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 60022 9 1 COVER ASSY 2 0515 1382 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 6 FL T15 3 0515 0430 3 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO e 2 oO v n Chapter 5 351 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Cover Assembly for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Figure 5 35 Cover Assembly bottom view Table 5 35 Cover Assembly bottom view Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 04023 1 COVER ASSY 2 0515 1382 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 6 FL T15 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 3 0515 0430 3 4 Figure 5 36 C
54. Chapter 2 177 U 3 9 E D 2 n Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 8 5 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 178 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude Direction 521 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 0012 6G 3k lt 0 0036 756 3k lt 0 0036 8 5G 3k lt 0 006 Direction 12 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test res
55. Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST The number of averaging times is displayed in the status bar of the measurement channel window Press Trigger and Enter to set the trigger operation to Hold mode Press to execute the test program This test program searches the maximum point of the trace for each of the following frequency ranges 5070 3 MHz to 3 GHz one range only E5071B 3 MHZ to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz and 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz four ranges The test results are represented in dB and displayed in the VBA UserForm window as shown in the display example below VBA UserForm window display example CROSSTALK TEST Lx Frequency Ranges Hz MaxVal dB 3M to 3G Hz BREESE 3G to 6 G Hz 6 G to 7 5 G Hz 7 5 G to 8 5 G Hz Read the maximum value s and record them in the performance test record Test result dB column for the crosstalk test Press Exit button on the CROSSTALK TEST window Press Trigger C 5 lt gt to select the Continuous trigger mode Change the S parameter setting in accordance with Table 2 13 the second through fourth rows and perform Step 24 through Step 29 Crosstalk test program Coding procedure Press key Press to activate VBA Editor function Click Insert and select Module from pull down menu VBA Project Module Code window screen for coding a program will be displayed Input the test program shown below Save
56. Press 3 0 will be focused Press 3 Gn Press 3 5 Press 1 0 0 to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency Stop frequency to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused to set the number of sweep points to 35 Power will be focused to set the power level to 10 dBm ab Press CY S to focus on the Start frequency of the second segment ac Press 3J J 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 Gn to enter 3 000000001 z as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused ad Press 4 J J 2 5 Gin to enter 4 25 GHz as the stop frequency Points 54 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST will be focused ae Press 5 to set the number of sweep points to 15 Power will be focused af Press 9 to set the power level to 9 dBm ag Press C gt S S to focus on the Start frequency of the third segment ah Press 4 2 5 2 0 9 0 0 0 1 4 250000001 GHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused ai Press 6 to enter 6 GHz as the stop frequency The Points will be focused aj Press 0 to set the number of sweep points to 20 Power will be focused ak Press 7 to set the power level to 7 dBm m D m 3 5 al Press C e to focus on the Start frequency of the fou
57. Press and select Lin Mag from display format menu Set the controls as follows S a Control settings Key strokes IF Bandwidth 10 Hz IF Bandwidth 9 Averaging ON D D C4 select Averaging Averaging factor now is set to 16 preset value et the test frequencies using the Segment Table as follows Press Sweep Setup lt gt CK C GPO CHD select Edit Segment Table Enter J The first Start frequency entry box in the Segment Sweep table will be focused Press in the ENTRY block The softkey menu title area is displayed in blue Press Y CV select List Power to set the List Power function to ON The row Power for setting appears in the segment table Press in the ENTRY block The window frame of the segment table is 66 Chapter 2 Press 3 G n Jto enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused NOTE Table 2 14 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST displayed as bright For the E5070B proceed to the next Step f For the E5071B skip to Step j or Step x E5070B 3 0 0 to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused h Press 5 0 to set the number of sweep points to 50 Power will be focused Press 1 0 to set the power level to 10 dBm A See Table 2 14 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5070B E5070B Segment Table setting Start S
58. Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below ystem Properties window System Properties BE etwork Identification Hardware User Profiles Advanced System Microsoft Windows 2000 5 00 2195 Service Pack 2 Registered to agena 51873 0EM 0007007 00000 Computer 86 Family 6 Model 8 Stepping 10 COMPATIBLE 523 828 KB RAM e5070bse111 Verify that 523 828 KB RAM is displayed in the Computer profile as shown in Figure 4 60 If it is not correct the A20 board is faulty Click OK button to close the window Turn the E5070B E5071B off before proceeding to the next step To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options BIOS is the PC s built in program describing the standard procedure of basic inputs and outputs for the system hardware BIOS involves the system BIOS start up program and BIOS setup utility The E5070B E5071B starts up first with the BIOS when the power 15 turned on Use the following procedure to confirm or set the BIOS options known as the BIOS setup utility Run the BIOS setup utility Use the external keyboard to select and set various options in the BIOS setup utility Do not operate the E5070B E5071B front panel until you exit the BIOS option setup procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E5070B E5071B rear panel connect
59. True D A dB DA20 DA30a 0 30 Adjust source power for Pm db DA30a Tx dB DA30a Tx dB DA30 DA30b 0 30 REF30 REF30 DA35 5 30 Tx DA35 Tx DA30b Pm DA35 Pm DA30b gt True D A Running D A dB DA35 True D A dB DA30 DA40 10 30 Tx DA40 Tx DA30b Pm DA40 Pm DA30b gt True D A Running D A dB True D A dB DA30 DA40a 0 40 Adjust source power for Pm db DA40a Tx dB 9 DA40a Tx dB 9 DA40 Chapter 2 127 Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Name 1 2 Power Pm dB Tx dB Port Port Char Running True setting OFF D A D A dB DA40b 0 40 REF40 REF40 DA45 5 40 Tx DA45 Tx DA40b Pm DA45 Pm DA40b gt True D A Running D A dB DA45 True D A dB DA40 DASO 10 40 Tx DASO Tx DA40b Pm DA50 Pm DA40b gt True D A Running dB DA50 True D A dB DA40 DA50a 0 50 Z Adjust source power for Pm db DA50a Tx dB DA50a Tx dB DA50 DA50b 0 50 REF50 REF50 55 3 50 Tx 9 DASS Tx 9 DAS0b
60. Unlatch the two clips and remove the DIMM memory 404 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Figure 6 14 DIMM Module Removal 20 D U O D Q DIMM memorys e5070bse085 Replacement Procedure Step 1 Install the DIMM memory in the socket and latch the clips Step 2 Clamp the two clips using the new cable tie as shown in Figure 6 14 Step 3 Replace the DIMM memory by inverse procedure of removal Chapter 6 405 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx 42301396 and below A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Cutting plier or scissors Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 15 for this procedure Remove the mouse the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are connected to the rear panel Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in Removable Hard
61. e5070bse007 Chapter 2 45 U 3 3 D 2 n Figure 2 7 e5070bse008 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Trace Noise CW Test setup Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B 2165 gt 9 c 0000 ad eoa 0009 oo 090 000 N m N m Cable Do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements To do so will cause a variance in measured values Press Preset and Enter to initialize the E5070B E5071B And press Power Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function FW 3 60 and above and press Servise Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function FW 3 54 and above Press Format H gt C 5 Co 5 Ch P GD to select Lin Mag from display format menu Press Marker J gt C CY CHD CHD CHD CY select Statistics and set Statistics function to on Press and select S21 from S parameter menu Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 3 MHz Center 3 Frequency span 0 Hz Span 0 Number of points 32 Sweep Setup J P gt CK AD lt gt C select Points Enter J 3 2 x1 IF Bandwidth 3 kHz Avg J
62. 8 5Hz 511 Mag NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done 522 Mag NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done Phase NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done 533 Mag NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done Phase NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done 544 Mag NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done Select All Select None Exit 5070 130 b Select the S parameter for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 51 Follow the instruction Clicking Select All button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box SHORT all ports dialog box Connect SHORTs to All Ports e5070bse128
63. Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 2 E5070 61616 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 3 E5070 61623 8 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 4 E5070 61624 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 5 E5070 61637 2 1 WIRE ASSY Opt 1 5 6 E5070 61692 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY Opt 1 5 1400 1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE e 2 oO n Chapter 5 315 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Top View Miscellaneous Parts Figure 5 14 Top View Miscellaneous Parts e5070bse4004 316 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Table 5 14 Top View Miscellaneous Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0430 3 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 2 E5070 01256 1 ANGLE 3 0515 1946 8 4 SCREW 4 0515 0430 3 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 5 0515 1382 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 6 FL T15 6 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 7 0515 1946 8 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 8 0515 1402 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN T15 9 1400 1051 4 1 SADDLE WIRE 10 0403 1143 0 1 GUIDE PC BD 11 1400 0866 7 1 CLAMP CABLE 12 1400 3207 6 2 CABLE TIE 13 0515 0372 1 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 14 0515 0430 3 SC
64. E n E Press CW and to make a Single sweep measurement Wait for the power meter reading to settle Then record the reading in the calculation sheet Power meter reading a column for the level linearity test Change the E5070B E5071B power level setting in accordance with Table 2 5 and perform Step 7 and 8 for each power level to 15 dBm Set the power level to 0 dBm and change the E5070B E5071B center frequency to the next level linearity test frequency in accordance with Table 2 5 Perform Step 4 through 14 for each frequency Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the calculated test results in the performance test record Test result column for the level linearity test Chapter 2 43 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Description This test checks the trace noise level for each test port of the E5070B E5071B The trace noise level is quantified by performing a through measurement 32 times at 3 MHz 1 3 GHz 2 1 GHz 3 GHz 4 25 GHz 6 GHz 7 5 GHz and 8 5 GHz with a cable connected between two test ports Standard deviation of the measured values at each frequency is calculated and then translated into a noise level expressed in dB rms Specification Serial Prefix MY421 or JPIKK E5070B lt 1 rms 0 23 5 C 3 MHz to 3 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 10 dBm through E5071B lt 1 rms 23 5 C 3 MHz to 4 25 GH
65. EG CLE IRL 181 System Dynamic Range Test 1 2 182 Dynamic Accuracy Test RI Shag oa CEDE pes Se es 185 Contents Uncorrected System Performance 189 3 Adjustment Safety Considerations cvs ose lad Bane ear REND RUD EE UP I 194 Warm up for Adjustment 1 194 Required Equipment teer beet beth enecpee 194 Required Adjustment after Replacing 195 Wntng TID xs da eet UE Sepe pd eee bue bue atl dede 195 Frequency Reference 195 Oven Reference Adjustment evans dsb RR EU ERR aee 196 IF Range Gain Phase 4 196 Source Power Adjustment lieve o bn eme eb ue eU ei ba ee RE ERE 196 Test Ports Characteristics 4 197 4 Troubleshooting Introd cti n e Dp PEE eee ue ane Gatos 200 How to exit from the E5070B E5071B Measurement View 201 To Troubleshoot the 7 2
66. Figure 2 66 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B Ca ooo0 aa 9 aano a aa 20000 oo oo OO aaa UL N m N m Cable e5070bse037 Figure 2 67 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B ada 9 gt 0000 aa eaa 0000 oo 9 m N m N m Cable e50 0bse038 114 Chapter 2 Figure 2 68 e5070bse010 Figure 2 69 e5070bse039 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B aa ao 2 OO 0000 aa 04 0000 amp OO W um N m N m Cable O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 5070 5071 aa aa a 0000 aa 0000 e 0000 aa Ja 0000 0090 CG Be OGC
67. Figure 5 3 Top View Miscellaneous Parts e5070bse058 294 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Table 5 3 Top View Miscellaneous Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0430 3 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 2 E5070 01229 4 1 ANGLE 3 0515 1946 8 4 SCREW 4 0515 0430 3 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 5 0515 1382 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 6 FL T15 6 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 7 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 8 0515 1946 8 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 9 0515 1402 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN T15 10 1400 1051 4 1 SADDLE WIRE 11 0403 1143 0 1 GUIDE PC BD 12 1400 0866 7 1 CLAMP CABLE 13 1400 3207 6 2 CABLE TIE Chapter 5 295 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx 42301396 and below Top View Under Power Supply Figure 5 4 Top View Under Power Supply 10 0 Ge JO e e5070bse059 296
68. Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST If Cal Kit is set to 85032F press lt gt D a oa to select Restore Cal Kit Set Offset Delay and Offset Loss of the N N cable in accordance with the following procedure a Press HD W CY and Enter J to select Modify Cal kit function b Press to select Define STDs function Press gt CD gt CU CV CI CV CI CU C and to select 11 Thru function d Press lt gt W W CU W CUD GD W A CV and Enter then press L J L8 8 Gin to enter 2 68 nsec as the Offset Delay e Press CV lt gt and Enter J then press 1 C C1 Gin to enter 1 1 as the Offset Loss m D m 3 5 Press CV and to select Calibrate function Press CA CV CY and Enter to select 2 Port Cal Press to go down to Select Ports menu Select 1 2 preset ports Press gt and Enter to select Reflection calibration and to go down to its menu Connect Open termination to the Port 1 and perform Port 1 Open calibration Perform Port 1 Short calibration with Short termination connected to the Port 1 Perform Port 1 Load calibration with Load termination Connected to the Port 1 Connect Open termination to the tip of the N N cable connected to the Port 2 and perform Port 2 open calibration Perform Port 2 Short calibration
69. Replace the removable hard disk drive by inverse procedure of removal Restore backup files onto the new removable hard disk drive as described in Restore Backup Files onto the New Removable Hard Disk Drive on page 394 Calibrate the touch screen as described in Calibration of the Touch Screen on page 395 Chapter 6 393 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Replacement Procedure Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Restore Backup Files onto the New Removable Hard Disk Drive The Backup files is stored in the flash ROM on the analog interface board The file must be restored in the new removable hard disk drive with the adjustment program For detail of the adjustment program refer to Chapter 3 Adjustment on page 193 Run the adjustment program Input the GPIB address of the 5070 5071 Input the serial number of the E5070B E5071B Choose Spot Adjustment Choose HDD 394 Chapter 6 Figure 6 9 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Replacement Procedure Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Calibration of the Touch Screen When you have replaced the HDD on a E5070B E5071B equipped with an Option 016 touch screen you have to calibrate the touch screen Follow the procedure described below to calibrate the touch screen Press
70. aa ao 0000 0000 0000 aa 19 0000 oo aoa 00 9 QD Qo T_T N SHORT m D 3 5 e Program or download the VBA test program shown in Program 2 1 Also set a UserForm window to enable the test result output data to be displayed An example of the UserForm window is shown in Figure 2 18 Refer to the Agilent E5070B E5071B VBA Programmer s Guide for the UserForm setup procedure Press and select the following S parameter from menu Option 213 214 313 314 21 Option 413 414 32 These parameters are shown in the first row in Table 2 13 S parameter settings for crosstalk tests Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 521 521 532 2 512 512 523 3 Not required 32 S41 4 Not required 23 514 Press O CBD C4 C4 select Averaging Restart Enter to restart the swept measurements Wait until a trace for the average of 16 swept measurements is displayed Chapter 2 59 NOTE Figure 2 18 Program 2 1 Step 25 Step 26 Step 27 Step 28 Step 29 Step 30 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
71. c Connect an type N Short termination to all the test ports For more information on the Trace Noise tests setup see Table 4 9 Trace Noise tests setup Test parameter Connect Short Test frequency points IFBW Nop RF termination to power settings and Sweep delay Automatic 511 test ports 3 MHz 1 3 GHz 1 31 GHz 2 1 GHz and 2 11 GHz E5070B 522 3 MHz 1 3 GHz 1 31 GHz 2 1 GHz 2 11 533 GHz 4 25 GHz 4 26 GHz 7 5 GHz and 8 5 d GHz E5071B 3 kHz BW 101 max source power 100 ms d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Trace Noise port 1 tests are in progress e When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 52 250 Chapter 4 Figure 4 52 Trace Noise test results example E5071B Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Trace Noise xi 511 Mag Phase 522 Mag Phase 533 Mag Phase 544 Mag Phase e5070bse131 Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Start Test Select All Select None Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass
72. not share this folder Share this folder Share D Comment Default share User limit 6 Maximum allowed C Allow Users To set permissions for how users access this T folder dons the network click Permissions Permissions To configure settings for Offline access to this shared folder click Caching Caching Remove Share Cancel Apply e507 0buj048 5 The New Share dialog box Figure D 9 appears Enter the share name name used when accessed from the external PC in the Share Name box 1 in Figure D 9 and click the OK button 2 in Figure D 9 512 Appendix D Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Figure D 9 New Share dialog box New Share 121 x Share Name fecum Comment User Limit 3 ser Limit 1 2 Permissions Maximum Allowed Allow Users e507 0buj049 6 In the C or USERS D Properties dialog box click the OK button 2 in Figure D 8 Step 4 Set up the external PC s IP address and subnet mask 1 Double click My Computer icon on Windows desktop of the external PC And double click Control Panel The Control Panel window will appear 2 Inthe Control Panel window double click Network The Network dialog box shown in fig will appear In the Configuration tab select TCP IP display it in revers video and press the Properties button 3 The dialog box appears If Specify an IP address has been
73. user recovery press here You chose to recover your own system backup image file WARNING Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want to proceed The C partition will be completely overwritten with no chance of recovering any data Use Option 3 to recover the system from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently deleted files on the system s primary C partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit Step 9 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard to start the user recovery If you want to cancel the user recovery press _E J here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit CAUTION Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause serious damage to the 5070 5071 Step 10 The user recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes When the user recovery is complete the message as shown below appears Press Ct J At J and Delete of the keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLI ALT DEL to restart your system NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distr
74. 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 Chapter 2 187 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 188 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Pr
75. 23 5 C 3 MHz to 3 GHz E5071B 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 3 GHz 110 dB 23 5 C 3 GHz to 6 GHz 100 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz 90 dB 23 5 C 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz Serial Prefix MY422 and above E5070B 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 3 GHz E5071B 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 3 GHz 109 dB 23 5 C 3 GHz to 6 GHz 99 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz 89 dB 23 5 C 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz The crosstalk specification applies when response calibration is performed 50 Chapter 2 Test equipment Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Coaxial cable with Type N m connectors 61 cm 24 in Type N m coaxial Short termination 4 ea Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 part of Agilent 85032F 54D 3 3E 50D with Type N adapter Procedure Step 1 Connect the N N cable as shown in the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 10 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 11 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 10 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 213 214 E5070B 5071B C9 0000 aa 0000 aa ea aaoo Da aaa 0 N m N m Cable e5070bse006 Chapter 2 51 m D m 3 5 Figure 2 11 e5070bse007 Figure 2 12 e5070bse01 1 Performance Tests 5
76. 465 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures lists the required procedures that must be performed after the replacement of an assembly CPU or DIMM Memory These are the recommended minimum procedures to ensure that the replacement is successfully completed Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC 1 Source Board Perform the following required adjustments using Source Board in Spot Adjustment of the program Frequency Reference Adjustment Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment To Execute the Internal Test on page 219 To Execute the External Test on page 240 Frequency Accuracy Test RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test RF Output Level Linearity Test Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System Dynamic Range Test Dynamic Accuracy Test Uncorrected System Performance Test A3 Level Vernier Board Perform the following required adjustments using Level Vernier in Spot Adjustment of the program Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment To Execute the Internal Test on page 219 To Execute the External Test on page 240 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test RF Output Level Linearity Test Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System Dynamic Range Test Dynamic Accuracy Test Uncorrected System
77. 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 3 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 156 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 4 25 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 1
78. A3DC Pass Detail S Rch Power Gain Pass Detail Step Attenuator Pass Detail Select All Select None Start Test Copyright 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc e5070bse139 If any of the test groups failed click Detail button of that test group to look into the breakdown of the test results Figure 4 21 shows a breakdown test result example Chapter 4 221 Figure 4 21 Step 14 To exit the internal test click Exit button Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Breakdown test result display example Analog 10 9 Analog 4 V 4 Analog 5 Digital 51 Digital 3 3 TEMP TEMP B e5070bse140 A2 Master DC x Analog GND Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Exit NOTE Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes but it does not clear the test results Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting Table 4 1 represents the contents of the internal tests and the relationships of failed tests to probable faulty board assemblies If the instrument fails the internal test replace the faulty board assembly as shown in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test Test First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly No group Al A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver 7 Src Lvl Amp
79. Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures 470 Chapter 7 gt lt 2 en D 2 D 2 n Manual Changes This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to versions or configurations of the E5070B E5071B manufactured earlier than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to E5070B E5071B units with the serial number that is printed on the title page of this manual 471 Manual Changes Manual Changes EE Manual Changes To adapt this manual to your E5070B E5071B refer to Table A 1 and Table A 2 Table A 1 Manual Changes by Serial Number Serial Prefix or Number Make Manual Changes Table A 2 Manual Changes by Firmware Version Version Make Manual Changes The ten character serial number is stamped on the serial number plate Figure A 1 on the rear panel Figure A 1 Serial Number Plate Agilent Technologies Made In Malaysia 507 12345678 e5070buj7013 472 Appendix A 0 lt m 3 2 lt lt System Recovery This appendix describes how to recover the operating system Windows 2000 when the operating system has been damaged 473 System Recovery System Recovery System Recovery By executing system recovery you can return the system of the E5070B E5071B the Windows operating system and the firmw
80. Step 4 Check the Local Area Connection icon to confirm whether the network connection is enabled or disabled The meaning of the icon is shown in the right of Figure 4 29 If the connection is disabled Double click the Local Area Connection icon Step 5 Set up the IP address subnet mask as follows a Click the Local Area Connection icon with the right button and click Property This opens the Local Area Connection Property dialog box as shown in Figure 4 30 Figure 4 30 Network dialog box Local Area Connection Properties 12 xi General Connect using Intel R PRO 100 VM Desktop Adapter 2 Components checked are used by this connection Client for Microsoft Networks File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks M Y Internet Protocol TCP IP Install Uninstall Properties Description Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft network Show icon in taskbar when connected OK e5070bse115 b Click Internal Protocol TCP IP icon c Click the Properties button This opens the TCP IP Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 4 31 234 Chapter 4 Figure 4 31 NOTE Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting TCP IP Properties dialog box IP Address tab Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties gt General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise
81. System dynamic rang measurement for select ports setting as shown in the first and second row in Table 2 17 Press and verify that Correction is set to ON Chapter 2 71 Step 24 NOTE Step 25 NOTE Step 26 Table 2 18 Step 27 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Press Avg J C gt C gt select Averaging to set the Averaging function to OFF Be sure to set the Averaging function to OFF Program or download the test program shown in Program 2 2 Also set a UserForm window to enable the test result output data to be displayed An example of the UserForm window is shown in Figure 2 25 Refer to the Agilent E5070B E5071B VBA Programmer s Guide for the UserForm setup procedure Press and select the following S parameter from menu Option 213 214 21 Option 313 314 413 414 32 These parameters are shown in the first row in Table 2 18 S parameter settings for system dynamic range test Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 521 532 532 2 512 523 523 3 Not required 521 541 4 Not required 12 514 Press to run the test program This test program repeats a swept measurement 16 times calculates the RMS deviation from the 16 measurement values at each sweep frequency point and extracts the maximum deviation value for each of the following frequency ranges 5070 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz and 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz 2 ranges E5071B for serial prefix MY421
82. The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard to start the factory recovery If you want to cancel the factory recovery press EJ here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit _ Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause serious damage to the E5070B E5071B The factory recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes When the factory recovery is complete the message as shown below appears Press and Delete of the keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLT ALT DEL to restart your system If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor After restart the screen for initial registration appears Execute initial registration For information on the execution procedure refer to Initial Registration of 5070 5071 on page 493 For the E5070B E5071B equipped with the Option 016 touch screen execute the calibration of the touch screen For information on the execution procedure refer to Calibration of the Touch Screen on page 496 480 Appendix B System Recovery System Recovery Procedure to create t
83. is sent to a correct program message SENS 1 SWE POIN 201 this instrument receives the former message as an invalid one because all parameters have not been entered Enter command parameters correctly N No GPIB system coniroller The GPIB system controller is not set properly This error occurs when USB GPIB interface is not connected or the interface setting is improper during the measurement for power calibration data or for that in scalar mixer calibration It also occurs when USB GPIB interface is not connected or the interface setting is improper though the control of the external signal source is enabled Ensure the connection of USB GPIB interface and its setting No valid memory trace This error occurs when you have executed either DISP WIND TRAC MEM ON command to display memory trace or any other command to enable data caglculation using memory trace CALC MATH FUNC command with other than NORM is specified though no valid data exists in memory trace This error is not generated by front key operations Numeric data error An error resulting from the numeric value data including numeric value data having no decimal point representation has occurred A numeric value error other than Errors 121 through 129 has occurred Numeric data not allowed 528 Appendix F 200 225 220 108 41 220 221 Messages Option not installed An numeric value data element not violating the standard has been
84. 2550 0 IDE ATA ATAPI Disable 9 8 Keyboards Uninstall t T Mice and other Monitors Scan for hardware changes Big Network adapte 7 Ports COM amp LI qp Sound video and game controllers Ml System devices E Universal Serial Bus controllers Properties Start 22 Manager Z Device Manager 0 5 3 13 e5070bse114 To Check the Front Panel Procedure Randomly press the front panel keys and rotate the knob to verify that they work normally Press key Click Service Menu and then Test Menu in the softkeys Click Front Panel in the test menu This opens Front Panel Test dialog box as shown in Figure 4 27 Front Panel Test dialog box Press any key and rotate RPG To exit press Preset key three times Randomly press the front panel keys The key code along with the name of the pressed key are displayed in the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 28 Turn the rotary knob clockwise or counterclockwise The dialog box indicates the direction of the turned knob and a count of RPG output 230 Chapter 4 Figure 4 28 Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Key code and key name display example Front Panel Test Press any key and rotate RPG Key Code 0x11 Meas To exit press Preset key three times
85. 27 a REF 8 a REF 9 a REF 10 a REF 11 a REF 12 a REF 13 a REF 14 a REF 15 a REF NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies listed below E5071B for serial prefix CW frequency 6 GHz 422 and above Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0 7 a REF 6 a REF 5 a REF 4 a REF 122 Chapter 2 Performance Tests Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation NOTE dBm a REF 3 a REF 2 a REF 1 a REF 1 2 a REF 3 a REF 4 a REF 5 a REF 6 a REF 7 a REF 8 a REF 9 a REF 10 a REF 11 12 13 14 a REF 15 a REF E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet U 3 D 2 n Make copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies listed below E5071B for serial prefix 8 5 GHz 422 and above CW frequency Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0 5 a REF 4 a REF 3 a REF Chapter 2 123 Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Power
86. 3M 15G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3G 4G 10 lt 121 4G 6G 10 lt 117 66 756 10 lt 112 756 856 10 lt 105 3 156 3k lt 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 3G 4G 3k 96 4G 6G 3k 92 184 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 6G 7 5G 3k lt 87 75G 85G 3k lt 80 Direction 514 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 36 46 10 lt 121 46 66 10 lt 117 6G 7 5G 10 lt 112 75G 85G 10 lt 105 3M 15G 3k lt 95 1 5G 3G 3k lt 97 3G 4G 3k lt 96 4G 6G 3k lt 92 6G 7 5G 3k lt 87 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 80 Dynamic Accuracy Test Reference power level 10 dBm Direction S21 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 Chapter 2 185 I 9 5 9 3 D 2 o E N E Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test resu
87. 5 2 Receiver 8 Sre Lev Amp Xtl Sre Vern Mod Oven 15 17 Swt 1 Frequency accuracy test Standard 1A Frequency accuracy test Opt 1 5 only 2 RF output level accuracy HHH HHH and flatness test 3 RF output level linearity HHH THE test 4 CW trace noise test HHH THE 5 Crosstalk test TH TH HHH 6 System dynamic range test TH THE HHH 7 Dynamic accuracy test THHE THE 8 Uncorrected system TH THE HHH performance test Most suspicious assembly Suspicious assembly Possible faulty assembly A o gt 4 261 NOTE Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1IKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below When you replace the A20 digital motherboard you need to confirm the jumper settings for the specific CPU installed The jumper settings information is provided in Configure the Motherboard on page 262 You also need to confirm the BIOS options using the BIOS setup utility procedure Since the BIOS detects the A27 mass storage and displays the profile of the disk drive it is a useful tool to verify whether the A27 has a
88. 94 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 37 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B GPIB Controller aa aa oa C 0000 aa aano gt 0000 aa gd aaoo oo nma onon 0 u 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable GPIB Interface Cable 7 Z5623A H01 Power Meter 159 eoueuuojeg Z Power Sensor e5070bse026 Figure 2 38 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B GPIB Controller aa aa 0000 aa 0000 aa cann Cd amp EXE De opga od LU d 6dB Fixed Attenuation Cable GPIB Interface Cable Power Meter Power Sensor e5070bse027 Chapter 2 95 Figure 2 39 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B cia S aa 0000 aa oo000 e gt 0000 aa et 2000 amp 000
89. 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Direction 14 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Dynamic Accuracy Test Reference power level 10 dBm 136 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Direction 521 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 12 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075
90. Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 396 NOTE If it is a version where the E5070B 71B doesn t have the removable hard disk assembly skip this step Step 3 Disconnect the flat cable item 1 from the A23 handler I O board Step 4 Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 2 fastening the A23 handler I O board Step 5 Slide the A23 handler I O board toward backward Replacement Procedure Step 1 Replace the A23 handler I O board by inverse procedure of removal 402 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A23 Handler I O Board Replacement Figure 6 13 A23 Handler I O Board Removal 2 D Q D 3 2 U E o
91. Connected from the mass storage disk assembly or the removable hard disk assembly item 4 e Connected to the A32 USB connector item 5 Connected to the Front Panel display item 6 The mylar cable item 6 and its connector are very fragile It s recommended to replace the mylar cable when the cable is disconnedted and connected frequently 410 Chapter 6 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 6 17 Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Remove three TORX T10 screws item 7 fastening the guide plate Remove eight TORX T10 screws item 8 fastening the digital motherboard Lift the digital motherboard Replacement Procedure Disassemble the guide plate from rear side of the mother board Assemble the removed part on the new board Clamp the two clips using the new cable tie for DIMM memorys Install the new board by the reverse procedure of removal A20 Digital Motherboard Removal e5070bse5006
92. E5071 00211 3 1 PANEL FRONT E5071B Opt 21x E5071 00213 5 1 PANEL FRONT E5071B Opt 31x E5071 00214 6 1 PANEL FRONT E5071B Opt 41x 7 5182 7594 2 1 8 5070 66533 8 1 A33 USB Adapter 0515 0430 2 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 9 See Table 5 54 1 STANDBY SWITCH ASSEMBLY 10 E5070 60101 5 1 LCD FILTER ASSY Standard E5070 60102 6 1 LCD TPANEL ASSY Opt 016 2090 0888 2 1 BACKLIGHT included in LCD ASSY 11 0950 4091 2 1 A52 INVERTER 1 5700 0515 1974 2 2 SCREW MACH M2 5 x 4 PN T8 12 E5070 01211 4 1 BRACKET INVERTER 13 E5070 00621 8 1 COVER SHIELD 14 0371 3953 4 1 KEY CAP 15 3100 3711 1 SWITCH ROTARY Chapter 5 347 e 2 n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Rear View Rear View Figure 5 32 e5070bse3006 Chapter 5 348 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Table 5 32 Rear View Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 2 0515 0430 3 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 3 1250 0252 6 1 BNC CONNECTOR Opt 1 5 2950 0035 8 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM Opt 1E5 2190 0102 9 1 WSHR LK INTL Opt 1 5 6960 0041 1 1 PLUG HOLE Opt UNQ 4 2950 0054 1 2 NUT
93. Ente Select T2 from the Measure SVC menu Press and select S21 from S parameter menu Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 0 dB and the second attenuator A2 to 10 dB 86 Chapter 2 Step 15 NOTE Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 NOTE Step 23 Step 24 Step 25 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 10 Adjust the source power for 0 dBm on the power meter display Wait for power meter reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result Since the source power resolution is 0 05 dB adjust for the nearest possible value to 0 dBm Press CY Enter to make Single sweep measurement Record the value of the source power setting in the calculation sheet Power setting dB column for the dynamic accuracy test The record starts from DA10 row m D a 3 5 Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Pm dB column Read the mean value of the T2 S21 displayed in the upper left corner of the graphic display and record it in the calculation sheet Tx dB column Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 10 The to
94. HP Infiniun BIOS Version 1 1 18 13 97 Copyright 1996 Chips and Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Splash Screen The splash screen is displayed with Agilent logo as shown in Figure 4 7 If the splash screen is displayed you can assume that the A20 digital motherboard is functioning correctly While the splash screen is displayed If you want to run the BIOS setup utility push Delete key as soon as the message of Press TAB to show POST screen DEL to enter SETUP F12 to select BOOT DEVICE in the splash screen TAB Show the POST Power on Self Test screen for BIOS 208 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Key Action DEL Run the BIOS Setup Utility For details of how to run the BIOS setup utility refer to Run the BIOS setup utility on page 264 F12 Select the boot device This menu is used for system recovery For the detail of the recovery refer to Appendix B System Recovery on page 473 Figure 4 7 Splash Screen Agilent Technologies Press TAB to show POST screen DEL to enter SETUP 12 to select BOOT DEVICE Step 3 Searching for boot record E5070B E5071B starts booting from A27 mass storage IDE 0 after the splash screen appears However if the E5070B E5071B cannot boot from the A27 a message of Boot Failure is displayed as shown in Figure 4 8 In
95. MaxValB As Variant Dim MaxValC As Variant MaxValD As Variant MaxValE As Variant MaxValF As Variant MaxValG As Variant MaxValH As Variant Ver Name If Ver E5070B Then Count 99 ReDim X Count ReDim Y Count ElseIf Ver E5071B Then Count 199 ReDim X Count ReDim Y Count End If SCPI TRIGger SEQuence Source BUS SCPI INITiate 1 CONTinuous True For I 0 To 15 SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGl I Dmy 5 4882 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect Val I SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA FDATa Next I 78 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST For J 0 To Count X J 1 0 J 2 Next J For J 0 To Count 1 To 15 X J Val I J 2 Next I Y J Sqr X J 16 Next J SCPI INITiate 1 CONTinuous False Rms CVar Y SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA FDATa Rms SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe AUTO I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Lan oi If Ver E5070B Then SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function TYPE MAX SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 3000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 1500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELecte
96. Press lt gt lt gt and to select 85032F If Cal Kit is set to 85032F press lt gt QC C0 Cv to select Restore Cal Kit Press C and to select Calibrate function Press lt gt lt gt and to select Response Thru calibration Press to go down to Select Ports menu Select 2 1 21 for the option 213 214 instruments and 3 2 S32 for the option 313 314 413 414 instruments as shown in the first row in Table 2 17 Select Ports settings for response calibration Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 2 1 S21 3 2 S32 3 2 S32 2 1 2 S12 2 3 S23 2 3 S23 3 Not required 2 1 S21 4 1 S41 4 Not required 1 2 S12 1 4 S14 Step 13 Press CV lt gt and to perform Isolation calibration Wait until the calibration is completed Chapter 2 69 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Step 14 Disconnect the load and connect the N N cable as shown in the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 22 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 23 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 22 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 213 214 E5070B 5071B N m N m Cable e5070bse006 Figure 2 23 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B
97. Press Service Menu Update Firmware on the menu bar and the Password dialog box Appendix C 501 m z Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 08 01 and A 08 11 will appear NOTE If you do not see Update Firmware soft key execute log off and re login as agena 3 Enter the password e507xa into the Password box then click OK 4 Open dialog box apperas Confirm that E5070 msi is displayed at the File name column Press the Open button and the Windows instoller will appear 5 After the disk 1 installation is finished insert the firmware installation disk 2 2 of into the FDD of the E5070B E5071B then click OK 6 Repeat 5 for the number of floppy disks Step 5 After the disk n installation is fininshed the instrument will be restarted and the measurement view will appear Step 6 Press Firmware Revision Confirm the firmware revision you have just installed 502 Appendix C Step 1 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 09 10 or later Firmware Update for revision A 09 10 or later Required Equipment e 5070 or E5071B with keyboard and mouse e USB mass storage device Location of the latest E5070B 71B Firmware The latest firmware can be downloaded from the following site http Www agilent com find ena support How to update the E
98. This attenuator state is named DA20a The following Steps 30 through 32 are performed to equalize the receiver port input levels for the DA20 and DA20a Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the difference in Tx dB values for the DA20 and DA20a by using the following equation A Tx dB Tx dB DA20a Tx dB DA20 Press gt lt gt to make Continuous sweep measurement Adjust the source power for the following value on the power meter display Target value Pm db DA20a A Tx dB It will be possible to promptly approximate the source power to the target value by decreasing the source power setting by A Tx from that for the DA20 After this adjustment is performed the state is named DA20b Perform Step 16 through 19 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 20 Perform Step 16 through 19 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 25 dBm using the following equation D A Tx DA25 Tx DA20b Pm DA25 Pm DA20b 88 Chapter 2 Step 38 Step 39 NOTE Table 2 22 Step 40 Step 41 Step 42 Step 43 Step 44 Step 45 Step 46 Step 47 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running D A dB column for DA25 Calculate the true dynamic accuracy using
99. calibration Press to go down to Select Ports menu Select 2 1 S21 for the option 213 214 313 314 instruments and 3 2 S32 for the option 413 414 instruments as shown in the first row in Table 2 12 Select Ports settings for response calibration Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 2 1 S21 2 1 S21 3 2 S32 2 1 2 S12 1 2 S12 2 3 S23 3 Not required 3 2 S32 4 1 S41 4 Not required 2 3 S23 1 4 S14 Press gt and Enter to perform Thru calibration Wait until the calibration is completed Press lt gt C and to perform Done Change Select Ports setting as shown in the second row in Table 2 12 Perform Step 13and 14 For the option 213 214 instruments skip to Step 20 For the option 313 314 413 414 proceed to Step 18 Response calibration for options 313 314 413 and 414 only Connect the test equipment N N cable as shown in Figure 2 13 Opt 313 314 and Figure 2 14 Opt 413 414 56 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Figure 2 13 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B SS aga oa A aa 2000 00 e 0000 0000 oa OOO aaa 00 daa O Q m D m 3 5 N m N m Cable e5070bse009 Figure 2 14 Response calibration setup for crosstalk tes
100. dialog box External Test Failure Troubleshooting Table 4 11 represents the contents of the external tests test objectives and the relationships of failed tests to probable faulty board assemblies If the instrument fails an external test 254 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test replace the faulty board assembly as shown in Table 4 11 Table 4 11 External test failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly No test Al 4 6 2 Receiver 23 Src Lev Pow Sw T Hnd Vern Amp cont A15 A17 1 Power Gain 12 50MHz Source power THE THE Al and 2 for Port 2 and receiver gain for Port 1 2 S12 3GHz Source power THE THE for Port 2 and receiver gain for Port 1 3 12 6GHz Source power THE THE TH THE for Port 2 and receiver gain for Port 1 E5071B 4 S21 50MHz Source power THE THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 2 5 S21 3GHz Source power THE THE THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 2 6 521 6GHz Source power THE THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 2 E5071B 4 a 2 2 e e Chapter 4 255 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Table 4 11 External test failure troubleshooting
101. e TORX screwdriver T10 e Flat edge screwdriver e Open end torque wrench 9 16 inch e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 19 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Remove the N connector holder as described in N Connector Replacement on page 462 Disconnect the semi rigid cables and the termination from the receiver module as shown in Table 6 3 The label on the semi rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 20 on page 327 214 Figure 5 21 on page 328 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 28 on page 341 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 313 Figure 5 22 on page 330 314 Figure 5 23 on page 332 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 29 on page 342 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 413 Figure 5 24 on page 334 414 Figure 5 25 on page 336 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421
102. for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual Typeface Conventions Sample bold Boldface type is used when a term is defined or emphasised Sample Italic Italic type is used for emphasis key Sample key Indicates a hardkey key on the front panel or external keyboard labeled Sample may be omitted Sample menu button box Indicates a menu button box on the screen labeled Sample which can be selected executed by clicking menu button or box may be omitted Sample block toolbar Indicates a block group of hardkeys or a toolbar setup toolbar labeled Sample Sample 1 Sample 2 Sample 3 Indicates a sequential operation of Sample 1 Sample 2 and Sample 3 menu button or box may be omitted Contents 1 General Information Precautions oe dee EET Lee Yell AEE ede ven e Gone eh eis ethane 20 Software Installed esteso EES d sae eee ORA 20 Organization of Service 4 4 4 21 Instrument Covered by This Manual 1 23 Required Equipments CENA a SE S AT Wie aoe 24 Power Meter Accuracy Test cssc RR ese eben a Ad
103. or 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz 1 5 GHz to 4 GHz 4 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz and 7 5 GHz to 8 GHz 5 ranges E5071B for serial prefix MY422 and above 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 4 GHz 4 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz and 7 5 GHz to 8 GHz 6 ranges The maximum deviation value in each frequency range is represented in dB and displayed in the VBA UserForm window as shown in the display example below 72 Chapter 2 Figure 2 25 Step 28 Step 29 Step 30 Step 31 Step 32 Step 33 Figure 2 26 e5070bse019 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST VBA UserForm window display example 3M to 1 5G Hz 1 5 G to 3 G Hz 3 G to 4 G Hz 4 G to 6 G Hz 6 G to 7 5 G Hz 7 5 G to 8 5 G Hz c e5070bse7001 Record the maximum RMS deviation values in the performance test record Test result dB column for the system dynamic range test Press Exit button on the SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST window Press Avg J Enter 3 J k m to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 3 KHz and perform Step 27 through 29 Press Avg 1 0 x1 to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 10 Hz change the S parameter setting as shown in the second row in Table 2 18 and perform Step 27 through 30 For the option 313 314 413 414 proceed to Step 33 Response Thru calibration for options 313 314 413 and 414 only Connect the Load terminatio
104. window The window displays the port number and receiver channel as the test points The result for each S parameter is displayed as the 4x2 matrix Figure 4 44 A o gt 4 245 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 44 Receiver Linearity tests dialog box example E5070B E5071B Opt 413 414 512 Mag Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 521 Mag Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 531 Mag Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 541 Mag Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse126 b Selectthe S parameters for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 45 Follow the instruction NOTE Clicking Select button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box Figure 4 45 THRU 1 amp 2 dialog box Connect THRU between Port 1 and Port 2 e5070bse120 c Connect an type N m coaxial cable between the test ports in accordance with Table 4 T Table 4 7 Receiver Linearity test setups T
105. 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 Chapter 2 139 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Uncorrected System Performance Test Correction Off System Correction On Port 1 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Refle
106. 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Chapter 2 167 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Direction 531 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 168 Chapter 2 Perf
107. 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 531 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 150 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0
108. 1 attached to the instrument s rear panel The first five characters are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix Serial Number Label Example Agilent Technologies Made In Malaysia 507 12345678 e5070buj7013 An instrument manufactured after the printing date of this manual may have serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page This unlisted serial number prefix indicates the instrument is different from those described in this manual The manual for this new instrument may be accompanied by a yellow Manual Changes supplement or have a different manual part number This sheet contains change information that explains how to adapt the manual to the newer instrument In addition to change information the supplement may contain information for correcting errors Errata in the manual To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest Manual Changes supplement The supplement for this manual is identified by this manual s printing data and is available from Agilent Technologies If the serial prefix or number of an instrument is lower than that on the title page of this manual see Appendix A Manual Changes For information concerning a serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page or in the Manual change supplement contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office Chapter 1 23 Gen
109. 10 lt 90 Direction S14 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 90 System Dynamic Range Test Direction S21 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Chapter 2 Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5G 4G 10 lt 122 46 66 10 lt 118 60 756 10 lt 113 7 5 8 5 10 lt 106 163 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 3k 95 1 5G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 93 6G 7 5G 3k lt 88 7 5G 8 5G 3k lt 81 Direction S12 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 15G 4G 10 lt 122 46 66 10 lt 118 66 7 56 10 lt 113 75G 85G 10 106 3M 1 5G 3k 95 1 5G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 93 6G 7 5G 3k lt 88 3k lt 81 7 5 G 8 5 G Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Tes
110. 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 4 25 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 176 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 6 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17
111. 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 85G lt 10 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 3G 6G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 6G 85G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 3G 6G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 6G 85G 1 0 Chapter 2 191 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Lan oi Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above 192 Chapter 2 d gt 2 c o um E oO 5 Adjustment This chapter provides the adjustment information for the E5070B E5071B ENA Series Network Analyzer to ensure that the it is within its specifications The adjustment must be performed Agilent s qualified service personnel If you need the adjustment for your E5070B E5071B it should be sent to the nearest Agilent Technologies service office 193 Adjustment Safety Considerations Safety Considerations This manual contains NOTEs CAUTIONs and WARNINGS that must be followed to ensure the safety of the operator and to keep the instrument in a safe and serviceable condition The adjustment must be performed by Agilent s qualified service personnel WARNING Any interruption of the protective ground conductor inside or outside the equipment or disconnection of the protective ground terminal can make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption of the protective ground system for any reason is prohibited Warm up for Ad
112. 4 40 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Power Gain test results display example E5071B Opt 413 414 NOTE 512 Pass Pass Pass 521 Pass Pass Pass 531 Pass Pass Pass 541 Pass Pass Pass Select All Select None Exit e5070bse121 f If at least one of the Tch Power Gain tests failed refer to Table 4 11 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g Toreturn to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 2 Tch IF Ranging tests These tests check the IF signal level ranging operation of test channel receiver for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Fixed attenuator 10 dB N m N f 8491A B C IF Ranging tests dialog box example E5070B E5071B Opt 413 414 Rch Tch Porti NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done Done Port2 Mag NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Port3 Mag NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done WNot Done Port4 Mag NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Start Test Select All Select None PN e 47 gt O e 3 Ko e5070bse122 b Select the port numbers for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 41 Follow the instruction Clicking Select All button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select No
113. 413 414 512 Pass Pass Pass Pass 521 Pass Pass Pass Pass 513 Pass Pass Pass Pass 523 Pass Pass Pass Pass 531 Pass Pass Pass Pass 532 Pass Pass Pass Pass 514 Pass Pass Pass Pass 534 Pass Pass Pass Pass 541 Pass Pass Pass Pass 543 Pass Pass Pass Pass Select All Select None Exit e5070bse129 f Ifatleast one of the Dynamic Range tests failed refer to Table 4 11 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g Toreturn to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 5 Trace Noise tests These tests check the trace noise levels for the selected test ports Required equipment Description Recommended model Type n coaxial Short termination 4 ea part of 85032F 85054D or part of 85033E 85050D with Type N adapter Procedure PN o gt Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in the right of Trace Noise in the window to open the Trace Noise window The window displays the S parameters and frequencies as the test points The result for each S parameter is displayed as the 9x2 matrix Figure 4 50 Chapter 4 249 Figure 4 50 NOTE Figure 4 51 NOTE Table 4 9 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Trace Noise tests dialog box example 5071 1 6 Laiche 2 1682 2 116 4 256 4 26GH2 7 56 gt
114. 5 If the above message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor Appendix B 485 Step 8 Step 9 CAUTION Step 10 NOTE System Recovery System Recovery The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the create user backup image press here You chose to create a backup image file of your system The system will perform a quick integrity check of the file structure on the C Drive It will then copy the C partition to an image file and store it on the System Recovery partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard to start the create user backup image If you want to cancel the create user backup image press here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit Never turn off the power during the create user backup image because doing so may cause serious damage to the E5070B E5071B The create user backup image will be complete in about 5 minutes When the create user backup image is complete the message as shown below appears Press and of
115. 6 The following screen appears Check that Floppy is selected highlighted if Floppy is not selected select it with of the keyboard and press of the keyboard Boot Menu Select a irst device 15120 HDD 0 SCRI CDROM HDD 1 HDD 2 HDD 3 ZIP100 USB FDD USB ZIP USB CDROM USB HDD LAN 11 Move ENTER Accept F4 Exit e5070buj035 Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the factory recovery press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options for the E5070 71B Choose One of the following Recover Factory Backup Image Create User Backup Image Recover User Backup Image WN np Exit Enter a Choice _ NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 476 Appendix B Step 8 Step 9 CAUTION Step 10 NOTE Step 11 Step 12 System Recovery System Recovery The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the factory recovery press EJ here You chose to Restore your system by installing the original factory installed OS and system software WARNING Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want to proceed The C Drive will be completely overwritten with no chance of recovering any
116. 71B doesn t have the removable hard disk assembly skip this step Release the cables from the clamp item 1 on the angle Disconnect the power supply cables item 2 and 3 Remove the two TORX T15 screws item 4 fastening the power supply holder Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 5 from the rear panel Lift the A50 ATX power supply assembly toward front side Disconnect the power supply cables item 6 Replacement Procedure Replace the A50 ATX power supply assembly by inverse procedure of removal Fasten the TORX T10 screws item 5 using a torque screwdriver 400 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement Figure 6 12 A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal S N Prefix JP1KK MY423 and below 4 20 D U O D Q S N Prefix MY424 and above e5070bse4008 Chapter 6 401 Replacement Procedure A23 Handler I O Board Replacement A23 Handler I O Board Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 13 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Step 2 Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in Removable Hard Disk
117. CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61632 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61688 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 E5070 61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 E5070 61673 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 E5070 61687 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 15 0955 0301 1 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 16 E5070 61656 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 17 1810 0118 1 4 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 333 e 2 oO 72 Figure 5 24 e5070bse069 I Aa i B ERE 25 gau ii Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and 421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 413 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 413 E 629 04 E Ent EL L 334 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Table 5 24 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 413 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61653 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7
118. CROSSTALK TEST Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B N m N m Cable Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B Se aa oa adno cada oa eda 0000 oo aaa oo I N m N m Cable NOTE Do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements To do so will cause a variance in measured values Step 2 Press and Enter to initialize the ES070B E5071B And press SveepSeup Power 5 x1 to set the power 5 dBm FW 3 60 and above and press Power Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function FW 3 60 and above and press Service Menu Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function FW 52 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST 3 54 and above Step 3 Press and select Lin Mag from display format menu Step 4 Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes IF Bandwidth 10 Hz IF Bandwidth 0 Averaging ON 4D 4D Cf select Averaging Enter Averaging factor now is set to 16 preset value Step 5 Set the test frequencies using the Segment Table as follows a Press Sweep Setup J P gt Ct 5 C 5 CHD CH C select Edi
119. Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Table 5 4 Top View Under Power Supply Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61661 4 1 WIRE ASSY 2 E5070 61663 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 3 E5070 61662 5 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 4 E5070 6 1664 7 1 FLAT CBL ASSY Opt 016 5 E5070 61665 8 1 USB CABLE ASSY 6 E5070 61617 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY Opt x14 7 E5070 61614 7 1 WIRE ASSY YELLOW 8 E5070 61613 6 1 WIRE ASSY ORANGE Opt 31x 41x 9 E5070 61612 5 1 WIRE ASSY RED Opt 31x 41x 10 E5070 61615 8 1 WIRE ASSY BROWN Opt 21x E5070 61611 4 1 WIRE ASSY BROWN Opt 31x 41x Chapter 5 297 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx 42301396 and below Top View Motherboard and Other Parts Figure 5 5 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts
120. DR 4 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 354 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Figure 5 39 27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Mount Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JPIKK MY423 and below E5071B serial prefix JPIKK MY423 and below e5070ase056 Table 5 39 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Mount Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK MY423 and below E5071B serial prefix JPIKK MY423 and below Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 1410 1580 BUSHING 2 E5070 24011 SPACER Az Az Az 3 0515 0665 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 14 PN T10 4 E5070 01206 1 BRACKET HDD a 5 0515 0374 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 10 PN T10 e 2 n Chapter 5 355 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others A4 Power Amp Module Assembly Figure 5 40 A4 Power Amp Module Assembly e5070bse077 Table 5 40 A4 Power Amp Module Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0372 2 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 2 1400 1334 6 1 CABLE CLAMP 356 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others 8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JPIKK MY421 E5071B serial prefix MY421 Figure 5 41 8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JPIKK or MY421 E5071B serial prefix
121. E5070 61654 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61647 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61646 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61652 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 E5070 61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 E5070 61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 15 E5070 61675 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 16 0955 0301 9 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 17 E5070 61676 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 18 E5070 61687 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 19 1810 0118 1 1 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 335 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and 421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 Figure 5 25 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 1 3 NN Oe ae ot me Mp ay ARR e5070bse070 336 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Table 5 25 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61653 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61654 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 6164
122. E5070B 5071B S amp S aa C9 2000 a aa 58 2000 oo amp aoa 9 N m N m Cable gt gt 3 o EN OSL O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B 98 Chapter 2 Figure 2 43 e5070bse032 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B aa oo 9 0000 aa CX gt 0000 aa 654 0000 oo 00090 Lt BET EIE AQ A m Cable m D m 3 5 To avoid possible variance in measured values do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements Press Preset and to initialize the 5070 5071 And press S eepSeup Power Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set func
123. E5071B off before proceeding to the next step Confirm or Set the BIOS Options To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options BIOS is the PC s built in program describing the standard procedure of basic inputs and outputs for the system hardware BIOS involves the system BIOS start up program and BIOS setup utility The E5070B E5071B starts up first with the BIOS when the power 15 turned on Use the following procedure to confirm or set the BIOS options known as the BIOS setup utility 280 Chapter 4 Procedure Figure 4 73 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Run the BIOS setup utility Use the external keyboard to select and set various options in the BIOS setup utility Do not operate the E5070B E5071B front panel until you exit the BIOS option setup procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E5070B E5071B rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Press F2 key as soon as the splash screen as shown in Figure 4 14 is displayed Wait a few seconds until the message Enter CURRENT Password appears Press key The LED in the key lights Enter password e507xa and press Enter Then BIOS setup utility main menu is displayed as shown in Figure 4 73 BIOS setup utility main menu PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility F1 ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Sav
124. Enter J 3 J The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value 46 Chapter 2 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Press Sweep Setup 1 J 9 J x1Jto set the power level to 10 dBm which is the value of the trace noise test levels listed in Table 2 6 or Table 2 7 Press Trigger 4 gt and Enter J to make a Single sweep measurement A s dev standard deviation value will be displayed in the upper left corner of the graphic display Record the s dev value in the calculation sheet s dev uU column for the CW trace noise test Step 10 Calculate the dB value of the trace noise level using the following equation and record the calculated value in the calculation sheet Trace noise level dB rms column D Trace noise level 20 log 1 s dev x 106 S Step 11 Change the E5070B E5071B center frequency in accordance with Table 2 6 or Table 2 7 8 perform Step 8 through 10 for each frequency 9 Table 2 6 Trace noise CW Test test frequencies power level for serial prefix MY421 or 2 E Test E5070B E50 E5071B only frequency 71B 3M 1 36 4 25 GHz 6 GHz 7 5 GHz 8 5 GHz 2 1G 3GHz Power level 10 dBm 8 dBm 6 dBm Table 2 7 Trace noise CW Test test frequencies power level for serial prefix MY 422 and above Test E5070B E50 E5071B only frequency 71B 3M 1 3G 4 25 GHz 6 GH
125. F 72 75 Messages Valid power sensor not found for power calibration data or for that in scalar mixer calibration It also occurs when inoperable power meter is connected Ensure the connection of the power meter GPIB addresses and power supply Valid power sensor not found No valid sensor is connected to the power meter This error occurs when no power sensor is connected to the specified channel of the power meter during the measurement for power calibration data or for that in scalar mixer calibration Ensure the connection of the power sensor Valid signal generator not found No valid external signal source is connected This error occurs when the specified type of external signal source is not connected to the specified GPIB address though the control of the external signal source is enabled SENS OFFS LOC STAT ON and SENS OFFS LOC CONT ON It also occurs when USB GPIB interface is set but not connected Ensure the external signal source and the connection of USB GPIB interface Appendix F 535 4 Messages Auto port extension not allowed Warning Message A warning message is displayed in the instrument message Warning area in the lower left part of the display against a gray background Pushing a front panel key or executing DISP CCL command clears the message This message simply appears on the display being not known to a remote environment such as a GPIB This message is not display
126. Figure 6 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Replacement Procedure A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement Restore Backup Files onto the New Mass Storage Disk Drive The Backup files is stored in the flash ROM on the analog interface board The file must be restored in the new mass storage disk drive with the adjustment program For detail of the adjustment program refer to Chapter 3 Adjustment on page 193 20 D U O D Q the adjustment program Input the GPIB address of the E5070B E5071B Input the serial number of the E5070B E5071B Choose Spot Adjustment Choose HDD Calibration of the Touch Screen When you have replaced the HDD on a E5070B E5071B equipped with an Option 016 touch screen you have to calibrate the touch screen Follow the procedure described below to calibrate the touch screen Press System Press Service Menu Press Test Menu Press Adjust Touch Screen The touch screen calibration screen Figure 6 6 appears Touch Panel Calibration Screen Touch the x mark on the upper left with your finger The mark x appears also on the lower left upper right and lower right Touch the x marks in that order with your finger Touching the four locations described above with your finger automatically concludes the touch screen calibration NOTE With
127. For more details refer to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 219 218 Chapter 4 NOTE NOTE Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Troubleshooting Using Internal Test The Agilent E5070B E5071B has an internal test function to diagnose the analog measurement section and internal dc power supply voltages The internal test makes it possible to isolate a faulty board assembly without need of external test equipment The following paragraphs describe the procedure to perform the internal test There are cases where the internal test is ineffective insufficient for trouble isolation because the test objects are limited to the circuit blocks and functions that can be tested with nothing connected to the test ports In such cases refer to external test to perform the diagnosis for the range uncovered with the internal test Power On Self Test Power on self test always takes place once after the E5070B E507 1B is turned on When failure is detected a message of the Power on self test failed is displayed The content of the power on self test is the same as a portion of the internal test program and includes the power supply voltage source PLL synthesizer and level controller ALC tests When the self test failed perform the internal test to break down into the individual tests and narrow down failure possibilities The following procedure can be used to restart the power on self test
128. Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 109 6G 7 5G 10 lt 99 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 89 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 36 66 10 lt 109 6G 7 5G 10 lt 99 75G 85G 10 lt 89 Direction 14 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 36 66 10 lt 109 66 7 56 10 lt 99 75G 85G 10 lt 89 System Dynamic Range Test Direction 21 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 3G 4G 10 lt 121 486 68 10 lt 117 66 7 5 10 lt 112 75G 85G 10 105 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 182 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3G 4G 3k lt 96 4G 6G 3k lt 92 6G 7 5G 3k lt 87 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 80 Direction S12 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only E Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB g 3M 15G
129. HEX DBL CHAM 2190 0102 9 2 WSHR LK INTL T 5 0515 1402 1 6 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN T15 6 0515 0430 3 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 7 5070 01228 1 BRACKET for E5070B S N JP1KKxxxxx or MY42300632 and below for E5071B S N JPIKKxxxxx or MY42301396 and below E5070 01270 1 BRACKET for E5070B S N from MY42300633 to MY42399999 for E5071B S N from MY42301397 to MY42399999 E5070 01271 1 BRACKET for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Chapter 5 349 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Side View Side View Figure 5 33 QOO 95050008069 lt 0 0 QBOROROBSRGRGRO RORO OROORO ROSO PEES 505050005650 8 999920900095 95899955098955 090020900095 95900595959595 e5070bse052 Side View Table 5 33 4 2 As xe FF N 2 2 5 ME N ga E E E om ot 24 z 5 a 2 On oo Su 52 A x x x lt gt u s ae a 2 e mov aN Ese 2 gt n y 2 r adang T m A A 42598 22222 25585 S lt 88 Sh tt F678 amp x 2 aa wy 8 Baa 2 lt z
130. Insert the whole jut of the rubber key into the hole on the new A22 front panel keyboard Replace the A22 front panel keyboard by inverse procedure of removal 450 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Figure 6 39 A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal E5070B S N MY4241101 and above D 2 9 fad O 3 9 9 8 E5071B S N MY4242455 above 5 e5070bse5007 Chapter 6 451 Step 1 Step 2 Replacement Procedure A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK MY4232454 and below A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S N prefix MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK 4232454 and below Tools Required TORX screwdriver T8 T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 40 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx 42300632
131. OO gt 0000 aa oaco aa ay 000 2900 7 i too 00 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable GPIB Interface Cable 4 25623 01 Power Meter for 5 29 159 eoueuuojegd 72 Power Sensor e5070bse023 NOTE To avoid possible variance in measured values do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements NOTE Do not touch the power sensor during measurements Power meter zero adjustment NOTE This adjustment is required to subtract residual noise power of the Z5623A from the subsequent signal power measurements Step 3 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 11 dB and the second attenuator A2 to 110 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 11 OUTPUT 712 at b 110 Step 4 Press Preset and Enter to initialize the E5070B E5071B And press S eepSeup Power Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function FW 3 60 and above and press Servise Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function FW 3 54 and above Chapter 2 85 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Perform
132. Parameter Directivity m Response Port 1 z Stimulus Port 2 About 5070 5 254 b Press OK button The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown Figure 2 48 or Figure 2 49 Figure 2 48 Directivity for E5070B 3M to 3G BETETTTERE 507005 168 Figure 2 49 Directivity for E5071B UNCORRECTED SYSTEM B 3M to 3G Hz 3G to 6 G Hz 6 G to 8 5 G Hz e5070bse169 c Record the displayed values in the performance test record Test results dB column in Port 1 table for the uncorrected system performance test Source match test for port 1 d Set Parameter Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2 50 Figure 2 50 Source match test window Parameter Source Match Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 About 5070 256 Press OK button The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in Figure 2 51 or Figure 2 52 104 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 51 Source match for E5070B UNCORRECTED SYSTEM x 3Mto36 Hz e5070bse170 Figure 2 52 Source match for E5071B UNCORRECTED SYSTEM 3M to 3G Hz 3 G to 6 G Hz 6 G to 8 5 G Hz e5070bse171 m D a 3 5 f Record the displayed values in the performance test record Test results
133. Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass f If at least one of the Trace Noise tests failed refer to Table 4 11 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 6 Error Term tests These tests check the reflection tracking directivity and source match for all test ports Required equipment Description Recommended model terminations Calibration kit type N Open Short and 50Q Load 85032F Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in the right of Error Term in the window to open the Error Term window The window displays the port number and frequencies as the test points The result for each test port is displayed as the 4x3 matrix Figure 4 53 Chapter 4 E 9 n 2 O 251 Figure 4 53 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Error Term port 1 tests dialog box example E5071B NOTE Figure 4 54 NOTE Table 4 10 lt 1 5GHz lt 8 562 Port 1 Source Match Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Directivity Not Done Not Done Mot Done Not Done Refl Tracking Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Port 2 Source Match Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Directivity Done Not Done Not
134. Performance Test A4 Power Amp Module Perform the following required adjustments using Power Amp Module in Spot Adjustment of the program Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment To Execute the Internal Test on page 219 To Execute the External Test on page 240 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test RF Output Level Linearity Test Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System Dynamic Range Test Dynamic Accuracy Test Uncorrected System Performance Test 466 Chapter 7 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC 15 Receiver RF Board Perform the following required adjustments using Receiver RF Board in Spot Adjustment of the program Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment To Execute the Internal Test on page 219 To Execute the External Test on page 240 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test RF Output Level Linearity Test Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System Dynamic Range Test Dynamic Accuracy test Uncorrected System Performance Test 17 Receiver IF Board Perform the following required adjustments using Receiver IF Board in Spot Adjustment of the program IF Range Gain Phase Adjustment Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment To
135. Pm 55 Pm DAS50b gt True D A Running D A dB DA55 True D A dB DAS50 DA60 10 50 Tx DA60 Tx DA50b Pm DA60 Pm DA50b gt True D A Running D A dB DA60 True D A dB DA50 DA60a 0 60 Adjust source power for Pm db DA60a Tx dB DA60a Tx dB DA60 DA60b 0 60 REF60 REF60 DA65 3 60 Tx DA65 Tx DA60b Pm DA65 Pm DA60b gt True D A Running dB DA65 True D A dB DA60 DA70 10 60 Tx DA70 Tx DA60b Pm DA70 Pm DA60b gt True D A Running D A dB DA70 True D A dB DA60 DA70a 0 70 E Adjust source power for Pm db 9 DA70a Tx dB DA70a Tx dB 9 DA70 DA70b 0 70 REF70 REF70 DA75 5 70 Tx DA75 Tx DA70b Pm DA75 Pm DA70b gt True D A Running dB DA75 True D A dB DA70 DA80 10 70 Tx DA80 Tx DA70b Pm DA80 Pm DA70b gt True D A Running D A dB DA80 True D A dB DA70 128 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Name 1 2 Power Pm dB Tx dB Port Port Char Running
136. Port 2 Record the test results in the performance test record port 1 1 2 Figure 2 63 Port 1 Open Short Load and Same as Opt 213 214 N N cable Port 2 Open Short Load connected to Port 1 Figure 2 45 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 29 and 30 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match Transmission tracking Reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 2 Stimulus Port 1 Record the test results in the performance test record port 2 1 3 Figure 2 64 Port 1 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 1 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 1 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Port 3 Open Open to Port 3 Port 3 Short Short to Port 3 Port 3 Load Load to Port 3 Figure 2 66 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 3 Perform Step 29 and 30 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match Transmission tracking reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 3 Stimulus Port 1 Record the test results in the performance test record port 3 Chapter 2 111 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Table 2 27 Test setup Select Ports settings and calibration sequence Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection Ports Figure for calibration 413 414 1 2 Figure 2 43
137. Port 1 Open Short Load and Same as Opt 213 214 N N cable Port 2 Open Short Load connected to Port 2 Refer to Step 10 through 27 for the details Figure 2 46 Thru N N cable between Port and Port 2 Perform Step 29 and 30 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match Transmission tracking Reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 Record the test results in the performance test record port 1 1 2 Figure 2 64 Port 1 Open Short Load and Same as Opt 213 214 N N cable Port 2 Open Short Load connected to Port 1 Figure 2 46 Thru N N cable between Port and Port 2 Perform Step 29 and 30 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match Transmission tracking Reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 2 Stimulus Port 1 Record the test results in the performance test record port 2 3 4 Figure 2 67 Port 3 Open Open to Port 3 Port 3 Short Short to Port 3 Port 3 Load Load to Port 3 Port 4 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 4 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 4 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Figure 2 68 Thru N N cable between Port 3 and Port 4 Perform Step 29 and 30 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match Transmission tracking Reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 3 Stimulus Port 4 Record the test results in the performance test record port 3 112 Chapte
138. Saving using keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key Then a message of Quit Without Saving Y N is displayed Press and keys The BIOS setup utility is closed without saving the current settings 278 Chapter 4 Figure 4 71 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above When you replace the A20 digital motherboard you need to confirm the jumper settings for the specific CPU installed The jumper settings information is provided in Configure the Motherboard on page 279 You also need to confirm the BIOS options using the BIOS setup utility procedure The BIOS setup procedure is described in To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 280 To Identify the Motherboard Installed Confirm the splash screen is displayed in the beginning of the boot process as shown in Figure 4 14 Configure the Motherboard There is a jumper on the A20 digital motherboard that must be configured to the correct setting Confirm that the jumper setting is Normal as shown in Figure 4 71 A20 digital motherboard jumpers location and settings Testing DRAM on the Motherboard When the A20 digital motherboard is replaced with a new one it is advisable to perform Chapter 4 279
139. Step g For the E5071B skip to Step i E5070B g Press to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused h Press 6 9 J 1 set the number of sweep points to 60 Then proceed to step 5 The sweep frequency points for the second segment will be aligned in 50 MHz increments from 50 MHz to 3 GHz See Table 2 25 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5070B E5070B Segment Table setting Start Stop Points 1 3 MHz 10 MHz 2 3 50 MHz 3 GHz 60 E5071B i Press 8 _ 5 G n Jto enter 8 5 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused j Press 1 7 0 J x1 to set the number of sweep points to 170 The sweep frequency points for the second segment will be aligned in 50 MHz increments from 50 MHz to 8 5 GHz See Table 2 26 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B E5071B Segment Table setting Start Stop Points 1 3 MHz 10 MHz 2 3 50 MHz 8 5 GHz 170 Press Sweep Setup J lt 2 lt 2 lt gt 2 lt gt 2 lt gt select Sweep Type Enter to set the Sweep type to Segment Full 2 port calibration Press C gt CHD CD and to select Cal Kit Press lt gt CV and to select 85032F 100 Chapter 2 NOTE Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22
140. T10 T8 0 5 T20 1 5 mm 9 16 in 5 8 5 16 in Outer Cover Front Panel 4 4 Mass Storage NI Removable Hard Disk Drive Removable Hard Disk Assembly FDD Power Supply Handler I O CPU DIMM Digital Mother Board Source Board Receiver Board Level Vernier Fan amp Switch Control Board Fan Attenuator Switch Power Amp Analog Motherboard a a 4a a lt a a ae a Analog Interface Board GPIB Board USB USBTMC Interface Card Display Board Front Keyboard Inverter Y LCD LCD Backlight lt a lt a 2 2 2 p 2 A 2 2 Reference Oven a a a a a a N connector It s recommended to use E5070 65100 if you want to wrench nuts easily Chapter 6 381 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Replacement Procedure Outer Cover Removal Outer Cover Removal Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Procedure Refer to Figure 6 1 for this procedure Disconnect the power cable from the E5070B E5071B Put a plastic cover p n 5959 8096 item 1 on the front panel of the
141. Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction 543 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction 534 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 1 3G 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Crosstalk Test Direction 21 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 12 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 134 2 E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Performance Tests MY421 JP1KK Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 523 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 541 O
142. The clock of all DIMM slots and PCI slots are always ON 173 gt lt Enter Select PU PD Value F1 Save ESC Exit F1 General Help 5 Previous Values F6 Setting 1 Defaults Setting 2 Defaults Auto Detect DIMM PCI Clock Enabled Spread Spectrum 0 2 Cnt Change Supervisor Password A password needs to be entered to execute the BIOS setup utility If a password has not been assigned in the E5070B ES07 1B set the password using this BIOS setup utility as follows a Select Change Supervisor Password using keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key b Enter the password of e507xa Never set another password c Press key d Ifa message of New supervisor password installed Press any key to continue is displayed press key Save amp Exit Setup When you want to change and save a BIOS option Select Save Settings and Exit using keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key Then a message of SAVE to CMOS and EXIT Y N is displayed Press Y and Enter keys The BIOS setup utility is closed after the current settings are saved Chapter 4 277 A 2 2 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Exit Without Saving If you cancel the changes in the BIOS option settings select Exit Without
143. Top View Major Assemblies 1 312 View Cables 2 acrid aad EET hata Both wie aa nathan ata deed 314 Top View Miscellaneous 2 316 Top View Under Power Supply for E5070B S N from MY42401101 to MY42401986 E5071B S N from 4240245540 42404509 9 nee Gee hee RRA ER IE FREER SS RS 318 Top View Under Power Supply for E5070B S N MY42401987 and above E5071B S N MY424045 10 ANG ABOVE MM IDE 320 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts 322 Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix and MY421 E5071B serial prefix JPIKK and ce hart A eect Weel tare ak 324 Front View Analog 324 10 Contents Front View Miscellaneous 326 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 213 1 327 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 1 328 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 313 330 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 332 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 413 4 334 Front View Semiri
144. Uncorrected System Performance 152 E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 154 Frequency Accuracy Test es Eos WA AR Ges 154 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness 154 RF Output Level Linearity Test 8 1 155 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude 7 7 160 Crosstalk ecc eese rA REA ERG A E US QNIN RR URNA Ue ERA Ms 162 System Dynamic Range Test i bad eer Re eR a ty Me er RE Rer RE 163 Dynamic Accuracy Test eub Mee Re dette bed NEED RUMP ees 166 Uncorrected System Performance 169 E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and 173 Frequency Accuracy Test sse Swat encase ni eas o E eat es 173 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness 173 RF Output Level Linearity Test 8 1 174 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude 1 7 4 179 Crosstalk Test seeds tA tials RA Ded oa
145. Verify that the monitor screen view is the same as the display on the LCD If the monitor screen view is abnormal a failure seems in the A26 LCD interface card To Check the External Trigger Input Procedure Press Preset and Enter to initialize the 5070 5071 Press key Click Trigger Source and then External in the menu bar to set the trigger mode to External Connect a BNC Short or 50 termination to the Ext Trig connector on the rear panel and disconnect it Thereby a measurement trigger should be generated and a measurement result trace should be refreshed If no trigger occurs a failure in the A21 analog interface board is suspected 2 To Check the LAN D 8 Procedure a Connect a LAN cable between the LAN port on the rear panel and an external computer PC Use a crossed LAN cable to enable the peer to peer communication between the 5070 507 and the PC If the E5070B E5071B needs to be connected to the PC via multi port Hub use a straight LAN cable Press key Click Misc Setup Network Setup Network Configuration in the softkey menu to Chapter 4 233 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting show the Network and Dial up Connections window as shown in the left of Figure 4 29 Figure 4 29 Network and Dial up Connections window 1 Enabled a Make Mew eal Connection Connection Disabled e5070bse117
146. and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Release the clamped cables from the clamps item 1 on the cover NOTE Keep the mylar cable connected Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Disconnect the cable item 5 and 6 connected through the cover NOTE The item 6 is not connected in the E5070B E5071B without the option 016 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 1 Step 2 Disconnect the two cables item 7 and 8 from the inverter Remove the two TORX 5 screws item 9 fastening the inverter assembly Remove the two TORX T8 screws item 10 fastening the inverter to the holder Replacement Procedure Fasten the new 52 inverter board to the holder Replace the inverter assembly by inverse procedure of removal 452 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK MY4232454 and below Figure 6 40 52 Inverter Board Removal E5070B S N prefix JP1KK or S N 42300632 and below D 2 3 2 E5071B S N prefix JP1KK or S N 42301396 below 5
147. appendix describes an example of how to check the system of E5070B E5071B for computer viruses using computer viruses check software 507 Figure D 1 Step 1 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check The E5070B E5071B should be protected against computer viruses If you need to check the system of E5070B E5071B for computer viruses it s recommended that an external PC installed anti virus software is used to access E5070B E5071B s built in drive C and D via LAN and perform virus scan E5070B E5071B has no virus function nor anti virus software installed The Windows operating system installed in this instrument is customized for more effective operation Installing Windows based software including anti virus software for ordinary PCs into this instrument may affect the behavior of the instrument during measurement Required equipment e 5070 or E5071B with keyboard and mouse Anexternal PC installed anti virus software such as Norton AntiVirus e Acrossed LAN cable It enables the peer to peer communication between the E5070B E5071B and the PC How to check the drive C and D of E5070B E5071B The following is an example procedure to check the drive C and D of E5070B E5071B using the external PC Set up the E5070B E5071B for file sharing 1 Connect the E5070B E5071B to the PC using the crossed LAN cable 2 Press key 3 Press Misc Setup Network Setup Network Configur
148. are executed to output the directivity source match load match transmission tracking and reflection tracking data to the display The VBA test programs for the Uncorrected System Performance Test are not available in the current version of the E5070B E5071B test procedure The test procedure is made effective when the test programs become available Specification Table 2 24 Uncorrected System Performance Correction Off Sys tem Correction On Description E5070B E5071B E5071B only 3 MHz to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 8 5 GHz Directivity 25 dB 20 dB 15 dB Source Match 25 dB 20 dB 15 dB Load Match 17 dB 12 dB 10 dB Transmission Tracking 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 0 dB Reflection Tracking 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 0 dB Test Equipment Calibration Kit Agilent 85032F Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 Procedure Connect the N N cable as shown in the following figure Option 213 214 Figure 2 41 Option 313 314 Figure 2 42 Option 413 414 Figure 2 43 For the connection of the Open Short and Load terminations obey the instruction in the Chapter 2 97 m D m 3 5 Figure 2 41 e5070bse030 Figure 2 42 e5070bse031 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST following procedure O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 213 214
149. as required a Press System key b Click Service Menu and then Test Menu in the softkeys c Click Power On Test to restart the test Wait until the power on test ends d The test result OK or Failed is displayed in the Power On Test key PLL unlock When a PLL of the frequency synthesizers is unlocked not the Power on self test failed but Phase lock loop unlocked message is displayed If it occurs Al Source board may be faulty There is also a low possibility that 17 ADC part of 2 Receiver board is faulty External reference signal phase unlock Opt 1E5 PN e 47 gt O e 3 If the ExtRef in the instrument status bar is displayed in gray not turning blue in using the high stability time base Opt 1 5 A5 Crystal Oven board or the interconnection cable between rear panel Ref Oven and Ref In connectors may be faulty Also check whether the Ready in the instrument status bar is displayed in blue the warm up in the instrument is completed If it is in gray wait until the Ready turns blue To Execute the Internal Test To isolate faulty board assembly in analog section execute the internal test in accordance with the following procedure The test procedure needs to be performed using a mouse in addition to the front panel keys Chapter 4 219 NOTE NOTE Figure 4 18 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 S
150. at the Exit Menu and press key Then a message of Quit Without Saving Y N is displayed Press and keys The BIOS setup utility is closed without saving the current settings 286 Chapter 4 Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the 5070 5071 ENA Series RF Network Analyzers e 2 o D amp o U e m 7 287 Replaceable Parts Ordering Information Ordering Information To order part listed in the replaceable part lists quote the Agilent part number with a check digit indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Agilent office The check digit will ensure accurate and timely processing of the order To order a part not listed in the replaceable part table include the instrument model number the description and function of the part and the quantity of parts required Address the order to the nearest Agilent office Direct Mail Order System Within the USA Agilent can supply parts through a direct mail order system There are several advantages to this system e Direct ordering and shipping from the Agilent Parts Center in Mountain View California No maximum or minimum on any mail order there is a minimum order amount for parts ordered through a local Agilent office when the orders require billing and invoicing Prepaid transportation there is a small handling charge for each order N
151. attenuator on A7 TH HHH Most suspicious assembly Suspicious assembly Possible faulty assembly NOTE Internal tests from item number 1 to 50 are common to the power on self test NOTE When the internal test for a specific receiver port fails identify the faulty A2 receiver board as shown in Figure 4 22 Figure 4 22 Test port configuration A1 Source A3 Level Vernier E5070B 5071B 00 DO ODO iT OSES DU 00 pnr ee e6070ase006 Test port configuration Test port failed in the test Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 2 port Opt 213 214 Upper Upper 3 port Opt 313 314 Lower Upper Upper 4 port Opt 413 414 Lower Upper Upper The upper and lower A2 boards have the same part number e5070bse047 226 Board location inside cabinet 2 Receiver Upper OO A2 Receiver Lower Chapter 4 Table 4 2 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting If the E5070B E5071B exhibits a failure symptom that is related to a specific function or control such as a front panel key control display data storage remote control interface printer interface external trigger external keyboard or mouse isolate the trouble using the Function Specific Troubleshooting proc
152. connected Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Disconnect the cable item 5 connected through the cover NOTE The item 5 is not connected in the E5070B E5071B without the option 016 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 1 Step 2 Disconnect the two cables item 6 and 7 from the inverter Remove the two TORX 5 screws item 8 fastening the inverter assembly Remove the two TORX T8 screws item 9 fastening the inverter to the holder Replacement Procedure Fasten the new A52 inverter board to the holder Replace the inverter assembly by inverse procedure of removal 454 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Figure 6 41 52 Inverter Board Removal E5070B S N MY4241101 and above E5071B S N MY4242455 and above 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D 2 e5070bse5008 Chapter 6 455 Step 1 Step 2
153. data element not violating the standard has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one Double quotes 4 are omitted where it is necessary to place a parameter in double quotes for example Appendix F 523 100 60 222 104 32 200 123 Messages Command error Command error A comprehensive syntax error has occurred showing that this instrument cannot detect a more detailed error This code simply shows that a command error defined in 11 5 1 1 4 488 2 has occurred Continuous switching may damage source attenuator This error occurs when different source attenuator power range settings are present during measurement on two or more channels Performing such measurement for a long time is not recommended because of the possibility of the source attenuator being damaged The measurement value is normal This error occurs only on models with the extended power output Option 214 314 and 414 In firmware 3 60 and later Auto Power Range set function may cause this error according to a channel setting Refer to Setting power level with Auto Power Range set function as described in E5070B 5071B User s Guide D Data out of range A data element not violating the standard outside the range defined by this instrument has been received This error occurs when an integer based command for which the parameter can be rounded exceeds the range of 65536 to 65536 or when a
154. digits of the part number g Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 2 fastening the A4 power amp module assembly h Release the cables from the cable clamp item 3 i Disconnect the cables from the switches and the A4 power amp module Remove the TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the switches Replacement Procedure Fasten the new switches to the A4 power amp module assembly as shown in Figure 6 30 Replace the assembly by inverse procedure of removal Confirm that the cables are connected as shown in Figure 6 30 on page 435 Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement 434 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A8 RF Switch Replacement Figure 6 30 A8 RF Switch receiver board side Replacement Yellow 20 e D a 0 e D Q Opt 21x Label on bottom Opt 31x Label on top Opt 41x Label on top Opt 31x 41x 507005 095 6 435 M Step 1 Step 2 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Replacement Procedure A4 Power Amp Module Replacement A4 Power Amp Module Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in lb for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 31 for this procedure Remove the A4 power amp module assembly as described in Step 1 in A8 RF Switch receiver
155. doesn t boot up properly after reinstallation replace the A27 The operating system automatically checks the device drivers which are necessary to use the E5070B E5071B functions and are installed in the system before the E5070B E5071B is shipped from Agilent factory If the operating system doesn t detect them a message box is displayed In this case install the device driver Revision and option information The firmware revision and hardware option information along with copyright declaration is displayed as shown in Figure 4 16 The E5070B E5071B firmware quickly starts up just before this display appears While the revision and option information is displayed the applications of various devices in the system are initialized 216 Chapter 4 Figure 4 16 NOTE Step 4 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Firmware revision and option information E5071B Network Analyzer Rev A 03 00 Bulld Jul 24 2002 09 46 49 Option 414 010 016 U Copyright 2001 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc Portions C Copyright 1996 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Initializing If the display whited out entirely blued or appeared with a dialog box a mass storage problem is suspected Try to perform the mass storage recovery procedure If a message of Will Shut Down in Five Seconds is displayed in place of Initializing and the sh
156. information Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly No test Al 4 6 2 23 Src Lev Pow Sw T Hnd Vern Amp cont 15 17 7 S31 50MHZ Source power T T THE THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 8 S31 3GHz Source power TH for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 9 S31 6GHz Source power THE THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 3 E5071B Opt 313 314 413 41 4 10 541 50 2 Source power TH THE TH for Port 1 and receiver gain for port 4 Opt 413 414 11 S41 3GHz Source power THE THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for port 4 Opt 413 414 12 S41 6GHz Source power THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 4 E5071B Opt 413 414 256 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Table 4 11 External test failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly No test Al A3 4 6 A2 Receiver 23 Src Lev Pow Sw T Hnd Vern Amp cont 15 17 13 Tch IF 512 Mag IF signal level TH Ranging A2 512 1 Phase ranging S21 R1 Mag operat
157. item 5 fastening the board to the rear panel Lift the A21 analog interface board Replacement Procedure Replace the A21 analog interface board by inverse procedure of removal 440 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement Figure 6 33 A21 Analog Interface Board Removal 2 D D 3 2 Ld U E o 507005 087 Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts page 287 for the latest cabling too Chapter 6 441 Replacement Procedure A24 GPIB Card Replacement A24 GPIB Card Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 34 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Step 2 Remove the TORX T10 screw item 1 fastening the card to the rear panel Step 3 Lift the A24 GPIB card CAUTION Be careful not to injure the cable connecting the display board to the front assembly Replacement Procedure Step 1 Replace the A24 GPIB card by inverse procedure of removal 442 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A24 GPIB Card Replacement Figure 6 34 A24 GPIB Car
158. lt e5061buj034 lt NOTE After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor Appendix B 487 System Recovery System Recovery Step 6 The following screen appears Check that Floppy is selected highlighted if Floppy is not selected select it with of the keyboard and press of the keyboard Boot Menu Select a irst device 15120 HDD 0 SCRI CDROM HDD 1 HDD 2 HDD 3 ZIP100 USB FDD USB ZIP USB CDROM USB HDD LAN 11 Move ENTER Accept F4 Exit e5070buj035 Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the user recovery press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options for the E5070 71B Choose One of the following Recover Factory Backup Image Create User Backup Image Recover User Backup Image WN np Exit Enter a Choice _ NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 488 Appendix B System Recovery System Recovery Step 8 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the
159. meter s measurement value does not become stable within about 10 seconds during measurement for power calibration data or that for scalar mixer calibration data This error also occurs when the power calibration value exceeds the set tolerance In addition it occurs when the power meter fails to respond for any reason such as power down for example during measurement under the same conditions Ensure a firm connection of the power sensor Power on test failed This error occurs when the power on test fails indicating a failure of this instrument Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument Power unleveled The out power level exceeds available range For example if the level after correction exceeds the power level that can be outputted when correcting the power level with the power calibration and power slope feature this error occurs Check that the power level is set correctly the power calibration has been performed correctly and the correction value of the power slope is set correctly 530 Appendix F 120 121 284 112 286 430 400 410 420 440 350 Messages Printer error Printer error This error occurs when the previous printing is still in progress or the printer fails offline short of paper etc at time of outputting the display image on the LCD screen to the printer HCOP IMM command Print failed This error occurs whe
160. or configure devices lt Enter gt expands or collapses devices with ator lt CtrleEmer expands all Shiltt 1 enables or disables a device lt gt and lt gt moves the device up or down 285 Bunoouse qnoJ y Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Change Supervisor Password A password needs to be entered to execute the BIOS setup utility If a password has not been assigned in the 5070 507 set the password using this BIOS setup utility as follows a Select Security using keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key b Select Set Supervisor password using keys and press key c Enter the password of e507xa Never set another password d Press key e Ifa message of New supervisor password installed Press any key to continue is displayed press key Save amp Exit Setup When you want to change and save a BIOS option Select Exit using keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key Select Save CMOS to Flash using and press Enter J key Then select Exit Saving Changes using and press key A message of SAVE to CMOS and EXIT Y N is displayed Press and keys The BIOS setup utility is closed after the current settings are saved Exit Without Saving If you cancel the changes in the BIOS option settings select Exit Discarding Change using keys
161. port 1 e Port 1 23 Trace Noise 522 Trace noise for HHH TH port 2 e Port 2 24 Trace Noise S33 Mag J Phas Trace noise for HHH THE THE port 3 e Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 25 Trace Noise S44 Mag Phas Trace noise for HHH TH TH port 4 e Port 4 Opt 413 414 26 Error Term Source match Ht port 1 directivity and reflection tracking for Port 1 27 Error Term Source match HHH port 2 directivity and reflection tracking for Port 2 28 Error Term Source match HHH port 3 directivity and reflection tracking for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 29 Error Term Source match HHH port 4 directivity and reflection tracking for Port 4 Opt 413 414 30 Handler I O Handler HHH Board interface I O signals Most suspicious assembly Suspicious assembly 258 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Possible faulty assembly NOTE When the external test for a specific receiver port fails identify the faulty A2 receiver board as shown in Figure 4 58 Figure 4 58 Test port configuration E5070B 5071B ao ee OO C903 000 ggo ona Board location inside cabinet Da DU OO Do 1 Source A2 Receiver Upper Level t y
162. prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 29 on page 342 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 413 Figure 5 24 on page 334 414 Figure 5 25 on page 336 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 30 on page 344 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above Remove the two TORX T10 screws fastening the extractor item 2 Slide the A3 level vernier using the extractor 418 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A3 Level Vernier Replacement Replacement Procedure Step 1 Replace the A3 level vernier by inverse procedure of removal 2 D D 3 2 U E Fasten the semi rigid cable using torque wrench for replacement Figure 6 21 A3 Level Vernier Removal e5070bse105 Chapter 6 419 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 NOTE Replacement Procedure B1 Fan amp A6 Switch Control Board Replacement B1 Fan amp A6 Switch Control Board Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 22 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the power supply as described in A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement on page 400 Disconnect th
163. program VBA UserForm window display example SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST x 3M to 1 5 G Hz 1 5 G to 3 G Hz 3G to 4 G Hz 46 to 6 G Hz 6 G to 7 5 G Hz 7 5 G to 8 5 G Hz e5070bse7001 Record the maximum RMS deviation values in the performance test record Test result dB column for the system dynamic range test Press Exit button on the SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST window Press Avg J Enter J 3 k m to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 3 KHz and perform Step 52 through 54 Press Ava 1 0 x1 to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 10 Hz change the S parameter setting as shown in the fourth row in Table 2 20and perform Step 52 through 55 System Dynamic Range test program Coding procedure Press Macro Setup key Press to activate VBA Editor function Chapter 2 77 Program 2 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Click Insert and select Module from pull down menu VBA Project Module Code window screen for coding a program will be displayed Create the test program The sample program is show below if serial prefix MY422 and above Save the test program with a proper file name Test program Sub Main Dim Val 15 As Variant X As Double Y As Double Rms As Variant Dim I As Integer J As Integer K As Integer Dmy As Long Dim Ver As String Buff As String Dim MaxValA As Variant
164. rear panel fan and de monitor LEDs on A20 and 21 Fan ok and LEDs light Replace A50 power supply Yes Check system fans inside Replace A21 analog Interface System fans ok board or A6 RF switch temp controller board Yes Press Num Lock key on keyboard LED on keyboard BIOS and jumper Correct BIOS or jumper light settings ok setting Yes Yes Connect external monitor Replace A20 digital motherboard Displayed Replace A20 digital motherboard on monitor or A26 LCD interface card Yes Check flat cable between A26 LCD IF card and A31 LCD connector Flat cable OK Replace flat cable Yes 6 Check LCD backlight LCD backlight ok Replace 52 inverter es Replace A51 LCD 5070 156 204 4 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 NOTE Step 3 Figure 4 4 Troubleshooting No Display troubleshooting Check fan operation and DC monitor LED If the rear panel fan blower doesn t run a failure in 50 ATX power supply is assumed Remove the E5070B E5071B outer cover and check if the following LEDs light e 3 3 V and 5 dc monitor LEDs on A21 analog interface board e 5 V dc monitor LED on A20 digital motherboard To check all the outputs of the A50 measure the dc voltages at the output lead connectors with a DMM The dc output voltages and lead color information is provided in the module cover label of the A50 Check system fans inside If the system fans on the chassis inside the E5070B E5071B don t
165. reset Extended System Configuration Data ESCD when you exit Setup if you have installed a new add on and the system reconfiguration has caused such a serious conflict that the 0S cannot boot A E 9 2 2 O Enter Select PU PD Value F18 Save ESC Exit F1 General Help F5 Previous Values F6 Setting 1 Defaults Setting 2 Defaults Table 4 19 Reset Configuration Data Disabled Resources Controlled By Auto ESCD Chapter 4 275 Figure 4 69 Table 4 20 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below PC Health Status PC Health Status options are displayed by choosing PC Health Status using keys and by pressing Enter key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 69 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 20 If there is any difference change the option setting by pressing z keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press EJ key PC Health Status window CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2881 Award Software PC Health Status Item Help Menu Level 2 F 4218 RPM Select the limit of 8 RPM CPU temperature RPM CPU temperature 76 e
166. selected record the IP address and sbnet mask 4 Ifthe Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected select the Speccify an IP address Enter the IP address xxx xxx xxx y and subnet mask as shown in Figure D 10 The letters x represent the IP address and subnet mask of the E5070B E5071B The letter y is different from the IP address of the E5070B E5071B Press the OK button Figure D 10 Network Dialog Box IP Address Tab TCP IP Properties gt x Bindings Advanced 05 DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Obtain an IP address automatically IP Address 192 168 0 2 e5070bse064 Step 5 Connect the drive of E5070B E5071B to the PC and check the drive using anti virus software 1 Click Programs Window Explorer on the Start Menu to start up the PC s Explorer Appendix D 513 9 o E 5 lt 2 9 Figure D 11 Step 6 NOTE Step 7 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Click Tools Map Network Drive on the menu of the Explorer 2 Select a suitable drive name enter the network path as shown in Figure D 11 and then press the OK button For example the network path is
167. the Speccify an IP address Enter the IP address xxx xxx xxx y and subnet mask as shown in Figure 4 32 The letters x represent the IP address and subnet mask of the E5070B E5071B The letter y is different from the IP address of the E5070B E5071B Press the OK button Chapter 4 235 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Figure 4 32 Network Dialog Box IP Address Tab TCP IP Properties gt x Bindings Advanced 05 DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Obtain an IP address automatically o IP Address 192 168 0 2 SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 5070 064 Step 6 By clicking button the network settings take effect Verify the 5070 5071 LAN settings and response to a command from the external computer as follows a On the external computer click Start button in the Windows Start menu bar using a mouse b Click Programs and MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt to open the DOS Command Prompt window a ping command followed by the E5070B E5071B IP address as ping XXX XXX XXX XXX where xxx xxx xxx xxx is the IP address such as 192 168 0 1 assigned in step 3 d Press key on the
168. the power meter the range calibrator and the digital voltmeter Figure 1 2 Setup for the Power Meter Accuracy Test RANGE POWER METER CALIBRATOR DIGITAL VOLTMETER BEEN n PIS 4 5 a 9 a Power Channel Meter Power Sensor Cable 25061 ase037 Step 2 Press the power meter Press Preset Local then Confirm Step 3 Perform the following steps for each channel on the power meter a Set to read in dBm Press dBm W then dBm b Set the ref cal factor to 100 Press Zero Cal Cal A B Ref CF then set to 100 0 if necessary c Set the cal factor to 100 Press Frequency Cal Fac A B Cal Fac then set to 100 0 if necessary d Set readout to 0 001 dBm Press Meas Setup then Resolution 1234 to highlight 4 e Set filter step detect on and filter length to 512 Press System Inputs channel Aor B Input Setting More Ch A B Filter Step Det On Filter On Mode MAN Length then set the filter length to 512 Step 4 Setup the digital voltmeter DVM as follows a Reset the DVM Press the blue key followed by Reset b Set the sample period to a value greater than one second Press NPLC 5 0 then Enter Step 5 Set the range calibrator controls as follows Chapier 1 7 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 NOTE Step 10 NOTE Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 General Information Power Meter Accuracy Test e POLARITY NORMAL e RANGE 1 m
169. the two TORX T10 screws fastening the switch item 2 Replacement Procedure Replace the switch by inverse procedure of removal Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement 432 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A8 RF Switch Replacement Figure 6 29 A8 RF Switch source board side Replacement 2 D Q D 3 2 U E o gt SS d llo Jtr 4 e5070bse094 Chapter 6 433 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Replacement Procedure A8 RF Switch Replacement A8 RF Switch receiver board side Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 30 for this procedure Remove the A4 power amp module assembly a Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 b Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 c Remove the floppy disk drive as described in A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Replacement on page 398 d Remove the three TORX T10 screws item 1 in Figure 6 29 fastening the fan plate e Release the cables from the cable clamp item 1 f Disconnect the all semi rigid cables from the switches on the left side and the A4 power amp module refer to the figure as shown in Table 6 5 on page 432 The label on the semi rigid cable shows the last two
170. will correct the problem 1 29 ES 0 D 2 D m 5 x 5 General Information Power Meter Accuracy Test TEST RECORD FOR POWER METER ACCURACY TEST Power Meter Tested Model Number Test Date Serial Number Tested by Test Equipment Used Range Calibrator Model No Serial No Digital Voltmeter Model No Serial No Test Results Range Channel A Channel B Calibrator 7 Setting DVM Reading Power Meter DVM Reading Power Meter Vdc Reading dBm Vdc Reading dBm 1 mW A 0 00 0 001 A 0 00 0 001 300 uW C 100 uW D E D E Pass Fail Calculation 300 uW R B A R B A S 10 10 lt 10 10 ERROR R S R x 100 ERROR R S R x100 Limits 0 13 Limits 0 13 Pass Fail Pass Fail 100 uW T D A T D A U 10E 19 0 10 10 ERROR T U T x100 ERROR T U T x 100 Limits 0 10 Limits 0 10 Pass Fail Pass Fail 30 Chapter 1 D m 3 5 Performance Tests This chapter provides information on how to verify the E5070B E5071B performance 31 NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE Table 2 1 Performance Tests Introduction Introduction This literature provides the performance test procedures for the Agilent E5070B E5071B
171. with Short termination connected to the tip of the N N cable Perform Port 2 Load calibration with Load termination connected to the tip of the N N cable Perform Return Connect the N N cable between the selected test ports Port 1 and Port 2 as shown in the following figures Option 213 214 Figure 2 44 Option 313 314 Figure 2 45 Option 413 414 Figure 2 46 Chapter 2 101 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 44 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 213 214 E5070B 5071B gt os oo 000 aaa Qd aaa Q Q mm N m N m Cable e5070bse006 Figure 2 45 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B aa o0 aa aa 09000 0000 aa 04 aano oo lt 9 O 1 J N m N m Cable e5070bse007 102 Chapter 2 Figure 2 46 e5070bse008 Step 23 Step 24 Step 25 Step 26 Step 27 Step 28 NOTE Step 29 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B aa aa aea OO 0000 a
172. 0 11 3G 15k k 0 64 With Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Test limit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 50 11 3G 3 00 k k 0 64 Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Level Accuracy Test Port 1 Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement dBm Hz dB dB uncertainty dB 0 50M 0 65 0 16 Level Flatness Test Port 1 at 0dBm relative to 50 MHz reference Frequency Hz Testlimit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10M 1 0 0 37 550 M 1 0 0 17 Chapter 2 173 m D m o 3 5 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Frequency Hz Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 1 05 G 1 0 0 17 1 55 G 51 0 0 19 2 05 G 51 0 0 20 3 00 G 1 0 0 20 4 25G 1 0 0 36 5 05 G 1 0 0 36 6 05 G 1 0 0 36 7 05 G 1 0 0 36 8 05 G 1 0 0 36 8 50 G 1 0 0 36 RF Output Level Linearity Test Port1 CW Frequency 10 MHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 T 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19
173. 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 Chapter 2 137 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 531 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 138 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55
174. 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 132 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude Direction 521 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction S12 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction 23 Option 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Chapter 2 133 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Direction 532 Option 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms
175. 0 United Kingdom Plug BS 1363 A 250V 10A Cable 8120 1351 8120 8705 OPTION 902 Continental Europe Plug CEE 7 Standard Sheet VII 250V 10 Cable 8120 1689 OPTION 904 U S Canada Plug NEMA 6 15P 250V 6A Cable 8120 0698 OPTION 912 Plug SR 107 2 D 250V 10A Cable 8120 2956 OPTION 918 Plug JIS C 8303 125V 12A Cable 8120 4753 OPTION 921 Plug CEI 23 16 250V 10A Cable 8120 6978 Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand Plug AS 3112 250V 10A Cable 8120 1369 OPTION 903 U S Canada Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 10A Cable 8120 1378 OPTION 906 Switzerland Plug SEV Type 12 250V 10A Cable 8120 2104 OPTION 917 _India Republic of S Africa Plug IEC 83 B1 250V 10A Cable 8120 4211 Argentina OPTION 920 Plug Argentine Resolution 63 Annex IV 250V 10A Cable 8120 6870 OPTION 922 Plug GB 1002 250V 10A Cable 8120 8376 NOTE Each option number includes a family of cords and connectors of various materials and plug body configurations straight 90 etc power_e Appendix E 519 19Mog 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 NOTE Power Requirement Turning the Power ON and OFF Turning the Power ON and OFF Perform the following steps to turn the power ON or OFF Turning the power ON If the standby switch C in the lower left part of the front panel is in the pressed d
176. 01 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 37 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the TORX T10 screw fastening the card item 1 to the rear panel Remove the flat cable item 2 from the A21 analog interface board Lift the USB USBTMC interface card Be careful not to injure the cable connecting the display board to the front assembly Replacement Procedure Replace the USB USBTMC interface card by inverse procedure of removal 446 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure USB USBTMC Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Figure 6 37 USB USBTMC Interface Card Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above 20 D U D e5070bse4011 NOTE Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts on page 287 for the latest cabling too Chapter 6 447 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 1 Step 2 Replacement Procedure A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E507
177. 04510 and above Figure 5 53 LCD and Inverter Assembly e5070bse8002 Table 5 53 LCD and Inverter Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 1402 5 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T15 2 E5070 61627 2 1 WIRE ASSY 3 5188 4418 2 SELF TAPPING SCREW e 2 o D amp o U e m 7 Chapter 5 369 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Standby Switch Assembly for E5070B S N MY42401986 and below for E5071B S N MY42404509 and below Figure 5 54 Standby Switch Assembly e5070bse5010 Table 5 54 Standby Switch Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61901 5 1 WIRE ASSY W STANDBY SWITCH 0371 3953 1 KEY CAP 2 0515 2028 9 2 SCREW MACH M2 5 x 6 FL T8 3 E5062 61612 1 FLAT FLEXIBLE CABLE LCD for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above 4 1400 1334 2 CLAMP CABLE 370 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Standby Switch Assembly for E5070B S N MY42401987 and above for E5071B S N MY42404510 and above Figure 5 55 Standby Switch Assembly e5070bse8003 Table 5 55 Standby Switch Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5070 61901 5 1 WIRE ASSY W STANDBY SWITCH 0371 3953 1 KEY CAP 2 0515 2028 9 2 SCREW MACH M2 5 x 6 FL T8 3 E5062 61612 1 FLAT FLEXIBLE CABLE LCD for E5070B S N MY42401101 and ab
178. 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 Chapter 2 151 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Uncorrected System Performance Test Correction Off System Correction On Port 1 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Port 2 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 152 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Port 3 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance D
179. 07 e 2 oO 72 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Top View Motherboard and Other Parts Figure 5 10 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts 0000000000 jkr Oe Ol Ab Odio lahk JO e5070bse3003 308 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Table 5 10 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0430 6 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 2 1400 0611 1 CLAMP CABLE 3 0515 2216 4 SCREW MACH 4 0 x 40 PN T20 4 0361 1875 RIVET PLASTIC 5 1400 1391 1 CLAMP CABLE 6 E5070 01267 1 BRACKET PS N Dn C N oo 7 0515 1402 2 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN 8 1420 0356 1 BATTERY LITHIUM CR2032 3V 22A HR e 2 oO 72 5 309 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N 42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 above Top View Removable Hard Disk Assemblies Figure 5
180. 0B S N prefix JP1KK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK MY4232454 and below A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix MY4232454 and below Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Hex key 1 5 mm Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 38 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal E5070B JPIKKxxxxx 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Release the clamped cables from the clamps item 1 on the cover Keep the mylar cable connected Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Disconnect the cable item 5 and 6 connected through the cover The item 6 is not connected in the E5070B E5071B without the option 016 Disconnect the two cables item 7 and 8 from the front keyboard Remove the knob from the front panel with a 1 5 mm hex key Remove the two 5 screws item 9 fastening the inverter assembly Remove the eight TORX T10 screws item 10 fastening the A22 front panel keyboard Separate the keyboard into the board and the rubber key Replacemen
181. 1 0 Reflection Tracking 6G 85G 1 0 Port 4 Options 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Directivity 3G 6G lt 20 Directivity 6G 8 5G lt 15 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3G 6G lt 20 Chapter 2 171 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Source match 6G 85G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 85G lt 10 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 3G 6G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 6G 85G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 3G 6G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 6G 85G 1 0 172 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above 5071 Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Agilent Technologies E5071B RF Network Analyzer Serial Number Option Temperature C Test Date Humidity R H Tested by Frequency Accuracy Test Without Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Test limit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 25
182. 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN T15 10 1400 1051 4 1 SADDLE WIRE 11 0403 1143 0 1 GUIDE PC BD 12 1400 0866 7 1 CLAMP CABLE 13 1400 3207 6 2 CABLE TIE Chapter 5 305 e 2 oO 72 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Top View Under Power Supply Figure 5 9 Top View Under Power Supply o 0 Wl OF Ol e5070bse3004 306 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Table 5 9 Top View Under Power Supply Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61661 4 1 WIRE ASSY 1400 0493 2 CLAMP CABLE 2 E5070 61663 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 3 E5070 6 1662 5 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 4 E5070 61664 7 1 FLAT CBL ASSY Opt 016 5 5070 61667 1 USB CABLE ASSY 6 E5070 61617 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY Opt 214 E5070 61618 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY Opt 314 414 7 E5070 61614 7 1 WIRE ASSY YELLOW 8 E5070 61613 6 1 WIRE ASSY ORANGE Opt 31x 41x 9 E5070 61612 5 1 WIRE ASSY RED Opt 31x 41x 10 E5070 61615 8 1 WIRE ASSY BROWN Opt 21x E5070 61611 4 1 WIRE ASSY BROWN Opt 31x 41x Chapter 5 3
183. 10 Tx DA10 Pm DA 10 Pm DA10 gt True D A Running D A dB DA 10 True D A dB DA10 Chapter 2 129 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JPIKK Agilent Technologies E5070B RF Network Analyzer Serial Number Option Temperature C Test Date Humidity R H Tested by Frequency Accuracy Test Without Option 1E5 Frequency Hz Test limit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 250 11 3G 15k k 0 64 With Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Test limit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 50 11 3G 3 00 k k 0 64 Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Level Accuracy Test Port 1 Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement dBm Hz dB dB uncertainty dB 0 50M 0 65 0 16 Level Flatness Test Port 1 at 0dBm relative to 50 MHz reference Frequency Hz Testlimit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10M 1 0 0 37 130 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Frequency Hz Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB
184. 10 lt 120 5 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 2 36 46 10 lt 121 E 4G 6G 10 117 6G 7 5G 10 lt 112 75G 85G 10 105 3M 15G 3k lt 95 1 5G 3G 3k lt 97 36 46 3k lt 96 4G 6G 3k lt 92 6G 7 5G 3k lt 87 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 80 Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 36 46 10 lt 121 46 66 10 lt 117 66 7 56 10 lt 112 7 5 8 5 10 lt 105 3M 15G 3k lt 95 1 5G 3G 3k 97 3G 4G 3k 96 Chapter 2 183 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 4G 6G 3k lt 92 6G 7 5G 3k lt 87 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 80 Direction S23 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit AB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 36 46 10 lt 121 46 66 10 lt 17 6G 7 5G 10 lt 112 7 5 G 85G 10 lt 105 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 3G 4G 3k lt 96 4G 6G 3k lt 92 66 7 56 3k lt 87 75G 85G 3k lt 80 Direction S41 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit AB Test result dB
185. 11 Top View Removable Hard Disk Assemblies aa o 5070 4002 310 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Table 5 11 Top View Removable Hard Disk Assemblies Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 See Table 5 56 1 REMOVABLE HARD DISK ASSEMBLY e 2 oO n Chapter 5 311 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Top View Major Assemblies Figure 5 12 Top View Major Assemblies
186. 12 Recommended adjustment for performance test failure Test First failed test Recommended adjustment Num X tal oven Source 1 Receiver Receiver IF A5 RF A15 A17 1 Frequency accuracy test Standard 1A Frequency accuracy test Opt 1E5 only 2 RF output level accuracy and flatness test 3 RF output level linearity test 4 CW trace noise test 5 Crosstalk test 6 System dynamic range test 7 Dynamic accuracy test 8 Uncorrected system performance test Performance test failure troubleshooting Table 4 13 represents the relationships between the failed test and probable faulty assembly If the performance test failure cannot be removed by a proper adjustment replace the assembly shown in this table Note that this table lists some typical cases There are possibilities that other assembly may be faulty To troubleshoot further perform the internal test and external test procedures 260 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Performance test failure troubleshooting NOTE When Crosstalk System dynamic range or Uncorrected system performance test fails check first whether the connections of the RF semi rigid cables between the suspicious assembly and others are tight or loose Also check for possible disconnection impairment of the cables and connectors Table 4 13 Performance test failure troubleshooting information Test First failed test Probable faulty board assembly Num Al A3 A4
187. 14 413 414 THE THE THE THE T T THE T THE T S33 6GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 3 E5071B Opt 313 314 413 44 THE TH T THE T 544 50 2 Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 4 Opt 413 414 THE TH T THE T S44 3GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 4 Opt 413 414 THE THE T TH T S44 6GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 4 E5071B Opt 413 414 THE THE T THE T Chapter 4 225 PN o o gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Table 4 1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test Test First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly No group Al A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver 7 Src Lvl Amp Sw T Att Vern Mod ctrl A15 17 63 ATT R 5dB R OdB Source attenuator A7 THHE A7 Opt 64 214 314 4 R 10dB R OdB Source attenuator A7 TH HHH es 140 R 154B R 0dB Source attenuator on A7 HH 66 R 20dB R OdB Source attenuator on A7 TH HHH 67 R 25dB R 0dB Source attenuator on A7 TH HHH 68 R 30dB R 0dB Source attenuator on A7 TH HHH 69 R 35dB R 0dB Source
188. 15 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 7 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO Opt 214 314 414 8 E5070 01222 5 1 PLATE 9 0515 0372 2 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 326 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 213 Figure 5 20 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 213 as EIL SS ILLE ate 22 LISTO i mimm 4 e5070bse065 Table 5 20 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 213 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61672 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61606 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD E5070 61603 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD E5070 61605 4 5 E5070 61645 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 8 0955 0208 1 U WAVE ATTN 4DB 9 E5070 61671 4 4 6 E5070 6 1604 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 10 E5070 61687 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 1810 0118 1 2 TERMINATION COAX e 2 n Chapter 5 327 Figure 5 21 e5070bse066 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and 421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214
189. 156 3k lt 95 1 5G 3G 3k lt 97 Direction S12 Options 21 3 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB Chapter 2 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 1 5G 3G 3k lt 97 147 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Direction 32 Options 313 314 413 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Direction S23 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit AB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Direction 14 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Dynamic Accuracy Test Reference power level 10 dBm 148 Cha
190. 202 Primary Trouble Isolation se es tee Dog 202 No Display troubleshooting 1 22 204 Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx 42301396 and 207 Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above 214 Troubleshooting Using Internal 219 Power On Testa renee e tation EUR age ach aed ebd eq ue egi weld 219 PEL nlock 2 Meare qub c AL AWE te one beh tins ue EE EOS 18 219 External reference signal phase unlock Opt 1 5 219 Execute the Internal DRE RERO Se CURT QURE 219 Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting 0 0 0 0 cece cee RI 222 Function Specific 2 227 To Check the Device 1 4 1 228 To Check the Pront Panel ERIE ERR ON INR HERR ADE RAIS 230 To Check the Touch Panel Option 016 231 To Check the LCD inei hen 231 To Check the External Keyboard
191. 23 13 24 Step 7 Power on self test The power on self test is executed once automatically before the measurement starts While the power on self test is in progress Power on test is displayed at the left in the instrument status bar If the power on test fails an error message is displayed there For more details refer to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 219 4 a 2 2 e e Chapter 4 213 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Figure 4 13 represents the booting process flow in the E5070B E507 1B If the 5070 5071 stops in the booting process troubleshoot using the following step by step procedure Figure 4 13 Booting process flowchart Splash Screen BIOS Setup Menu Did it Shutdown Properly Last Time Scan Disk Check 5070 5071 Power Self Test 507005 180 Step 1 Splash Screen 214 Chapter 4 NOTE Figure 4 14 Step 2 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above The splash screen is displayed with Agilent logo as shown in Figure 4 14 If the splash screen is displayed you can assume that the A20 digital motherboard is functioning correctly While the splash scr
192. 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 174 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 3 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 Chapter 2 175 U 3 9 E D 2 n Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 0 75 0 17
193. 3 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 97 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz IFBW 3 kHz Chapter 2 63 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 122 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz IFBW 10 Hz E5071B 95 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 97 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 96 dB 23 5 C 3 GHz to 4 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 92 dB 23 5 C 4 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 87 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 80 dB 23 5 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 122 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 121 dB 23 5 C 3 GHz to 4 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 117 dB 23 5 C 4 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 112 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 105 dB 23 5 C 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz NOTE The specification applies when the response and isolation calibration is performed and averaging factor is 16 Test equipment Coaxial cable with Type N m connectors 61 cm 24 in Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 Type N m 50 Load termination 2 ea part of Agilent 85032F 54D 33E 50D with Type N adapter Procedure Step 1 Connect a load termination to each test port as shown in the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 19 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 20 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 21 64 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Figure 2 19 Isol
194. 3 314 Figure 2 33 Option 413 414 Figure 2 34 Agilent Z5623A block diagram 0 11 dB Attenuator Microwave 1dB Step Isolator 0 110dB Power Sensor Power Meter Network Analyzer Receiver Attenuator 10dB Ste Chapter 2 83 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 32 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 213 214 E5070B 5071B GPIB Controller J 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable GPIB Interface Cable 25623 01 Power Meter m Power Sensor e5070bse021 Figure 2 33 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B GPIB Controller 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable GPIB Interface Cable 4 2 25623A H01 Power Meter _ Power Sensor e5070bse022 84 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 34 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B GPIB Controller lL aa
195. 301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Remove the three TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the fan plate Disconnect the semi rigid cables item 2 and 3 from the A7 source step attenuator The label on the semi rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number Disconnect the flat cable item 4 from the attenuator Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 5 fastening the A7 source step attenuator holder from the front side Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 6 fastening the A7 source step attenuator to the holder Replacement Procedure Fasten the new source step attenuator to the holder as shown in Figure 6 26 Replace the A7 source step attenuator holder by inverse procedure of removal Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement 426 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK or MY421 E5071B S N prefix JP1KK MY421 Option 214 314 and 414 Figure 6 26 A7 Source Step Attenuator Removal D D 5 Q D U O D Us e5070bse3019 Chapter 6 427 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Replacement Procedure A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix MY422 and above E5071B S N prefix MY422 and above Option 214 314 and 414 A7 Source S
196. 4 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 4 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 of test channel receiver for Port 4 5 dBm Opt 413 414 d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Tch IF Ranging tests are in progress 244 Chapter 4 Figure 4 43 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test e When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 43 Tch IF Ranging test results display example E5070B E5071B Opt 413 414 IF Ranging x Rch Tch Port 1 Mag Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Port2 Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Port3 Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Port4 Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse124 f Ifatleast one of the Tch IF Ranging tests failed refer to Table 4 11 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g Toreturn to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 3 Receiver Linearity tests These tests check the linearity gain compression of test channel receiver for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Coaxial cable with type N m connectors 61 cm 24 in N6314A Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in the right of Receiver Linearity in the window to open the Receiver Linearity
197. 42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Remove the three TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the fan plate Disconnect the all semi rigid cables from the switch on the left side refer to the figure as shown in Table 6 5 The label on the semi rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number Chapter 6 431 Table 6 5 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 1 NOTE Replacement Procedure A8 RF Switch Replacement Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 20 on page 327 214 Figure 5 21 on page 328 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 28 on page 341 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 313 Figure 5 22 on page 330 314 Figure 5 23 on page 332 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 29 on page 342 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 413 Figure 5 24 on page 334 414 Figure 5 25 on page 336 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix or MY421 Figure 5 30 on page 344 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above Disconnect the semi rigid cables item 1 and 2 in Figure 6 27 from the A7 source step attenuator if the option 214 314 or 414 is installed Disconnect the switch cable from the switch Remove
198. 454 Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Cutting plier or scissors Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 16 for this procedure Remove the mouse the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are connected to the rear panel Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 396 If it is a version where the E5070B 71B doesn t have the removable hard disk assembly skip this step Remove the following assemblies e 50 ATX Power Supply Assembly refer to A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement on page 400 e 23 Handler I O board refer to A23 Handler I O Board Replacement on page 402 e A21 Analog Interface board refer to A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement on page 440 e A24 GPIB board refer to A24 GPIB Card Replacement on page 442 e A26 LCD Interface Card refer to 26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JPIKK 4232454 and below on page 444 Disconnect the following cables e Connected to the Front Panel item 1 Connected from the A10 Analog Mother Board item 2 e Connected from the A28 FDD item 3 Connected from the mass storage disk assembly or the removable
199. 5070B E5071B firmware Itis possible to update the E5070B E5071B firmware but not the following software by this procedure e OS Operating System VBA Visual Basic for Application Calibration Constant Data The following is the procedure to update the E5070B E5071B firmware User should log in as and user should have administrator authority when performing firmware update Download the latest firmware from the donload site It is prepared as execusion file E507071B xx yy exe Run the E507071B_xx yy exe to extract the E5070 msi Then save the E5070 msi to USB mass storage device using PC For E5070B 71B firmware revision 9 10 or later there is only 1 msi file and no cab files Connect the mouse and the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B rear panel Then turn the E5070B E5071B on Connect the USB mass storage device into the front USB port of the E5070B 71B Copy e5070 msi from the USB mass storage device to the directory under D drive Do not use space for directory name Update the E5070B E5071B firmware 1 Press System key 2 Press Service Menu Update Firmware on the menu bar and the Password dialog box will appear m z Appendix 503 Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 09 10 or later Figure C 3 Service Menu soft key Figure C 4 Update Firmware soft key NOTE If you do not see Update Firmware sof
200. 54 on page 386 Remove the source board as described in 1 Source Board Replacement on page 412 Remove the receiver board as described in 2 Receiver Board Replacement on page 414 Remove the level vernier as described in A3 Level Vernier Replacement on page 418 Remove the power supply as described in A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement on page 400 Disconnect the cables connected to the 10 analog motherboard Remove the nine TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the A10 analog mother board 438 Chapier 6 Replacement Procedure A10 Analog Motherboard Replacement Figure 6 32 10 Analog Motherboard Removal p 1 n e5070bse106 Replacement Procedure Step 1 Replace the A10 analog mother board by inverse procedure of removal Chapter 6 439 2 D D 3 2 Ld U E Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 Replacement Procedure A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 33 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove four TORX T10 screw item 1 fastening the angle to the side panels Disconnect the cables item 2 3 and 4 from the A21 Analog Interface board Remove a TORX T10 screw
201. 5623A and measured with an external power meter to calibrate the attenuated power level Since the dynamic accuracy does not have frequency dependence this test is performed at 1 195 GHz only Dynamic accuracy specification 23 5 C Inputlevel Dynamic Input level Dynamic dBm accuracy dBm accuracy dB dB 10 0 207 50 0 091 5 0 075 55 0 106 0 0 042 60 0 125 5 0 031 65 0 151 10 0 024 70 0 189 15 0 030 75 0 248 20 0 035 80 0 346 25 0 040 85 0 509 30 0 045 90 0 785 35 0 056 95 1 248 40 0 067 100 2 008 45 0 078 Test Equipment Power meter Agilent E4419A B 82 Chapter 2 Step 1 Step 2 Figure 2 31 Network Analyzer Source 2 5070 045 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Power sensor Agilent 8482A Dynamic Accuracy Test Kit Agilent Z5623A w Opt H01 6 dB fixed attenuator Agilent 8491A w Opt 006 and H60 Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 Agilent N6314A p n in 2 ea 8120 8862 GPIB controller or PC with GPIB Interface Card GPIB Interconnection Cable Agilent 10833A B Procedure Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor used m D m 3 5 Connect the test equipment as shown in the following figures Option 213 214 Figure 2 32 Option 31
202. 7 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 Chapter 2 157 U 3 9 E D 2 n Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 6 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 158 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 8 5 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Mea
203. 7 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61646 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61652 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 E5070 61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 E5070 61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 15 E5070 61673 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 16 E5070 61687 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 17 0955 0301 9 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 18 E5070 61656 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 19 1810 0118 1 1 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 337 e 2 72 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY 422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Front View Analog Figure 5 26 Front View Analog 5070 071 338 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Table 5 26 Front View Analog Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5071 65008 1 A4 POWER AMP MODULE Opt 31x 41x E5071 65009 1 A4 POWER AMP MODULE Opt 213 214 2 See Table 5 42 1 A8 RF SWITCH ASSEMBLY 3 See Table 5 47 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD 4 See Table 5 47 Table 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD Opt 31x 41x 5 48 5 E5071 61003 9 1 A3 LEVEL VERNIER 6 5087 7137 7 1 A8 R
204. 71B employs a PLL frequency synthesizer for the signal source the frequency accuracy test at these two frequency points can verify the accuracy for the entire frequency range Specification 23 5 C referenced to 23 C Frequency accuracy lt 5 ppm 300 kHz to 3 GHz E5070B lt 5 ppm 300 kHz to 8 5 GHz E5071B 23 5 C referenced to 23 C High stability time base accuracy lt 1 ppm 300 kHz to 3 GHz E5070B option 1E5 lt 1 ppm 300 kHz to 8 5 GHz E5071B Test equipment Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A with Opt 010 and 030 BNC cable 61 cm Agilent p n 8120 1839 N m BNC f adapter Agilent p n 1250 0780 Procedure Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 1 For testing the E5070B E5071B equipped with option 1E5 connect a BNC m BNC m adaptor between the Ref In connector and the Ref Oven 10 MHz connector on the E5070B E5071B rear panel For testing without option 1E5 disconnect the above BNC m BNC m adaptor Figure 2 1 shows the test setup for the E5070B E5071B with 4 port option Opt 413 414 For 2 port and 3 port options Opt 213 214 313 314 connect the frequency counter input cable to Port 1 as well 34 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 1 Frequency accuracy test setup 50 MHz E5070B 5071B eS a poun C9 BaBH CIO c 0000 Frequency Counter aa oooa amp uuu
205. 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 Chapter 2 143 U 3 9 E D 2 n Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 3 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 144 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude D
206. 8 a REF 7 a REF 6 a REF 5 a REF 4 a REF 3 a REF 2 a REF 1 a REF 1 2 a REF 3 a REF 4 a REF 5 a REF 6 a REF 7 a REF 8 a REF 118 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation NOTE dBm a REF 9 a REF 10 a REF 11 a REF 12 a REF 13 a REF 14 a REF 15 a REF Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies listed below E5071B for serial prefix 8 5 GHz MY421 or JPIKK CW frequency Hz Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0 6 a REF 5 4 3 2 a REF 1 a REF 1 2 3 a REF 4 a REF 5 6 a REF 7 a REF 8 a REF Chapter 2 119 U 3 D 2 n Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 9 a REF 10 a REF 11 a REF 12 a REF 13 a REF 14 a REF 15 a REF NOTE Serial Prefix MY 422 and above Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies listed below E5070B E5071B for seria
207. 98 Replacement Procedure ee ete aR RE RE Gh BS ELEN ORES CEE RE SEARS 398 50 ATX Power Supply Assembly 400 Jools R quimed Geb dete dp Sine GESTIS 400 Contents Removal Procedure 2 4 03 cine aaa whale ea EO ER lata ts 400 Replacement Proced re ss cos nieis gels a e ee ee Le 400 A23 Handler I O Board 02 402 TOONS Required hea debe reused st apd ober eet eee vex aves Se 402 Removal Procedures wih Lebe RR epus gi ew gre rp eer ees 402 Replacement ssn nie nde b ERU OR e ue eren 402 DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Lecce reete ee RE 404 Tools Requited i oiu Le bag Sel eae eA Sh Sale es eR eas 404 Removal Proceduire ou eeepc ete eger ead ee aree iden 404 Replacement Procedure pL eue US ERASE MR ede e red 405 A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx 42301396 and 2 406 Tools Required E
208. AUTION Slide the assembly slowly to prevent tension from cables Step 6 Disconnect the flat cable item 4 from the FDD Step 7 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 5 fastening the FDD to the mount Step 8 Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 6 fastening the plate Replacement Procedure Step 1 Fasten the plate to the new FDD and then fasten it to the mount as shown in Figure 6 11 Step 2 Replace the FDD assembly by inverse procedure of removal 398 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Replacement Figure 6 11 A28 FDD Removal 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D 507005 081 6 399 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 1 NOTE Replacement Procedure A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 torque screwdriver TORX T10 set to 7 in lb Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 12 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 396 If it is a version where the E5070B
209. Agilent E5070B E5071B ENA Series RF Network Analyzers Service Guide Eighth Edition RE Agilent Technologies Manufacturing No E5070 90370 November 2008 Notices The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated into another language without the prior written consent of the Agilent Technologies Microsoft MS DOS Windows Visual C Visual Basic VBA and Excel registered UNIX is a registered trademark in U S and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Portions Copyright 1996 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Copyright 2005 2007 2008 Agilent Technologies Manual Printing History The manual s printing date and part number indicate its current edition The printing date changes when a new edition is printed Minor corrections and updates that are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated October 2002 First Edition March 2003 Second Edition November 2004 Third Edition Update service information for serial prefix MY422 and the A20 motherboard change May 2005 Fourth Edition Added removable HDD and USB USBTMC interface port for serial prefix MY424 a
210. BA Visual Basic for Application e Calibration Constant Data The following is the procedure to update the E5070B E5071B firmware Step 1 Prepare the E5070B E5071B firmware installation disks Step 2 Connect the mouse and the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B rear panel Then turn the E5070B E5071B on Step 3 Insert the E5070B E5071B firmware installation disk1 into the FDD of the E5070B E5071B Step 4 Update the E5070B E5071B firmware m z 5 Q Appendix 499 Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 06 51 or lower 1 Press key 2 Press Service Menu Update Firmware on the menu bar and the Password dialog box will appear NOTE If you do not see Update Firmware soft key execute log off and re login as agena 3 Enter the password e507xa into the Password box then click OK 4 Open dialog box apperas Confirm that E5070 msi is displayed at the File name column Press the Open button and the Windows instoller will appear 5 After the disk 1 installation is finished insert the firmware installation disk 2 2 of n into the FDD of the E5070B E5071B then click OK 6 Repeat 5 for the number of floppy disks Step 5 After the disk n installation is finished the instrument will be restarted and the measurement view will appear Step 6 Press Firmware Revision Confirm the firmware revision you have just installed 500 Appendix C Step 1 NOTE NO
211. Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 207 e The power on self test is performed once automatically after the E5070B E5071B measurement view is displayed If the power on self test fails go to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 219 Check the basic function If the front panel keyboard mouse controls LCD display data storage remote interface or another function except for measurement part does not work correctly go to Function Specific Troubleshooting on page 227 Check the measurement function If the instrument fails performance tests go to Performance test failure troubleshooting on page 260 If the measurement function does not work correctly perform the internal test and external test provided in the E5070B E5071B s service function When the internal test fails go to Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting on page 222 When the external test fails go to External Test Failure Troubleshooting on page 254 The internal test includes some unique measurement function tests in addition to the tests that are common to the power on self test Thus it is necessary to perform the internal test even if the power on self test passed 202 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To Troubleshoot the Instrument Figure 4 2 Primary trouble isolation flowchart Problems on Control Panel Keyboard Mouse LCD Display Flop
212. CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61647 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61646 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61652 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 E5070 61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 E5070 61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 15 E5070 61634 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 16 E5070 61687 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 17 0955 0301 9 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 18 E5070 61636 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 19 E5070 61675 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 20 E5070 61676 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 21 1810 0118 1 1 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 345 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Replaceable Parts List Others Front Panel Figure 5 31 Front Panel e5070bse3007 346 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Table 5 31 Front Panel Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 66522 6 1 A22 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD with Video Card E5070 66529 1 A22 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD without Video Card for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above 2 E5070 25101 1 1 KEYPAD RUBBER 3 5070 01231 8 1 ANGLE N CONN 4 86290 60005 7 1 CONN TP N ASSY 2190 0104 0 1 WSHR LK INTL T 2950 0132 6 1 NUT HEX DUB CHAM 5 5070 00202 1 1 PANEL SUB 6 E5070 00211 2 1 PANEL FRONT E5070B Opt 21x E5070 00213 4 1 PANEL FRONT E5070B Opt 31x E5070 00214 5 1 PANEL FRONT E5070B Opt 41x
213. C_NAME S_NAME Map Network Drive Dialog Box Map Network Drive 2 xi Path WC NAMENS NAME Cancel Reconnect at logon 5070 063 in the network path is the computer name of the E5070B E5071B you confirmed on 4 of Step2 S NAME in the share name of the C or D drive of the E5070B E5071B you enterd on 5 of Step 3 3 The dialog box to enter the user name and the password appears Enter the user name agena and then click the OK button 4 The network path will appear on the PC s Explorer Confirm that the network path you enter is connected to the PC 5 Execute the anti virus software on the PC and the menu for the anti virus software will appear Check the drive you entered on 2 of Step 5 For the operation of anti virus software refer to its manual 6 Check if the drives C and D are infected Disconnect the drives of E5070B E5071B from the PC 1 Click Programs Window Explorer on the Start Menu to start up the PC s Explorer Click Tools Disconnect Network Drive on the menu of the Explorer Disconnect Network dialog box will appear 2 Select Network Drive you checked and press the OK button The drive will disappear from the Explorer If no drive has been infected proceed the next step If the drive C or D has been infected replace the A27 mass storage of the E5070B E5071B Change the IP address and subnet mask of the E5070B E5071B if you select Use the following IP address and entere
214. Culate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 6000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValC SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 6000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 7500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True Chapter 2 61 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST SCPI CALCulate 1 1 11 jected Function EX ECute MaxValD SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI SCPI SCPI SCPI CALCulate 1 SE CALCulate 1 SE CALCulate 1 Sl CALCulate 1 I jected Function Ij jected Function jected Function ELected Function n DO DO ain STARt ain STOP DOMain STATe ECute 7500000000 8500000000 True MaxValE SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA End Sub End If frmCrossTal frmCrossTal fFrmCrossTal frmCrossTal fFrmCrossTal 2 2 2 2 k2 Function 10910 X Log10 62 Log X End Function txtVall Text CSng 20 txtVal2 Text CSng 20 txtVal3 Text CSng 20 txtVal4 Text CSng 20 Show Log 10 10910 MaxValB 0 10910 MaxValC 0 10910 MaxValD 0 10910 MaxValE 0 Chapter 2 Per
215. Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 396 If it is a version where the E5070B 71B doesn t have the removable hard disk assembly skip this step Remove the following assemblies e 50 ATX Power Supply Assembly refer to A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement on page 400 e 23 Handler I O board refer to A23 Handler I O Board Replacement on page 402 e A21 Analog Interface board refer to A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement on page 440 e A24 GPIB board refer to A24 GPIB Card Replacement on page 442 e A26 LCD Interface Card refer to 26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JPIKK 4232454 and below on page 444 Disconnect the following cables e Connected to the Front Panel item 1 Connected from the A10 Analog Mother Board item 2 e Connected from the A28 FDD item 3 Connected from the mass storage disk assembly or the removable hard disk assembly item 4 e Connected to the A32 USB connector item 5 Remove three TORX T10 screws item 6 fastening the guide plate Remove eight TORX T10 screws item 7 fastening the digital motherboard Lift the digital motherboard 406 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Re
216. Display troubleshooting Whether all the connections to the A20 are normal or not Check if there is any disconnection or connection working loose Whether the jumper setting on the A20 is correct or not as described in Configure the Motherboard on page 262 Whether BIOS options are correct or not as described in To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 264 Checking with the external monitor Connect an external VGA monitor to the VIDEO output on the E5070B E5071B rear panel If something is displayed on the external monitor the problem is present around the LCD Also check the A21 and A22 because the ON OFF setting of the LCD backlight is controlled by the A21 through the A22 front interface board If nothing is displayed even on the external monitor the problem seems in the A20 digital motherboard or A26 LCD interface card Check if the A26 board is securely connected to the A20 board Checking flat cable Check a flat cable between the A26 and A31 LCD connector Check around the backlight Check A52 inverter board and a cable between the A52 and A26 Also check the cables between the A51 LCD 52 If the cables are normal check the A51 LCD 206 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 an
217. Done Not Done Refl Tracking Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Port 3 Source Match Done Not Done Not Done Mot Done Directivity Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Refl Tracking Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Port 4 Source Match Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Directivity Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Refl Tracking Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse133 b Select the test ports for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 54 Follow the instruction Clicking Select All button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box OPEN port 1 dialog box Connect OPEN to Port 1 e5070bse132 c Connect an type N Open termination to the specified port For more information on Error Term tests setup see Table 4 10 Error Term tests setup Test parameter Connect Sweep freq span IFBW Nop and RF power settings System correction Automatic Source match Open Full span 1 kHz BW 201 5 dBm System correction ON Directivity Short Load Reflection tracking d Click OK button to continue the test The Error Term dialog box displays Now calibrating for a few seconds Wait until SHORT dialog box opens
218. E 9 2 2 O Figure 4 72 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above the DRAM test before proceeding to the BIOS setup utility procedure Confirm the DRAM count in accordance with the following procedure Connect the external keyboard and mouse to the E5070B E5071B rear panel connectors Turn the instrument on Wait until the E5070B E5071B boots up Do not press any key until the E5070B E5071B measurement view appears Press key on the front panel Click Misc Setup in the softkey menu Click Control Panel in the softkey menu Scroll the function viewer to find System icon and double click System This opens System Properties window as shown in Figure 4 72 System Properties window System Properties 21 l Network Identification Hardware User Profiles Advanced System Microsoft Windows 2000 5 00 2195 Service Pack 4 Registered to E5052A E5052A 51873 0 0007007 00000 Computer x86 Family 6 Model 8 Stepping 10 AT AT COMPATIBLE 522 292 KB RAM m 5052 096 Verify that 522 292 KB RAM is displayed in the Computer profile as shown in Figure 4 72 If it is not correct the A20 board is faulty Click OK button to close the window Turn the E5070B
219. E488 2 A Additional standard needed The GPIB command that turns ON the calibration function has been sent before all of the data measurements needed to calculate the calibration factor have been completed In 1 port calibration for example when measurements completed for OPEN and SHORT standards but not yet for LOAD standard You have tried to turn on the calibration function by calculating 1 port calibration coefficient using SENS CORR COLL SAVE or SENS CORR OFFS COLL SAVE Be sure to measure all necessary calibration data before sending commands This error is not generated by front key operations B 4 Block data not allowed An block data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one C Calibration data lost This error occurs when a file containing the system calibration data is not found or in a damaged state at time of the startup of this instrument indicating a failure of this instrument Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument Calibration method not selected This error occurs when the command for validating the calibration data SENS CORR COLL SAVE or SENS CORR OFFS COLL SAVE is executed before the command for selecting a calibration type SENS CORR COLL METH xxxx or SENS CORR OFFS COLL METH xxxx is executed This error is not generated by front key operations Character data not allowed A character
220. E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61632 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61688 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 E5070 61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 E5070 61675 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 0955 0301 9 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 15 E5070 61676 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 16 E5070 61687 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 17 1810 0118 1 4 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 331 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and 421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 Figure 5 23 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 HEN m IIITTITI EISE X rex Te 507005 068 332 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Table 5 23 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61685 2 1 RF
221. ENT 222122222222222222222227222272 IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement accept this agreement don t accept this agreement lt Back Next gt e5070bqj004 Step 4 The Network Identification wizard appears Click the Next button Figure B 3 Figure B 3 Network Identification wizard Welcome to the Network Identification Wizard Ths wizard helps you connect your computer to network To continue cick Next Back Next gt Cancel e5070bqj002 494 Appendix B System Recovery Initial Registration of E5070B E5071B Step 5 In the Network Identification Wizard dialog box 1 2 select the Windows always assumes the following user has logged on to this computer box and check that agena is in the User Name box If not type in agena Finally click the Next gt button Figure B 4 Figure B 4 Network Identification Wizard dialog box 1 2 Network Identification Wizard Users of This Computer Who can log to this computer You can require all users to enter user name and password to log on or you can have Windows assume the same user will always log on to this computer Which option do you prefer User must enter a user name and password to use this computer indows always assumes the following user has logged on to this computer agena Back Next gt Cancel e5070bqj003 Step 6 In the Network Identification Wizard dialog box 2 2 click the Fin
222. Execute the Internal Test on page 219 To Execute the External Test on page 240 Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System dynamic range Test Dynamic accuracy test Uncorrected system performance A5 Crystal Oven for 1E5 Perform the following required adjustment using Crystal Oven for 1E5 in Spot Adjustment of the program Oven Reference Adjustment Opt 1E5 Frequency Accuracy Test with Option 1E5 8 Source Swich Perform the following required adjustments using SW in Spot Adjustment of the program Source Power Adjustment Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment To Execute the Internal Test on page 219 To Execute the External Test on page 240 Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System dynamic range Test Dynamic accuracy test Uncorrected system performance A6 RF Switch Temperature Controller Board No adjustment needed To Execute the Internal Test on page 219 A7 Source Step Attenuator Opt 214 314 414 Perform the following required adjustments using Att for 214 314 414 in Spot Adjustment of the program Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment To Execute the Internal Test on page 219 To Execute the External Test on page 240 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test RF Output Level Linearity Test Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System Dynamic Range Test Dynamic Accuracy Test Unco
223. F SWITCH SPDT Opt 31x 41x 7 E5071 66571 2 1 Al SOURCE BOARD E5071 69571 8 1 Al SOURCE BOARD Exchange 8 See Table 5 44 Table 1 STEP ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY Opt 214 314 414 5 45 Chapter 5 339 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Front View Miscellaneous Parts Figure 5 27 Front View Miscellaneous Parts e5070bse072 _____ ___11 Hi el DS 1 ay Table 5 27 Front View Miscellaneous Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 PN T10 2 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 3 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 4 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO Opt 31x 41x 5 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 6 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 7 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO Opt 214 314 414 8 E5070 01222 5 1 PLATE Opt 214 E5070 01223 1 PLATE Opt 314 414 9 0515 0372 2 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 340 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 Figure 5 28 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 rura es at NL 12
224. Figure 5 23 on page 332 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 29 on page 342 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 413 Figure 5 24 on page 334 414 Figure 5 25 on page 336 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 30 on page 344 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above Remove the two TORX T10 screws fastening the extractor item 2 412 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure 1 Source Board Replacement Step 5 Slide the Al source board using the extractor Replacement Procedure 20 D gt U O D Q D Step 1 Replace the A1 source board by inverse procedure of removal NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement Figure 6 18 1 Source Board Removal e5070bse102 Chapter 6 413 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Table 6 3 Step 4 Replacement Procedure A2 Receiver Board Replacement A2 Receiver Board Replacement Tools Required
225. G 3k 0 003 8 5G 3k lt 0 005 Crosstalk Test Direction 521 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 90 Direction 512 Options 213 214 313 and 314 Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 90 Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 162 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 7 5G 85G 10 lt 90 Direction S23 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 90 Direction S41 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 7 5 G 8 5 G
226. H Press 8 Gin Press 9 Press 0 to set the number of sweep points to 50 Power will be focused Press 2 to set the power level to 10 dBm Press lt gt to focus on the Start frequency of the second segment Press 4 C 2 5 9 9 9 8 9 3 E to enter z as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused to enter 6 GHz as the stop frequency The Points will be focused to set the number of sweep points to 20 Power will be focused Press to set the power level to 8 dBm Press C gt S S to focus on the Start frequency of the third segment Press 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 enter 6 000000001 z as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused Press 8 focused 5 LG n to enter 8 5 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be Press 3 0 to set the number of sweep points to 30 Power will be focused Press 6 to set the power level to 6 dBm See Table 2 10 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B for serial prefix MY421 or JPIKK E5071B Segment Table setting for serial prefix MY421 or JP1KK Start Stop Points Power 1 300 kHz 4 25 GHz 50 10 dBm 2 4 250000001 GHz 6 GHz 20 8 dBm 3 6 000000001 GHz 8 5 GHz 30 6 dBm 7 E5071B for serial prefix MY422 and above
227. L MEM is sent to a correct program message DISP WIND1 TRAC1 MEM ON the message sent is received as an undefined command by this instrument See the command reference and use correct commands This error occurs also when a port not existing on this model is specified in a command specifying a port number as an index Such commands are CALC FSIM SEND DEEM PORTn xxxx CALC FSIM SEND PMC PORTn xxxx CALC FSIM SEND ZCON PORTn ZO R and SENS CORR EXT PORTn TIME they include PORTn as part User characterization not found in module This error occurs when the selected user profile is not detected in the ECal memory while reading it from the ECal module written by the user definition ECal V Valid Ecal module not found This error occurs when the number of ports of the ECal module connected is less than the necessary number of ports This error occurs for example when a 4 port Cal executing command SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLTA is executed with a 2 port ECal module connected This error is not generated by front key operations Valid power meter not found Valid power meter is not connected refer to Power Calibration as described in E5070B E5071B User s Guide This error occurs when the E5070B 5071B and the power meter is not connected with USB GPIB interface the GPIB addresses do not match between the power meter and the E5070B 5071B s power meter or the power meter is turned off during the measurement 534 Appendix
228. Lected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 3000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 4000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValE SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 40000000004 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 60000000001 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValF SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 6000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 7500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValG SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 7500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 8500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValH SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA frmDynamicRange2 txtVall Text 80 CSng 20 Log10 MaxValC 0 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST frmDynamicRange2 txtVal2 Text CSng 20 10910 1 0 frmDynamicRange2 txtVal3 Text CSng 20 10 0 frmDynamicRange2 txtVal4 Text CSng 20 10910
229. Load match 6G 8 5G lt 10 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 3G 6G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 6G 85G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 3G 6G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 6G 85G 1 0 Port 3 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Directivity 3G 6G lt 20 Directivity 6G 85G lt 15 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3G 6G lt 20 Source match 6G 8 5 G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 8 5G lt 10 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking 190 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Transmission 3G 6G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 6G 85G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 3G 6G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 6G 85G 1 0 Port 4 Options 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Directivity 3G 6G lt 20 Directivity 6G 8 5G lt 15 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3G 6G lt 20 Source match 6G 8 5 G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt
230. N Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below gt Onboard FDC Controller Enabled gt Onboard Serial Port 1 3F8 IRQ4 gt Onboard Serial Port 2 2F8 IRQ3 gt UART Mode Select Normal gt Onboard Parallel Port 378 IRQ7 gt Parallel Port Mode ECP EPP Mode Select EPP1 9 gt Mode Use DMA 3 gt means sub menu Power Management Setup Power Management Setup options are displayed by choosing Power Management Setup using c keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 67 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 18 If there is any difference select it using and 1 keys and change the option setting by pressing or 5 keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press le key If the Power Management Setup options are set incorrectly the E5070B E5071B may not be turned on In this case perform the following procedure 1 Turn the instrument on Set the jumper to the setting different from Figure 4 59 on page 263 Turn the instrument off and turn it on again 2 3 4 Restore jumper setting in Figure 4 59 on page 263 5 Turn the instrument off and turn it on again 6 Configure the BIOS from the beginning PN
231. NGE TEST See Table 2 15 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B for serial prefix MY421 or JPIKK E5071B Segment Table setting for serial prefix MY421 or JPIKK Start Stop Points Power 1 300 kHz 4 25 GHz 50 10 dBm 2 4 250000001 GHz 6 GHz 20 8 dBm 3 6 000000001 GHz 8 5 GHz 30 6 dBm E5071B for serial prefix MY422 and above x 3 0 J 0 J to enter 300 KHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused y Press 3 J to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused 7 Press to set the number of sweep points to 35 Power will be focused aa Press 0 to set the power level to 10 dBm ab Press C gt S S to focus on the Start frequency of the second segment ac Press 3 G 8 8 8 9 9J 9J 0 Ga to enter 3 000000001 GHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused ad Press 4 J 2 5 to enter 4 25 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused ae Press 5 to set the number of sweep points to 15 Power will be focused af Press 9 set the power level to 9 dBm ag Press gt S to focus on the Start frequency of third segment ah Press 4J J 2 5 9 9J GJ 9J 9 9 01 Gin to enter 4 250000001 GHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused a
232. OARD 2 0515 0372 2 9 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 e 2 D O amp D e m N Chapter 5 365 Figure 5 50 e5070bse074 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Chassis Assembly Chassis Assembly 1 5 50 Chassis Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5070 60023 8 1 CHASSIS 2 5022 1190 4 1 FRONT FRAME 3 0515 2113 3 6 SCREW MACH MA 0 x 8 PN 720 4 8160 0641 3 1 GASKET 125 cm 366 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Keyboard Assembly Figure 5 51 Keyboard Assembly 5070 064 5 51 Keyboard Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0430 5 8 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 2 2 D ud D m N Chapter 5 367 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others LCD and Inverter Assembly for E5060B S N MY42401986 and below for E5061B S N MY42404509 and below Figure 5 52 LCD and Inverter Assembly e5070ase295 Table 5 52 LCD and Inverter Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 1402 5 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T15 2 E5070 61627 2 1 WIRE ASSY 368 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others LCD and Inverter Assembly for E5070B S N MY42401987 and above for E5071B S N MY424
233. OTE Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 1 Step 2 Replacement Procedure A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Hex key 1 5 mm Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 39 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B S N 42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 388 Release the clamped cables from the clamps item 1 on the cover Keep the mylar cable connected Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Disconnect the cable item 5 connected through the cover The item 5 is not connected in the E5070B E5071B without the option 016 Disconnect the four cables item 6 7 8 and 9 from the front keyboard Remove the knob from the front panel with a 1 5 mm hex key Remove the two TORX T15 screws item 10 fastening the inverter assembly Remove the eight TORX T10 screws item 11 fastening the A22 front panel keyboard Separate the keyboard into the board and the rubber key Replacement Procedure
234. Opt 21x E5071 69015 8 1 15 RECEIVER RF BOARD Exchange 2 0515 1403 2 3 SCREW MACH M4 0 x 6 FL T15 Opt 21x 3 E507 1 66517 0 1 17 RECEIVER IF BOARD Opt 21x 4 0515 1403 2 4 SCREW MACH 4 0 x 6 FL T15 Opt 21x 1 5071 61015 2 2 15 RECEIVER RF BOARD Opt 31x 41x E5071 69015 8 1 A15 RECEIVER RF BOARD Exchange 2 0515 1403 2 6 SCREW MACH 4 0 x 6 FL T15 Opt 31x 41x 3 E5071 66517 0 2 A17 RECEIVER IF BOARD Opt 31x 41x 4 0515 1403 2 8 SCREW MACH M4 0 x 6 FL T15 Opt 31x 41x e 2 D Q D U e m 7 Chapter 5 363 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Receiver Module Assembly Opt 31x 41x Figure 5 48 Receiver Module Assembly Opt 31x 41x e5070ase063 Table 5 48 Receiver Module Assembly Opt 31x 41x Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 20031 6 2 BLOCK 2 0515 1864 9 8 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 22 FL T10 3 E5070 25031 6 4 SHEET THERMAL 364 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Analog Motherboard Assembly Figure 5 49 Analog Motherboard Assembly _ 2 _ _ 1 7 50700 075 5 49 Analog Motherboard Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 66540 8 1 ANALOG MOTHER B
235. PUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 10 DAI5 5 10 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at bz10 Chapter 2 89 Table 2 22 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Z5623A attenuator settings 1 setting dB A2 setting dB GPIB command DA20 10 10 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 10 DA20a 20 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 20 DA25 DA30 10 20 20 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 20 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 20 DA30a 30 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 30 DA35 30 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 30 DA40 10 30 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 30 DA40a 40 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 40 DA45 40 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 40 DASO 10 40 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 40 DA50a 50 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 a 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 50 55 50 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 50 DA60 10 50 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 50 DA60a
236. Press CV gt lt gt Enter to perform Done Press C gt C to select Select Ports in reference to the position of Done and press Enter Change Select Ports setting as shown in the fourth row in Table 2 19 Press CY gt Enter to perform Thru calibration Disconnect the N N cable and connect the Load termination to each test port as shown in the following figures Opt 313 314 Figure 2 26 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 27 Press gt and Enter to perform Isolation calibration Press gt and to perform Done System dynamic rang measurement for select ports setting as shown in the third and fourth row in Table 2 19 Press and verify that Correction is set to ON Press Avg J C gt C gt 45 select Averaging to set the Averaging function to OFF NOTE Be sure to set the Averaging function to OFF 76 Chapter 2 Step 51 Table 2 20 Step 52 Figure 2 30 Step 53 Step 54 Step 55 Step 56 Step 1 Step 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Press and select the following S parameter from menu Option 313 314 621 Option 413 414 641 These parameters are shown in the third row in Table 2 20 S parameter settings for system dynamic range test Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 2 1 521 532 532 5 2 512 523 523 5 3 Not required 521 541 D n 4 Not required 12 514 Press to run the test
237. R RR RUE Feet dR as 438 Replacement Procedure ouA yg got dee he beg eMe ee peer re 439 A2 Analog Interface Board 440 440 Removal Procedure isa Seis os BA CR x ERE E HR aes ROW a Cale 440 Replacement Procedure diy oa ee tot nb pet seach doen ed 440 A24 GPIB Card Replacement 442 15 ester e mere Wie As Grohe Wot ee tuned 442 Removal Procedure ssn RE e EC bade ed E 442 Replacement Procedure 442 A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JPIKK 4232454 and below 444 TOO S REQuired ass c seo aa Gin BRS OS BAAR SEA SO aE ROWE RATER SRR 444 Removal eec deb NEPU PERPE e ES 444 Replacement Procedures c opem ec e Gate e ec RR Sone t 444 USB USBTMO Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above iei eee ROSE SORA PETER RE 446 0018 2 Et e eb Ue
238. REW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO Chapter 5 317 e 2 n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Top View Under Power Supply for E5070B S N from MY42401101 to MY42401986 E5071B S N from MY42402455 to MY42404509 Figure 5 15 Top View Under Power Supply e 0 1 0 Ae Qe 9 50706 5001 318 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Table 5 15 Top View Under Power Supply Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61661 4 1 WIRE ASSY 1400 0493 2 CLAMP CABLE 2 E5070 61663 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 3 E5070 6 1662 5 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 4 E5070 61664 7 1 FLAT CBL ASSY Opt 016 5 5070 61667 1 USB CABLE ASSY 6 E5070 61617 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY Opt 214 E5070 61618 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY Opt 314 414 7 E5070 61614 7 1 WIRE ASSY YELLOW 8 E5070 61613 6 1 WIRE ASSY ORANGE Opt 31x 41x 9 E5070 61612 5 1 WIRE ASSY RED Opt 31x 41x 10 E5070 61615 8 1 WIRE ASSY BROWN Opt 21x E5070 61611 4 1 WIRE ASSY BROWN Opt 31x 41x 11 E5052 61626 1 FLAT FLEXIBLE CABLE DVI Chapter 5 319 e 2 oO
239. RF Network Analyzers The performance test names are listed in Table 2 1 The test procedures are described sequentially in the following pages The test name indicates the tested performance and to which performance group the tested performance belongs Each procedure consists of the following parts Description describes the test procedure Specification describes the performance verified in the test Test Equipment describes test equipment required in the test Procedure describes test procedure step by step Allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes before you execute any of the performance tests Perform all performance tests in an ambient temperature of 23 5 C The performance tests should be performed periodically The recommended test interval is 12 months The test interval depends on maintenance of use and the environmental conditions under which the instrument is used You may find that the interval could be shortened or lengthened however such a decision should be based on substantial quantitative data Before performing any tests make extra copies of the calculation sheets and the performance test record pertaining to the test procedure These are required in the test procedure For explanation of how to use these records see the calculation sheet and performance test record at the end of this literature All the test procedures are described without using the optional touch screen LCD features opt
240. SOS EM Caves aude en evans n DE de fedus el 406 Removal Procedure ucc edere LS ERR M ES he RR EROR RD SEE OU DERE 406 Replacement Procedure iue ups Rr ere pe M dabei eei eet eet 407 A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY 42301397 thruMY4232454 yr ee ere ese eed 408 Tools Required cipue dh CR aba eles BUE ae e ER edd 408 Removal Procedure eR eee E 408 Replacement Procedure pe RUE ERR E REESE REC tae ote 409 A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above re C Re a cb ri t de OR RU RR CENSURE 410 Tools Required Eee I p eet ehe gets 410 Removal Procedure 2 RR LE pet ER EEUU Ue reper reg 410 Replacement Procedure vas tcen e Tee BO EN UA EUER a Gee 411 1 Board 2 202222222 2 992 eR RR RU EE eels 412 Tools Required zi ne tg diene he ee e tene de sra 412 Removal Procedure s s EE ei eb pa E RR 412 Replacement Proced re ences bee ERE E ER e psu 413 A2 Receiver Board Replacement eR gre e Re EROR RR OR ce HORROR TR 414 Tools Required 255 Been SUE 414 Removal Procedure sex
241. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Replacement Procedure A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK MY42300632 thru MY4231100 E5071B S N prefix JP1KK MY42301397 thru MY4232454 A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY42300632 thru MY4231100 E5071B S N prefix JPIKK MY42301397 thru MY4232454 Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 42 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Release the clamped cables from the clamps item 1 on the cover Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Disconnect the two cables item 5 and 6 connected through the cover The item 6 is not connected in the E5070B E5071B without the option 016 Release the cable from the clamps item 7 on the LCD Disconnect the cable item 8 connected to the inverter Remove the four TORX T15 screws item 9 fastening the 51 LCD display to the front panel Replacement Procedure Repl
242. Sw T Att Vern Mod ctrl A15 17 1 A2 Master Analog GND DC bus on A2 master HHH DC 2 Analog 10V 9V 10V and 9V on A2 HHH 3 Analog 4V 4V 4V and 4V on A2 HHH 4 Analog 5V 5V for analog on A2 HHH 5 Digital 5V 5V for digital on A2 HHH 6 Digital 3 3V 3 3V on A2 HHH 7 TEMPA Thermometer A 8 Thermometer 222 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Table 4 1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test Test First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly No group Al A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver 7 Sre Lvl Amp Sw T Att Vern ctrl 15 17 9 A2 Slave Analog GND DC bus 2 slave HHH DC Opt 10 313 314 4 Analog 10V 9V 10V and 9V on A2 HHH 11 lia Analog 4V 4V 4V and 4V on A2 THHE only 12 Analog 5V 5V for analog on A2 HE 13 Digital 5V 5V for digital on A2 HHH 14 Digital 3 3V 3 3V on A2 HHH 15 TEMPA Thermometer A on A2 TH 16 Thermometer 2 TH 17 A6 DC Analog GND DC bus on A6 THHE 18 Analog 11V 11V on A6 HHH 19 AP5V 5V on A6 HHH 20 Blower control 1 THHE 21 FAN2 Blower control 2 6 HHH 22 FAN3 Blower control 3 on A6 THHE 23 Al DC RVT DC bus on Al THE 24 VTEMP Th
243. System Press Service Menu 20 D U Press Test Menu Press Adjust Touch Screen The touch screen calibration screen Figure 6 9 appears Touch Panel Calibration Screen Device 1 Touch thi each s i car Calibration will termi touch is received within 10 nds Press escape to abort the cali ion process Touch the x mark on the upper left with your finger The mark x appears also on the lower left upper right and lower right Touch the x marks in that order with your finger Touching the four locations described above with your finger automatically concludes the touch screen calibration NOTE With no operation on the touch screen calibration screen for a preset time it automatically closes and the previous measurement screen reappears Chapter 6 395 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 CAUTION Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 1 Replacement Procedure Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal procedure Refer to Figure 6 10 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the TORX T10 screw it
244. TE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 08 01 and A 08 11 Firmware Update for revision A 08 01 A 08 11 Required Equipment e 5070 or E5071B with keyboard and mouse e Several blank floppy disks DOS format How to make E5070B E5071B Firmware Installation Disk The following is the procedure to make the E5070B E5071B Firmware Installation Disk Copy the following files from Agilent Technologies web site to the several floppy disks using your computer s FDD 66 0 You need the same number of floppy disks as that of cab files Where n indicates the maximum number of floppy disks Copy the msi file to each of the floppy disks e disk1 1 of n e5070 msi e507001 cab e disk2 2 of n e5070 msi e507002 cab e diskn n of n e5070 msi e5070xx cab How to update the E5070B E5071B firmware Itis possible to update the E5070B E5071B firmware but not the following software by this procedure OS Operating System VBA Visual Basic for Application Calibration Constant Data The following is the procedure to update the E5070B E5071B firmware Prepare the E5070B E5071B firmware installation disks Connect the mouse and the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B rear panel Then turn the E5070B E5071B on Insert the E5070B E5071B firmware installation disk1 into the FDD of the E5070B E5071B Update the E5070B E5071B firmware 1 Press System key 2
245. Table 2 19 Select Ports settings for response calibration Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 2 1 S21 3 2 S32 3 2 S32 2 1 2 S12 2 3 S23 2 3 S23 3 Not required 2 1 S21 4 1 S41 74 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Table 2 19 Select Ports settings for response calibration Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 4 Not required 1 2 S12 1 4 S14 Step 39 Press C C and to perform Isolation calibration Wait until the calibration is comleted Step 40 Disconnect the load and connect the N N cable as shown in the following figures Opt 313 314 Figure 2 28 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 28 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B N m N m Cable e5070bse007 Chapter 2 75 19 5 3 D 2 o n Figure 2 29 e5070bse012 Step 41 Step 42 Step 43 Step 44 Step 45 Step 46 Step 47 Step 48 Step 49 Step 50 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B N m N m Cable Press 4 and Enter to perform Thru calibration Wait until the calibration is completed
246. Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k 0 001 160 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 1 3G 3k 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k 0 001 4 25 G 3k 0 001 m 6G 3k 0 003 2 756 3k lt 0 003 5 856 3k lt 0 005 5 Direction 32 Option 313 and 314 only 2 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 001 6G 3k lt 0 003 7 5 G 3k lt 0 003 8 5 G 3k lt 0 005 Direction 43 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 001 6G 3k lt 0 003 756 3k lt 0 003 8 5G 3k lt 0 005 Chapter 2 161 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Direction 534 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 001 6G 3k lt 0 003 7 5
247. True setting OFF D A D A dB DA80a 0 80 Adjust source power for Pm db DA80a Tx dB DA80a Tx dB DA80 DA80b 0 80 REF80 REF80 DA85 5 80 Tx 85 Tx 9 DA80b Pm DA85 Pm DA80b gt True D A Running D A dB DA85 True D A dB DA80 DA90 10 80 Tx Tx DA80b Pm DA90 Pm DA80b True D A Running D A dB DA90 True D A dB DA80 m D m 3 5 DA90a 0 90 gt Adjust source power for Pm db DA90a Tx dB DA90a Tx dB DA90 DA90b 0 90 REF90 REF90 DA95 5 90 Tx DA95 Tx DA90b Pm DA95 Pm DA90b gt True D A Running D A dB DA95 True D A dB DA90 DA100 10 90 p Tx DA100 Tx DA90b Pm 9 DA100 Pm 9 DA90b True D A Running D A dB DA100 True D A dB DA90 10 10 0 REF10 REF10 DAS 5 0 Tx DAS Tx DA10 Pm DAS Pm DA10 DAO 0 0 Tx DAO Tx DA10 Pm DAO Pm DA10 gt DA 5 0 0 Tx DA 5 Tx DA10 Pm DA 5 Pm DA10 gt True D A Running D A dB DA 5 True D A dB DA10 DA 10 0 0 n Tx DA
248. W FUNCTION CALIBRATE Allow the equipment to warm up for approximately 30 minutes Do not change any connections or control setting during this time Zero and calibrate the power meter channel to which the range calibrator is connected a The range calibrator s RANGE switch should be set to 1 mW b Setthe range calibrator s FUNCTION switch to STANDBY Press Zero Cal then Zero A or Zero B as appropriate Wait for the operation to complete d Setthe range calibrator s FUNCTION switch to CALIBRATE e Press Zero Cal Cal then Cal A or Cal B as appropriate Wait for the operation to complete Monitor the drift rate of the power meter reading Five minutes following calibration the meter must read 0 001 0 000 or 0 001 dBm If the power meter reading is not one of these values allow additional warm up time then check the drift rate again The range calibrator must remain connected to the power meter during this warm up time Zero and calibrate the power meter channel to which the range calibrator is connected After a channel on the power meter is calibrated do not allow more than 5 minutes to elapse before completing the remaining measurement steps for that channel a The range calibrator s RANGE switch should be set to 1 mW b Setthe range calibrator s FUNCTION switch to STANDBY Press Zero Cal then Zero A or Zero B as appropriate Wait for the operation to be completed d Setthe range calibrato
249. Windows Explorer example File Edit View Go Favorites Tools Help e 2 amp X I X S EB All Folders x A Desktop E5070 msi 207KB My Computer CX E507001 cab 1 018KB 29 kN a 100 amp My Documents w Program Files 4 Windows 2 object s e5070ase220 1 48 My Computer 498 Appendix C Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 06 51 or lower 1 Insert the disk1 into the FDD of your computer 2 On the Windows Explorer click 3 1 2 Floppy A and confirm the files 3 Right click on 3 1 2 Floppy A then click Properties The Properties dialog box appears 4 Enter the Label name in the Label box of properties dialog box General for the disk1 as shown in Figure C 2 and press the OK button Figure C 2 Properties Dialog Box example 3 Floppy Properties gt General Tools Compression cy Label DISK 1 Type 3 Inch Floppy Disk File system FAT Wi Used space 1 253 888 bytes 1 19MB Free space 203 776 bytes 199KB Capacity 1 457 664 bytes 1 38MB Drive e5070ase221 5 Perform through n for each disk NOTE If the label name is not assigned the firmware update for the E5070B E5071B will not be done correctly How to update the E5070B E5071B firmware It is possible to update the E5070B E5071B firmware but not the following software by this procedure OS Operating System V
250. Y SRGD 6 E5070 61632 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61688 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 E5070 61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 E5070 61634 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 E5070 61687 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 15 0955 0301 1 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 16 E5070 61636 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 17 E5070 61675 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 18 E5070 61676 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 19 1810 0118 1 4 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 343 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 Figure 5 30 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 Ir rar ath NZ D UM SE Pme Sr eens fox a Pes SS 2 nf esha rd e5070bse3011 344 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Table 5 30 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61633 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61635 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61653 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61654 5 1 RF
251. Y421 or JP1KK Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 7 5 G 85G 10 lt 106 3 156 3k lt 95 15G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 93 6G 7 5G 3k lt 88 7 5G 8 5G 3k lt 81 Dynamic Accuracy Test Reference power level 10 dBm Direction S21 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 166 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 12 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0
252. Y4232454 on page 456 Push the stopper item 1 and slide the backlight as shown in Figure 6 44 LCD Backlight Removal Backlight e5070bse100 Step 1 Replacement Procedure Replace the backlight by inverse procedure of removal 460 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A5 Crystal Oven Board Opt 1E5 Replacement A5 Crystal Oven Board Opt 1E5 Replacement 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 45 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Step 2 Remove the two cables item 1 and 2 connected to the crystal oven board Step 3 Remove three TORX T10 screws item 3 fastening the crystal oven board from the outside Figure 6 45 5 Crystal Oven Board Removal 5070 225 Replacement Procedure Step 1 Replace the crystal oven board by inverse procedure of removal Chapter 6 461 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Table 6 6 Replacement Procedure N Connector Replacement N Connector Replacement Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Open en
253. Y4232454 and below A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix MY4232454 and below Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 36 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Disconnect the mylar cables item 1 from the display board Use the following procedure when you handle the mylar ribbon cable The mylar cable and their connector are very fragile It s recommended to replace the mylar cable when you are instructed to disconnect and connect the mylar cable frequently a Pry up the retainer slightly at either end of the connector as shown in Figure 6 35 using a small flat edge screwdriver pry up the retainer 4287ase07007 b Pull the mylar ribbon cable out of the connector Remove the TORX T10 screw item 2 fastening the card to the rear panel Lift the A26 LCD interface card Replacement Procedure Replace the A26 LCD interface card by inverse procedure of removal 444 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK MY4232454 and below Figure 6 36 A26 LCD Interface Card Removal for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JPIKK MY4232454 and below 20 D gt U
254. ace the A51 LCD display by inverse procedure of removal Fasten the 5 screws item 9 using a torque screwdriver set to 1 02 N m 9 0 Ib in When you have replaced the LCD on a E5070B E5071B equipped with an Option 016 touch screen you have to calibrate the touch screen Follow the procedure described on Calibration of the Touch Screen on page 391 456 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK MY42300632 thru MY4231100 E5071B S N prefix JP1KK MY42301397 thru MY4232454 Figure 6 42 A51 LCD Removal E5070B S N prefix JP1KK or S N MY42300632 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK or S N MY42301396 and below E5070B S N MY42300633 thru MY4231100 5071 5 MY42301397 thru MY4232454
255. ack 2 Registered to agena 51873 0EM 0007007 00000 Computer 86 Family 6 Model 8 Stepping 10 COMPATIBLE 523 828 KB RAM e5070bse111 Step 3 Click Hardware tab and Device Manager button The operating system detects all the necessary device drivers and displays the device names as shown in Figure 4 25 Figure 4 25 System Properties Window Hardware Device Manager ol x Action View le E 2 JS AGENA RIXTEQZYU H E Agilent devices H Computer H Disk drives IJ Display adapters H 6 Floppy disk controllers Floppy disk drives XX GPIB Interfaces SS IDE controllers 128 Keyboards o Mice and other pointing devices Monitors 59 880 Network adapters 9 9 Ports COM amp LPT E 2 Sound video and game controllers 84 System devices EJ Universal Serial Bus controllers y e5070bse113 Click the icon with the right button and click Property to show the detail of the status as shown in Figure 4 26 Chapter 4 229 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Opening Device Driver Property Device Manager olx Action View Emm a AGEMA R1XTEQZYU H E Agilent devices m Computer H E Disk drives E Display adapters 4 Floppy disk controllers 1 9 Floppy disk drives GPIB Interfaces Agilent
256. acy specification is not required a standard power meter can be used Chapter 1 25 ES 0 D 2 D m 5 x 5 NOTE General Information Power Meter Accuracy Test Power Meter Accuracy Test This test is intended for power meters used in testing the 5070 5071 The Dynamic Accuracy Test requires the use of a power meter that has been calibrated to a higher accuracy than the standard power meter Power meters with options G12 and H12 specify an improved instrument accuracy over a limited power range These power meters do not contain unique hardware A power meter may be returned to the factory to have one of these options added to an existing power meter or to renew the calibration for one of these options This test procedure is an alternative to returning the power meter to the factory When a power meter passes this test it is considered to be calibrated for the G12 or H12 option even though it has not been returned to the factory Power Meters That Can Be Tested Using This Procedure This procedure assume that the E4419B power meter is being tested It is recommended that the revision number for the power meter Main Firmware be Ax 03 00 or higher Equipment Used for the Power Meter Accuracy Test Equipment Type Recommended Model Alternate or Part Number Model or Part Number Range calibrator Agilent 11683A None Precision digital Agilent 3458A Any w
257. ad match Transmission tracking Reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 Record the test results in the performance test record port 1 1 2 Figure 2 62 Port 1 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 1 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 1 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Port 2 Open Open to Port 2 Port 2 Short Short to Port 2 Port 2 Load Load to Port 2 Figure 2 44 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 29 and 30 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match Transmission tracking Reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 2 Stimulus Port 1 Record the test results in the performance test record port 2 110 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Table 2 27 Test setup Select Ports settings and calibration sequence Option Select Testsetup Calibration Termination and cable connection Ports Figure for calibration 313 314 1 2 Figure 2 42 Port 1 Open Short Load and Same as Opt 213 214 N N cable Port 2 Open Short Load connected to Port 2 Refer to Step 10 through 27 for the details Figure 2 45 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 29 and 30 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match Transmission tracking Reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 1 Stimulus
258. al Prefix MY421 130 Frequency Accuracy Test edad eee he IM EY 130 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness 130 RF Output Level Linearity Test 8 1 131 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude 133 Crosstalk Test goes 134 System Dynamic Range Test 1 135 Dynamic Accuracy Test WA eA ne 136 Uncorrected System Performance 140 E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and 142 Frequency Accuracy Test sr Aig wk we aig ag TERR ONCE XD 142 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness 142 RF Output Level Linearity Test 8 1 143 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude 2 145 Crosstalk Testes dec ec E en E eee ethene ated 146 System Dynamic Range Test 2 2 147 Dynamic Accuracy Test ec bes m meto IR RR EORR oe E es 148
259. all hole of the mouse or not Verify that the mouse buttons work normally If any button doesn t work or the mouse pointer doesn t move a failure in the mouse or the A20 digital motherboard is suspected To Check the FDD Procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E5070B E5071B rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Insert a 1 44 MB floppy disk formatted in DOS format into the FDD slot Press key and click Save State in the menu bar Click File Dialog to open the Save As dialog box Select 3 1 2 Floppy A from Save in pull down menu Enter e5070b in the file name box from the keyboard Click Save button Press key and click Recall State in the menu bar 232 Chapter 4 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Click File Dialog to open the Open dialog box Select 3 1 2 Floppy A from Look in pull down menu Select e5070b file from the file menu or enter e5070b in the file name box Click Open button If the file save or recall operation fails a failure in the A28 FDD or the flat cable between the A28 and A20 digital motherboard is suspected To Check the Video output Procedure Connect an external VGA color monitor to the Video output port on the E5070B E5071B rear panel Turn the external monitor on
260. allowed An expression data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one Expression error When the expression data is put to syntactic analysis an error not corresponding to one of Error Numbers 171 through 179 occurs F Failed to configure ECal module This error occurs when the control of the ECal module fails at time of executing an ECal command SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLTn or SENS CORR OFFS COLL ECAL xxxx The failure results from the failure to connect the ECal module to the USB port failure of the ECal module etc Failed to control signal generator This error occurs when the external signal source fails to respond during measurement though it is enabled SENS OFFS LOC STAT ON and SENS OFFS LOC CONT ON Ensure the connection of the external signal source Failed to copy file This error occurs when copying a file command fails Failed to create directory 4 This error occurs when creating a directory MMEM MDIR command fails Failed to delete file This error occurs when deleting MMEM DEL command fails Failed to read file This error occurs when a 2 port touchstone file CALC FSIM SEND PMC PORT USER FIL command the formatted data array MMEM LOAD FDAT command and limit table MMEM STOR LIM command for the active trace on the active channel segment sweep table MMEM LOAD SEGM command for the active channel a VBA proj
261. alue element to which a suffix is not allowed to be attached Suffix too long The unit is too long The unit is expressed in 12 or more characters see 7 7 3 4 IEEE488 2 Sweep mode changed to stepped sweep You cannot change the sweep mode to the swept mode This error occurs when you change the sweep mode to the swept mode high speed swept mode under the conditions where the sweep type is set to power sweep power slope function is enabled ON correction coefficient is other than zero power calibration is ON frequency offset is enabled spurious avoidance of frequency offset is enabled or external signal source control is enabled Syntax error A command or data type that is not recognized exists System error One of the errors designated as system errors in this instrument has occurred 4 T Target value not found This error occurs when the target is not found during the marker search analysis after specifying the target and executing the CALC MARK FUNC EXEC and CALC FUNC EXEC commands This error occurs also when the bandwidth is not found after executing the bandwidth marker command CALC MARK BWID DATA Too many digits The number of digits of the argument of the decimal numeric value data element exceeds 255 with the preceding 0 removed see 7 7 2 4 1 488 2 Too much data The block expression or character string type program data that has been received conforms with the
262. analyzer and place the analyzer on flat table with its front panel down Remove the four bottom feet item 2 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 3 from the bottom Remove the four TORX T20 screws item 4 fastening the side strap handles Remove the four TORX T15 screws item 5 fastening the four rear foot Remove the six TORX T15 screws item 6 fastening the cover Slide up the outer cover and remove it carefully 382 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Outer Cover Removal Figure 6 1 Outer Cover Removal 2 D D 3 2 x o o D e5070bse079 Chapter 6 383 Replacement Procedure Front Panel Removal for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Front Panel Removal for E5070B JP1IKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Tools required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e flat edge screwdriver Procedure Refer to Figure 6 2 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Step 2 Release the cable item 8 from the cable clamp item 1 Step 3 Remove the top trim item 2 using a flat edge driver Step 4 Remove the eight TORX T15 screws item 3 fastening front panel Step 5 Gradually push the front panel assem
263. ance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 50 MHz Center 5 0 J Wa Frequency span 0 Hz Span 0 IF Bandwidth 10 Hz LAvg_ Enter 1 9 Source power 4 dBm Sweep Setup Enter 5 x1 Wait for the power meter reading to settle and perform zero adjustment of the power meter Dynamic accuracy tests at 10 dBm to 100dBm Press and select Log Mag from display format menu Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 1 195 Center 1 C 1 2 5 GHz Frequency span 0 Hz 9 Number of points 15 Sweep Setup J WD CY C select Points Press Marker CH gt CY 5 CY 5 CY CN CY to set Statistics function to ON Set Port Char function to OFF in accordance with the following procedure a Press 5 C gt D gt C W W Ch AW CY 5 WD select Service Menu Enter b Press 2 lt 2 lt 2 lt 2 lt gt 2 lt gt lt 2 select Service Functions Ems The E5070B E5071B will once prompt you a password entry for the access to the Service Functions Enter the password kid d Press CV C select System Calibration Enter e Press lt gt CV C select Port Char to set the Port Char to OFF Perform Return and press 4 gt select Measure SVC
264. andwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 180 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 136 3k lt 0 001 21G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 0012 6G 3k lt 0 0036 756 3k lt 0 0036 8 5G 3k lt 0 006 Crosstalk Test Direction 521 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 109 60 756 10 lt 99 7 5G 85G 10 lt 89 Direction S12 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 109 6G 7 5G 10 lt 99 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 89 Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 109 6G 7 5G 10 lt 99 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 89 Chapter 2 181 I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Lan oi Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Direction 23 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only
265. ard Boot Menu Hard Drive CD ROM Drive Network Boot LAN Enter Setup gt Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the factory recovery press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options for the E5070B E5071B Choose One of the following 1 Recover Factory Backup Image 2 Create User Backup Image 3 Recover User Backup Image P op 4 Exit 3 Enter a Choice _ I D E NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual bs distributor Appendix B 479 Step 8 Step 9 CAUTION Step 10 NOTE Step 11 Step 12 System Recovery System Recovery The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the factory recovery press EJ here You chose to Restore your system by installing the original factory installed OS and system software WARNING Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want to proceed The C Drive will be completely overwritten with no chance of recovering any data Use Option 1 to recover the system from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently deleted files on the system s primary C partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit _
266. are Standard CMOS Features Date mm dd yy Fri Sep 2 2082 Item Help Time hh mm ss 33 42 Menu Level IDE Primary Master LICZSN 1 ATDAB4 B1 IDE Primary Slave None Change the day month IDE Secondary Master None year and century IDE Secondary Slave None Drive A 1 44M 3 5 1 Drive B None Video EGR UGR 1 Halt On All But Keyboard 640K 523264K 524288 f4 Move Enter Select PU PD Value F18 Save ESC Exit 1 1 Help F5 Previous Ualues F6 Setting 1 Defaults Setting 2 Defaults Advanced BIOS Features Advanced CMOS Features options are displayed by choosing Advanced CMOS Features using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 64 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 15 If there is any difference select it using 1 and keys and change the option setting by pressing or keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press key 268 Chapter 4 Figure 4 64 Table 4 15 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 Advanced BIOS Features window and below CMOS Setup Utility Copyright 1984 2001 Award Software Advanced BIOS Features
267. are to the factory state at the time of purchase D Types of system recoveries The following 2 types of system recoveries are available Factory recovery Returns the contents of the C drive to the factory state Li User recovery 2 Returns the contents of the C drive to a user specified state To use this function you must prepare for recovery in advance For information on the preparation see Procedure to create the user backup image on page 481 or on page 484 for information on the execution see Procedure to execute the user recovery function on page 487 or on page 490 Notes on executing the factory recovery function Executing the factory recovery function causes the following In addition to the Windows operating system and the firmware the following settings of the E5070B E5071B are returned to the factory state or a user specified state e Network setting e GPIB setting Printer setting L The driver for the supported printer installed after purchase is deleted L You need to execute initial registration again Files you created using the save function files in the D drive are not affected but we recommend backing them up before executing system recovery for precautionary purposes For more information on backup refer to Making Backup Files as described in E5070B E5071B User s Guide If the hard disk failed and has been replaced after purchase the state when the replacement was per
268. asurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institution s calibration facility or to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Documentation Warranty The material contained in this document is provided as is and is subject to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent disclaims all warranties either express or implied with regard to this manual and any information contained herein including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing use or performance of this document or any information contained herein Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms the warranty terms in the separate agreement will control Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available
269. ation The Network and Dial up Connections window will appear Network and Dial up Connections window ff Network and Dial up Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help 1 gt Exaile B tk Local Area Connection Make New Connection object s 2 e5070buj039 4 Double click the Local Area Connection icon 1 in Figure D 1 in the Network and dial up connections window to enable the network connection function The Local Area Connection Status dialog box appears Click the Properties button 508 Appendix D Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check 9 o E 5 lt 2 9 Figure D 2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box Local Area Connection Status 2 xi General Connection Status Connected Duration 00 42 01 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Sent am Received c Packets 20 638 507004 040 5 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box Figure D 3 appears Select highlight Internet protocol TCP IP 1 in Figure D 3 and then click the Properties button 2 in Figure D 3 Figure D 3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box Local Area Connection Properties 12 x General Connect using Intel R PRO 100 VM Desktop Adapter Components checked are used by this connection ivi itl Cj tworks ent for Microsoft
270. ation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 213 214 E5070B 5071B D 3 5 n e5070bse016 Figure 2 20 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B e5070bse017 Chapter 2 65 Figure 2 21 e5070bse018 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 413 414 5070 5071 aa oo000 aa aannp 0000 aa 0000 Maa GY OOO 00 000 1 4 Press Preset and Enter to initialize the 5070 5071 And press Power 5 x1 to set the power 5 dBm FW 3 60 and above and press Power Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function FW 3 60 and above and press Service Menu Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function FW 3 54 and above
271. backup image press EJ here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit CAUTION Never turn off the power during the create user backup image because doing so may cause serious damage to the E5070B E5071B Step 10 The create user backup image will be complete in about 5 minutes When the create user backup image is complete the message as shown below appears Press tt and of the keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLI ALT DEL to restart your system NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 00 lt m 3 2 lt Appendix 483 System Recovery System Recovery Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above This section describes how to create the user backup image The C drive contents saved in this creation are recalled when the user recovery function is executed This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher You need the keyboard for this operation Shut down the 5070 5071 Connect the keyboa
272. ble 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D e5070bse104 Chapter 6 417 D Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Table 6 4 Step 3 Step 4 Replacement Procedure A3 Level Vernier Replacement A3 Level Vernier Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Open end wrench 5 8 inch e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in lb for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 21 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal E5070B 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Disconnect the all semi rigid cables and the termination connected to the boards referring to the figures as shown in Table 6 4 The label on the semi rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 20 on page 327 214 Figure 5 21 on page 328 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix or MY421 Figure 5 28 on page 341 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 313 Figure 5 22 on page 330 314 Figure 5 23 on page 332 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N
273. bly towards the outside Step 6 Release the mylar cable item 4 from the cable clamp item 5 Step 7 Disconnect the three cables item 6 7 and 8 from the front panel NOTE Keep the mylar cable item 4 connected 384 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Front Panel Removal for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Figure 6 2 Front Panel Removal 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D Bottom 6 e5070bse080 Chapter 6 385 Replacement Procedure Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397
274. board side on page 434 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the A4 power amp module Replacement Procedure Fasten the new amp module as shown in Figure 6 31 Replace the A4 power amp module assembly by inverse procedure of removal Confirm that the cables are connected as shown in Figure 6 30 on page 435 Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement 436 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A4 Power Amp Module Replacement Figure 6 31 A4 Power Amp Module Opt 31x 41x Replacement 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D e5070bse097 Chapter 6 437 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Replacement Procedure A10 Analog Motherboard Replacement A10 Analog Motherboard Replacement Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Open end wrench 5 16 inch and 5 8 inch e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in lb for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 32 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the front frame as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B 42301397 thru MY42324
275. cification applies to Port 1 only The levels for other ports are given as supplemental performance characteristic 40 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST Test equipment Power meter Agilent E4419A B Power sensor Agilent E4412A Procedure Step 1 Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor used Step 2 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 RF output level linearity test setup m D m 3 5 92 5070 5071 oo CIC 0000 gr 0000 aa 858 0000 Power Meter aaa WOOO Power Sensor e5070bse005 NOTE Figure 2 4 shows the test setup for the E5070B E5071B with 4 port option Opt 413 414 For 2 port and 3 port options Opt 213 214 313 314 connect the power sensor to Port 1 as well Step 3 Press Preset and Enter to initialize the E5070B E5071B And press Seep Setup Power Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function FW 3 60 and above The power range of 20 to 10 should be selected for the maximum output level Press System Servise Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function FW 3 54 and above Then set the controls as follo
276. ck My Computer icon on Windows desktop of the external PC And double click Control Panel The Control Panel window will appear In the Control Panel window double click Network The Network dialog box appears In the Configuration tab select TCP IP display it in revers video and press the Properties button The dialog box appears If Specify an IP address has been selected on Step 4 enter the IP address and sbnet mask you recorded on 3 of Step 4 If the Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected on Step 4 select the Obtain an IP address automatically Press the OK button Disable the C drive of the E5070B E5071B when you checked the C drive 1 2 Press _Save Recall_ and then press Explore The Windows Explorer opens Select highlight C and then click Properties in the File menu The C Properties dialog box Figure D 7 appears Select the Sharing tab Appendix D 515 Figure D 13 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check 4 Select the Do not share this folder and then OK button C Properties dialog box Sharing tab General Tools Hardware Sharing You can share this folder among other users on your network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder C Do not share this folder f Share this folder Share 0 4 Comment Default share User limit Maximum allowed Allow Users To set permissions for how use
277. ction Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Port 2 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 140 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Port 3 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Port 4 Options 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Chapter 2 141 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above 5070 Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Agilent Technologies E5070B RF Network Analyzer Serial Number Option Temperature Test Date Humidity R H Tested by Frequency Accuracy Test Without Option 1E5
278. d Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are presenting this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting this instrument Safety Symbol General definitions of safety symbols used on the instrument or in manuals are listed below Instruction Manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instrument manual Alternating current Direct current On Supply Off Supply In position of push button switch Out position of push button switch Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally include all exposed metal structure Stand by This warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or death to personnel This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Note denotes important information It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which is essential to highlight Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration me
279. d Insufficient ECal module memory This error occurs when the embedded memory is insufficient to save the user property in ECal module during the user definition ECal processing Invalid block data Block data has been expected but the block data that appears is invalid for some reason see 7 7 6 2 IEEE488 2 The END message is received before the length of block data has been filled for example Invalid calibration method If the type of calibration is not specified or not correct when partial overwrite is executed with the GPIB command this error occurs This error does not occur for operation with front keys Invalid character An invalid character exists in the program message character string Invalid character data An invalid character is found in the character data element or the parameter received is not valid Invalid character in number A character that is invalid for the data type subject to syntactic analysis has been received For example a letter is found in a decimal numeric value or a numeric character 9 in octal data 4 Invalid equation expression This error occurs when the invalid equation is specified in the equation of the equation editor Invalid equation label This error occurs when the invalid equation label is specified in the equation of the equation editor A space is not available for the equation label Invalid expression The expression data element
280. d Function EXECute MaxValA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 1500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 3000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValB SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA frmDynamicRangel txtVall Text frmDynamicRangel txtVal2 Text frmDynamicRangel Show ElseIf Ver E5071B Then SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 Chapter 2 CSng 20 Log10 MaxValA 0 CSng 20 Log10 MaxValB 0 ELect 79 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function TYPE MAX SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 3000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 1500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValC SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 15000000004 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 30000000003 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValD SCPI CALCulate 1 SE
281. d Removal 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D e5070bse089 NOTE Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts on page 287 for the latest cabling too Chapter 6 443 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Figure 6 35 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Replacement Procedure A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK M
282. d below Figure 4 5 represents the booting process flow in the E5070B E5071B If the E5070B E5071B stops in the booting process troubleshoot using the following step by step procedure Figure 4 5 Booting process flowchart 1 VIDEO BIOS Title Screen Splash Screen DEL Key Pressed No BIOS Setup Menu Searching for Boot Record 4 Windows Boot Screens Did it Shutdown Properly No Last Time Scan Disk Check Revision and Option Information Display 4 a 2 2 e e E5070B E5071B Measurement View E5070B E5071B Power On Self Test e5070bse141 Chapter 4 207 Step 1 NOTE Figure 4 6 Step 2 NOTE Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Video BIOS booting Video BIOS title screen shown in Figure 4 6 is displayed first when the E5070B E5071B is turned on If this screen doesn t appear nothing appears go to No Display troubleshooting on page 204 If the power shutdown occurs without a beep the problem seems in the A21 or the A20 board Check BIOS status of A20 is correct as described in Configure the Motherboard on page 262 Before replacing the board check if the jumper setting on the A20 is correct as described in Configure the Motherboard on page 262 Video BIOS title screen Video BIOS Version 2 8 8 DECOMPILATION OR DISASSEMBLY PROHIBITED
283. d in the marker search analysis Phase lock loop unlocked This error occurs when the PLL circuit of this instrument becomes unlocked while the measurement is in progress The measurement value is not correct This error may occur when an external reference out of specification is connected to this instrument Should an error occur with an external reference not connected this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument Port 1 receiver overload The input to Test Port 1 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When a DUT is an amplifier or the like this error may occur damaging the receiver in the worst case Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or with nothing connected to the test port this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument Appendix F 529 222 223 224 73 241 61 Messages Port 2 receiver overload If this error occurs the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off Port 2 receiver overload The input to Test Port 2 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When a DUT is an amplifier or the like this error may occur damaging the receiver in the worst case Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or with nothing connected to the test port this instrument
284. d or inadvertently deleted files on the system s primary C partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit _ The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard to start the user recovery If you want to cancel the user recovery press here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause serious damage to the E5070B E5071B The user recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes When the user recovery is complete the message as shown below appears Press ct Att and Delete of the keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLT ALT DEL to restart your system If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 492 Appendix B System Recovery Initial Registration of E5070B E5071B Initial Registration of E5070B E5071B When you start up the E5070B E5071B for the first time or after executing system recovery you need to perform the initial registration of the Windows 2000 operating system of the E5070B E5071B NOTE You cannot use the front panel keys during the initial registration
285. d the IP address and subnet mask on the 6 of Step 1 1 Press key 2 Press Misc Setup Network Setup Network Configuration 3 Double click the Local Area Connection icon 1 in Figure D 1 in the Network and Dial up Connections window The Local Area Connection Status dialog box Figure D 2 appears Click the Properties button 2 in Figure D 2 4 The dialog box Figure D 12 appears Select Obtain an IP address automatically and 514 Appendix D Figure D 12 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check press the OK button Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties BE 9 o E 5 lt 2 9 General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server i Alternate DNS server 5070 062 In the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog vbox click the OK button 6 in Figure D 4 In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box click the OK button 3 in Figure D 3 The Local Network dialog box will appear press the Yes button to restart the instrument Step 8 Change the IP address and subnet mask of the external PC Step 9 1 5 Double cli
286. d wrench 9 16 e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in lb for reconnecting SMA connector File Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 46 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Remove the trim from the right side of the front panel Remove the TORX T15 screw item 1 fastening the N connector holder from the right side Remove the two TORX T15 screws item 2 from the bottom Disconnect the semi rigid cables from the N connector refer to the figure as shown in Table 6 6 The label on the semi rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 20 on page 327 214 Figure 5 21 on page 328 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 28 on page 341 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 313 Figure 5 22 on page 330 314 Figure 5 23 on page 332 for E5070B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 for E5071B with S N prefix or MY421 Figure 5 29 on page 342 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above 413 Figure 5 24 on page 334 462 Chapter 6
287. data Use Option 1 to recover the system from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently deleted files on the system s primary C partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit _ The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard to start the factory recovery If you want to cancel the factory recovery press E here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit _ Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause serious damage to the 5070 5071 The factory recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes When the factory recovery is complete the message as shown below appears Press At and Delete of the keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLI ALT DEL to restart your system If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor After restart the screen for initial registration appears Execute initial registration For information on the execution procedure refer to Initial Registration of 5070 5071 on page 493 For the E5070B E5071B equipped with the Option 016 touch screen execut
288. dure Front Panel Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Front Panel Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Tools required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 e flat edge screwdriver Procedure Refer to Figure 6 4 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Step 2 Release the cable item 8 from the cable clamp item 1 Step 3 Remove the top trim item 2 using a flat edge driver Step 4 Remove the eight TORX T15 screws item 3 fastening front panel Step 5 Gradually push the front panel assembly towards the outside Step 6 Release the mylar cable item 4 from the cable clamp item 5 Step 7 Disconnect the three cables item 6 7 and 8 from the front panel NOTE Keep the mylar cable item 4 connected The mylar cable and its connector are very fragile It s recommended that you should replace the mylar cable when the cable is disconnected and reconnected frequently 388 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Front Panel Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Figure 6 4 Front Panel Removal 2 D D 3 2 Ld U E o
289. e Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor used Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 3 Chapter 2 37 Figure 2 3 Performance Tests 2 RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST RF output level accuracy and flatness test setup 5070 5071 aaono oo e 0000 a So a Power Meter lt coo oo oa aan QO OOC OO e5070bse005 NOTE Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 kd Power Sensor Figure 2 3 shows the test setup for the E5070B E5071B with 4 port option Opt 413 414 For 2 port and 3 port options Opt 213 214 313 314 connect the power sensor to Port 1 as well Press Preset and Enter to initialize the E5070B E5071B And press Sveep Setup Power Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function FW 3 60 and above and press Servise Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function FW 3 54 and above Then set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 50 MHz Center 8 0 Wx Frequency span 0 Hz 9 The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value Press C and to make a Single sweep measurement RF output level accuracy test a Wait for power meter reading to settle b Record the power meter reading in
290. e Connect an type N Short termination to the specified test port f Click OK button to continue the test and wait until LOAD dialog box opens 252 Chapter 4 Figure 4 55 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Connect a 50 Load termination to the specified test port Click OK button to continue the test and wait for a few seconds i Repeat step form c to h for all of the selected test ports j When the tests are completed the Error Term dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 55 Error Term test results example E5071B lt 1 5GHz lt 8 56 2 Port 1 Source Match Pass Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass Pass Refl Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Port2 Source Match Pass Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass Pass Refl Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Port 3 Source Match Pass Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass Pass Refl Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Port 4 Source Match Pass Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass Pass Refl Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Select All Select None Exit e5070bse134 k Ifatleast one of the Error Term tests failed refer to Table 4 11 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information 1 return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 7 Handler I O Board tests These tests check the function of Handler I O board for interfacing with an external component handl
291. e E5071B S N MY42402455 and Lee eats HEL eee ha n e E E Ies 454 Tools Required os o eee Re eec t dte Rc o RR CE RO 454 Removal Procedure Losses bet 454 Replacement Procedure c perce Rug ea eee 454 51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY42300632 thru MY4231100 5071 S N prefix JPIKK MY42301397 thru 4232454 456 18 LLeeertuererideee D eect ho _ _ 456 Removal Procedure SE Aha GS Dp ep RU pr eke eg 456 Replacement Proced re iss sek nee ees Hine ee ee HACERTE Ex die ere et 456 A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and 458 Tools Required sity sak keg SSA a ha 458 Removal Procedure xcu eee ee ee ens eye E dre ds 458 Replacement Procedure pil Rud pa Coe Re RU ev RR RR RR e edd 458 LCD Backlight Replacement 1 4 4 0 460 Tools Required site Jos thee ae eck eee en Ghee URINE RR 460 Removal Procedure tegeret See ee OE Se ee 460 Replacement Procedure 55 ed Ss artes UE E RES 460 5 Crystal Oven Board Opt 1E5
292. e 4 11 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 4 Dynamic Range tests These tests check the dynamic range of test channel receiver for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Type N coaxial Short termination 4 ea part of 85032F 85054D or part of 85033E 85050D with Type N adapter Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 E a 2 2 e e a Click Test button in the right of Dynamic Range in the window to open the Dynamic Range window The window displays the S parameters and frequency as the test points The results are displayed as matrix Figure 4 47 Chapter 4 247 Figure 4 47 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Dynamic Range tests dialog box example 5071 Opt 413 414 Dynamic Range x lt 1 5GHz 8 5GHz 512 Not Done Not Done Not Done Mot Done 521 Not Not Done Not Done Not Done 513 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 523 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 531 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 532 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 514 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 534 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 541 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 543 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Select All Select None Exit
293. e HHH 47 VDET 300kHz ALC Loop TH 48 VDET 10MHz ALC Loop TH 49 VDET 1GHz ALC Loop TH 50 VDET 8 5GHz ALC Loop 224 Chapter 4 Table 4 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test No Test group First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly Al Src A3 Lvl Vern A4 Amp Mod A6 Sw T ctrl A2 Receiver A7 Att 15 17 51 52 33 54 55 56 97 58 59 60 61 62 Power Gain Al and A2 S11 50MHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 1 TH THE T TH T SI11 3GHz S11 6GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 1 Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 1 E5071B THE THE TH THE TH T THE T THE T S22 50MHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 2 THE THE T TH T S22 3GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 2 THE THE T THE T S22 6GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 2 E5071B THE THE T THE T S33 50MHz S33 3GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 414 Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for port 3 Opt 313 3
294. e Noise NotDone Test Error Term NotDone Test Handler I O Board NotDone Test Copyright c 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc e5070bse118 Step 11 To perform the individual tests in each test group refer to the procedure described below Step 12 To end the external test click Exit button in the dialog box 1 Tch Power Gain tests These tests check the source output power along with the test channel receiver gain for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in N6314A Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in the right of Tch Power Gain in the window to open the Tch Power Gain window The window displays the S parameters and frequencies as the test points Their results are displayed in the matrix Figure 4 37 Figure 4 37 Tch Power Gain tests dialog box example E5071B Opt 413 414 512 NotDone NotDone Not Done PN e 47 gt O e 3 521 NotDone Not Done Not Done 531 NotDone Not Done Not Done v 541 NotDone Not Done Select All Select None Exit e5070bse119 b Select the S parameter for the test by clicking the check boxes Click the Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 38 Follow the instruction Chapter 4 241 Troubleshooting Tro
295. e The 3 5 inch floppy disk drive on the front panelis Refer to To Check the used to save the E5070B E5071B setup state and measurement data in a 3 5 inch 1 4 MB floppy disk in MS DOS compatible format An external color monitor can be used to display the same information as the E5070B E5071B LCD display when it is connected to the Video output connector 24 pin D Sub on the rear panel FDD on page 232 E a 2 2 e e Refer to To Check the Video output on page 233 External trigger input The external trigger input terminal BNC on the rear panel allows an external trigger source to be used for measurement trigger Refer to To Check the External Trigger Input on page 233 Chapter 4 227 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Table 4 2 Major functions and troubleshooting procedures Function Description Troubleshooting LAN port The LAN interface port on the rear panel allows Refer to To Check the the E5070B E5071B to be connected to 10 100 Base T Ethernet LAN on page 233 Printer parallel port A specified printer can be used to print the E5070B E5071B measurement display setup display and others when it is connected to the Printer port 36 pin D Sub on the rear panel Refer to To Check the Printer Parallel Port on page 237 GPIB interface The GPIB compatibility allows the E5070B E5071B t
296. e all cables from the board Remove two TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the board Remove the board Replacement Procedure Replace the B1 fun amp switch control board by inverse procedure of removal Connect the cables as Figure 6 22 420 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure B1 Fan amp A6 Switch Control Board Replacement Figure 6 22 B1 Fan amp A6 Switch Control Board Removal 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D Yellow 8 Orange Opt 31 41 fo Red Opt31x 41 x E Brown El o e5070bse090 Chapter 6 421 Replacement Procedure B1 Fan Replacement B1 Fan Replacement There are three fans as shown in Figure 6 23 Figure 6 23 The location and direction of the fan 1 fan 2 and fan 3 e5070bse091 422 Chapter 6 Figure 6 24 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Replacement Procedure B1 Fan Replacement Fan 1 and 2 Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e A fine stick such as Hex key 1 5 mm D 2 D D 3 a x Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 24 for this procedure Rem
297. e and Exit B 5052 103 E D Step 6 The BIOS setup utility has primary menus most of which have sub menus Brief descriptions and reference pages for these menus are provided in Table 4 22 The details of amp s D i the BIOS option settings in each menu and sub menus are described on the page listed in Step 7 Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit System Time 09 00 00 Item Specific Help System Date 01 20 01 CPU Type Pentium R III lt Tab gt lt Shift Tab gt or CPU Speed 1000 MHz lt Enter gt selects field System Memory 640 Extended Memory 509 MB Date is in US format Legacy Diskette A 1 44 1 25MB 3 ie mm dd yyyy Legacy Diskette B Disabled gt Primary Master 82843MB gt Primary Slave None Secondary Master en Secondary Slave None Keyboard Features Help tL Select Item l Change Values F9 Setup Defaults the table Select a desired menu using keys Select an item in the menu or sub menu window using keys To perform an operation use key NOTE If you want to exit the BIOS option setting and exit the BIOS setup utility without saving changes in the setup select Exit Discarding Changes and press key at the Exit Menu Chapter 4 281 Table 4 22 NOTE Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above BIOS setup utility primar
298. e the calibration of the touch screen For information on the execution procedure refer to 00 lt m 3 2 lt Calibration of Touch Screen on page 496 Appendix B 477 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 System Recovery System Recovery Procedure to execute the factory recovery for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above You need the keyboard for this operation Shut down the E5070B E5071B Connect the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B Insert the disk for the system recovery which is furnished with the E5070B E5071B into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B E5071B Press the standby switch of the E5070B E5071B to turn it on When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold EJ of the keyboard until this screen disappears 4 Agilent Technologies starting use ol gg 5 T E 4221 e5061buj034 NOTE After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 478 Appendix B System Recovery System Recovery Step 6 The following screen appears Select Removable Devices with of the keyboard and press of the keybo
299. eable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Table 5 18 Front View Analog Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 See service note 1 A4 POWER AMP MODULE Opt 31x 41x 2 1 A4 POWER MODULE Opt 213 214 2 See Table 5 41 1 A8 RF SWITCH ASSEMBLY 3 See Table 5 47 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD 4 See Table 5 47 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD Opt 31x 41x 5 5071 61003 9 1 LEVEL VERNIER 6 5087 7137 7 1 A8 RF SWITCH SPDT Opt 31x 41x 7 5071 66571 2 1 Al SOURCE BOARD 5071 69571 8 1 1 SOURCE BOARD Exchange 8 See Table 5 43 1 STEP ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY Opt 214 314 414 e 2 oO n Chapter 5 325 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and 421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Front View Miscellaneous Parts Figure 5 19 Front View Miscellaneous Parts e5070bse072 _____ ___11 Hi el DS 1 ay Table 5 19 Front View Miscellaneous Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 PN T10 2 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 3 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 4 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO Opt 31x 41x 5 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 6 05
300. ecord Test result column for the level flatness test Chapter 2 39 Performance Tests 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST Description This test checks the level accuracy of the E5070B E507 1B test port output signal across the specified level range The RF output level is measured for power level settings of 15 dBm to 10 dBm 8 dBm or 6 dBm in 1 dB step increments at 1OMHz 3 GHz 4 25 GHz 6 GHz and 8 5 GHz as serial number prefix is MY421 or JPIKK RF output level is measured for power level settings of 15 dBm to 10 dBm 9 dBm 7 dBm or 5 dBm in dB step increments at 0 3 GHz 4 25 GHz 6 GHz and 8 5 GHz as serial number prefix is MY422 and above Specification Serial Number Prefix MY421 or JPIKK E5070B lt 0 75 dB 23 5 C 10 MHz to 3 GHz 15 dBm to 10 dBm 5071 lt 0 75 dB 23 5 10 MHz to 4 25 GHz 15 dBm to 10 dBm 0 75 dB 23 5 4 25 GHz to 6 GHz 15 dBm to 8 dBm lt 0 75 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 8 5 GHz 15 dBm to 6 dBm Serial Number Prefix MY422 and above E5070B lt 0 75 dB 23 5 C 10 MHz to 3 GHz 15 dBm to 10 dBm E5071B lt 0 75 dB 23 5 C 10 MHz to 3 GHz 15 dBm to 10 dBm 0 75 dB 23 5 C 3 GHz to 4 25 GHz 15 dBm to 9 dBm lt 0 75 dB 23 5 4 25 GHz to 6 GHz 15 dBm to 7 dBm lt 0 75 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 8 5 GHz 15 dBm to 5 dBm NOTE The level linearity spe
301. ect file MMEM LOAD PROG command etc cannot be read normally Failed to write file This error occurs when the formatted data array MMEM STOR FDATcommand and limit table MMEM STOR LIM command for the active trace on the active channel segment sweep table MMEM STOR SEGM command for the active channel display image MMEM STOR IMAG command for the LCD screen a VBA project file MMEM STOR PROG command etc cannot be written normally File name error A file name error This message appears when an error exists in the file name and hence a command is not executed correctly This error occurs when you try to copy to an unsuitable file name for example Appendix F 525 256 107 56 24 25 62 105 114 224 282 Messages File name not found File name not found The file name specified is not found and hence the command is not executed correctly This error occurs when you try to read a file that does not exist in a disk or a disk is not correctly inserted into the drive to read or write a file for example File transfer failed This error occurs when writing data into or reading data from a command fails Fixture Simulator not allowed This error occurs when the fixture simulator is executed CALC FSIM STAT ON under the condition of the frequency offset is enabled SENS OFFS ON The fixture simulator is allowed to use when the frequency offset is not enabled Fr
302. ed Initializing If the display whited out entirely blued or appeared with a dialog box a mass storage problem is suspected Try to perform the mass storage recovery procedure If a message of Will Shut Down in Five Seconds is displayed in place of Initializing and the shutdown occurs the A21 board fails in starting up The following message may be displayed before the shutdown occurs Fatal Error Failed to Initialize DSP Driver or Fatal Error Failed to Initialize DSP This message indicates that the A21 board doesn t work or is not properly connected to the A20 Fatal Error Failed to Update DSP Code 212 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below If this happened the A21 board failed in writing DSP program into flash ROM when the firmware was installed first or updated to the newest version A problem in the A21 or A20 is suspected Step 6 Measurement view The measurement view as shown in Figure 4 12 is displayed after the system initialization is completed without problem Figure 4 12 Measurement view 1 Active Ch Trace 2Response 3 Stimulus 4Mkr Analysis 5 Instr State a Log Mag 10 00dB Ref 0 000de 5071 Menu a I Measurement 511 Format Log Mag 6 Calibration Sweep Setup 1 Start 300 kHz IFBW 70 kHz 2002 09
303. ed when another error against a red background has already been displayed in the instrument message Warning area The warning messages for this instrument are as follows Auto port extension not allowed This message appears when you try to execute the auto port extension when the sweep type is the power sweep or the frequency offset function is ON If this message is displayed the auto port extension is not available Calibration extrapolated The frequency range that can be calibrated with the ECal module is exceeded In this case the calibration data for the minimum frequency or maximum frequency are used instead of the data exceeding the allowable frequency range for calibration Fixture simulator not allowed This message appears when enabling the frequency offset while the fixture simulator function is turned on If this message is displayed the fixture simulator function is automatically turned off Log sweep requires 2 octave minimum span If you change the sweep range that does not satisfy the necessary condition of the frequency span the stop frequency is about 4 times or more of the start frequency when the sweep type is set to the log sweep this message is displayed If this message is displayed the sweep type is automatically set to the linear sweep For example if you attempt to change the log type to the log sweep when the start frequency is set to 1 MHz and the stop frequency to 2 MHz this error occurs Set t
304. edures described below The major functions of the E5070B E5071B and the troubleshooting procedure for each function are shown in Table 4 2 Major functions and troubleshooting procedures Function Front panel keys Description All the E5070B E5071B functions except for VBA and service functions can be set and controlled via the front panel keys Troubleshooting Refer to To Check the Front Panel on page 230 Video output Touch panel The E5070B E5071B equipped with option 016 Refer to To Check the has a touch screen display that allows all the Touch Panel Option 016 functions in the menu bars setup windows and only on page 231 dialog boxes to be set by a touch to the screen panel LCD display Almost all the information including the Refer to To Check the measurement value setup state result data LCD on page 231 processing menu bar softkey label and others are indicated on the 10 4 inch color LCD display External keyboard The external keyboard can be used for the entry of Refer to To Check the numerical and character data when itis connected External Keyboard on to the keyboard interface connector PS 2 on the page 232 rear panel Mouse The mouse can be used to move the pointer on the Refer to To Check the LCD display select a function and change a Mouse on page 232 setting when it is connected to the mouse interface connector PS 2 on the rear panel Floppy disk driv
305. een is displayed if you want to run the BIOS setup utility push F2 key as soon as in the screen Splash Screen Agilent Technologies 5061 049 Windows boot screens The Windows boot screens are displayed The Windows boot screens consists of two screens Each screen is displayed in the order as shown in Figure 4 15 If the Windows boot screens are displayed it is assumed that the A27 HDD works While the Window screens are displayed Windows operating system is starting up PN o gt 4 215 Figure 4 15 NOTE NOTE Step 3 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Windows boot screens Windows 2000 Dui ec NT Thesen e5061ase051 If you encounter the following problems try to reinstall the operating system before replacing the A27 xxx file is missing is displayed on DOS screen Window boot screen is not displayed after the splash screen is displayed Windows always boots up with Safe Mode If the E5070B E5071B was turned off without shutdown process Microsoft Scandisk runs while the windows boot screens are displayed If a serious problem is found in the scandisk reinstall the operating system For details of the operating system installation refer to Appendix B System Recovery on page 473 If the operating system still
306. efaults Setting 2 Defaults Disabled User Define DPMS Yes Stop Grant 15 Min Instant Off Disabled Disabled 50 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Table 4 18 gt Secondary IDE 1 Disabled gt FDD LPT Port Disabled gt PCI PIRQ A D Disabled 1 The setting is different from that of Load Setting 2 Defaults on page 266 NOTE gt means sub menu PnP PCI Configurations PnP PCI Configurations options are displayed by choosing PnP PCI Configurations using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 68 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 19 If there is any difference select it using and keys and change the option setting by pressing or 22 keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press Figure 4 68 PnP PCI Configurations window CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2001 Award Software PnP PCI Configurations Reset Configuration Data Disabled Item Help Resources Controlled Auto ESCD 1 Menu Level gt I Resources Press Enter Default is Disabled Select Enabled to
307. efix or MY421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421 Opt 214 314 414 Figure 5 43 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY421 E5071B serial prefix JPIKK or MY421 Opt 214 314 414 e5070ase059 Table 5 43 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix or MY 421 E5071B serial prefix JPIKK or MY421 Opt 214 314 414 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 See service note 8 1 7 SOURCE STEP ATTENUATOR E5071B 12C 2 E5070 01213 6 1 PLATE 3 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO e 2 D ud D m 7 Chapter 5 359 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Opt 214 Figure 5 44 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Opt 214 e5070ase059 Table 5 44 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Opt 214 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 See service note 8 1 A7 SOURCE STEP ATTENUATOR E5071B 12C 2 E5070 01213 6 1 PLATE 3 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 360 Chapter5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others 7 Source Step Attenuator Ass
308. efix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Uncorrected System Performance Test Correction Off System Correction On v Port 1 e 5 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB E performance D Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 8 Directivity 3G 6G lt 20 Directivity 6G 8 5G lt 15 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3G 6G lt 20 Source match 6G 8 5G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 8 5G lt 10 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 3G 6G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 6G 85G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 3G 6G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 6 G 8 5 G 1 0 Port 2 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Directivity 3G 6G lt 20 Chapter 2 189 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 6G 85G lt 15 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3G 6G lt 20 Source match 6G 8 5 G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12
309. em 1 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 2 fastening the angle Lift the angle with the removable hard disk assembly Lift the angle with the removable hard disk assembly slowly to prevent tension from cables Remove three TORX T10 screws item 3 and remove the removable hard disk assembly from the angle Disconnect the cable item 4 connected to the power supply Disconnect the cable item 5 connected to the crystal oven board Disconnect the flat cable item 6 connected to the mother board Replacement Procedure Replace the removable hard disk assembly by inverse procedure of removal 396 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Figure 6 10 Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal 2 D Q D 3 2 U E o 5070 4007 6 397 Replacement Procedure A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Replacement A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal procedure Refer to Figure 6 11 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Step 2 Remove the clamp item 1 from the angle Step 3 Disconnect the cable item 2 connected from the power supply Step 4 Remove three TORX T10 screws item 3 Step 5 Slide the A28 FDD assembly backward C
310. embly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Opt 314 414 Figure 5 45 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Opt 314 414 e5070bse3012 Table 5 45 7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 above E5071B serial prefix MY 422 and above Opt 314 414 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 See service note 8 1 7 SOURCE STEP ATTENUATOR E5071B 12C 2 E5070 01214 6 1 PLATE 3 0515 0372 2 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 e 2 oO n Chapter 5 361 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others A6 RF Switch Tempereature Controller Assembly Figure 5 46 A6 RF Switch Temperature Controller Assembly e5070bse076 Table 5 46 A6 RF Switch Temperature Controller Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 66586 2 1 A6 RF SWITCH TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 2 E5070 01266 9 1 BRACKET 3 0515 1946 8 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 Chapter 5 362 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others A2 Receiver Board Assembly Figure 5 47 A2 Receiver Board Assembly 5070 060 5 47 2 Receiver Board Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5071 61015 2 1 15 RECEIVER RF BOARD
311. ent setup states are displayed as shown in Figure 4 77 Select Installed OS using keys and change the setting to Plug and Play by pressing z keys Next step as select Enable ACPI using keys and change the setting to No by pressing z keys And then return to Advanced Menu as shown in Figure 4 75 284 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Figure 4 77 Advanced OS Options Sub menu 5 Setup Specific Help Advarced OS Options Installed OS Plug and Play Enable ACPI No Reset Configuration Data Secure Setup Configuration No F1 1 Select Item Change Values F9 X Setup Defauts ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Ext 6506 1259055 Boot Menu The Boot Menu shown below is displayed by choosing Boot using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu The current setup states are displayed as shown in Figure 4 78 If the setup is incorrect select it using keys and change the setting by pressing keys If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press le key Figure 4 78 Boot Menu Boo Order Her Specific Help Hard Drive Removable Devices CD ROM Drive Network Boot LAN l indicates disabled device 9500199096 Chapter 4 Keys used to view
312. ent type of the parameter specified in the read write command of the calibration coefficient SENS CORR COEF is invalid for the calibration type selected by the calibration type selection command SENS CORR COEF METH xxxx This error is not generated by front key operations Specified ports overlapped This error occurs when a port number is duplicated in a command requiring two or more port numbers as parameters Such commands are for example CALC FSIM BAL TOP SSB PPOR 1 2 3 3 Specify port setup correctly to avoid duplication of ports This error is not generated by front key operations Specified trace dose not exist This error occurs when CALC PAR SEL command is executed to activate more traces than specified by CALC PAR COUN command This error is not generated by front key operations Standard not selected This error occurs when you execute the measurement under the condition that the standard is not selected for the subclass the standard number is set to 0 String data error When a character string data element is put to syntactic analysis an error not corresponding to one of Error Numbers 151 through 159 occurs 532 Appendix F 158 138 134 55 102 310 40 124 223 Messages String data not allowed String data not allowed A character string data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one Suffix not allowed A suffix is attached to a numeric v
313. enter listed at the end of this manual or distributor 490 Appendix B System Recovery System Recovery Step 6 The following screen appears Select Removable Devices with of the keyboard and press of the keyboard Boot Menu Hard Drive CD ROM Drive Network Boot LAN Enter Setup gt Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the user recovery press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options for the E5070 71B Choose One of the following 1 Recover Factory Backup Image 2 Create User Backup Image 3 Recover User Backup Image a 4 Exit D D Enter a Choice _ lt If the above message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor Appendix B 491 Step 8 Step 9 CAUTION Step 10 NOTE System Recovery System Recovery The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the user recovery press EJ here You chose to recover your own system backup image file WARNING Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want to proceed The C partition will be completely overwritten with no chance of recovering any data Use Option 3 to recover the system from a serious malfunction caused by corrupte
314. equency offset enabled This error occurs when the normal calibration SENS CORR COLL OPEN etc is performed under the condition of the frequency offset is enabled SENS OFFS ON Frequency offset not enabled This error occurs when the scalar mixer calibration SENS CORR OFFS COLL OPEN etc is performed under the condition of the frequency offset is not enabled SENS OFFS OFF Frequency out of range This error occurs when the setting of frequency exceeds output frequency range under the condition of the frequency offset is enabled SENS OFFS ON G GET not allowed A group execution trigger GET has been received in the program message see 7 7 488 2 Header suffix out of range The unit of the header is outside the range The header is invalid in the unit for numeric parameters following a SCPI command I Illegal parameter value The parameter value is not suitable This error occurs when the CALC PAR DEF command is used to specify an S parameter that does not exist in the model S44 in the case of a 2 port model for example Illegal program name This error occurs when a nonexistent VBA program name is specified by the PROG SEL NAME command 526 Appendix F 213 35 161 28 101 141 121 500 501 171 103 151 Messages Init ignored Init ignored Because another measurement is in progress the request for initiating a measurement INIT command is ignore
315. er tel 1 877 894 4414 fax 1 888 900 8921 China tel 800 810 0189 fax 800 820 2816 Europe tel 31 20 547 2323 fax 31 20 547 2390 Japan Call Center tel 0120 421 345 tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Korea tel 82 2 2004 5004 fax 82 2 2004 5115 Latin America tel 305 269 7500 fax 305 269 7599 Taiwan tel 0800 047 866 fax 0800 286 331 Australia New Zealand tel 61 3 9210 5555 Australia fax 61 3 9210 5899 tel 64 4 939 0636 New Zealand fax 64 4 972 5364 Asia Pacific tel 65 6375 8100 fax 65 6836 0252 Email tm_asia agilent com
316. er The tests are performed using a handler I O test kit as a substitute for the handler Required equipment PN Description Recommended model 5 Handler I O test kit E5070 65001 S Procedure 3 Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Handler I O Board in the pull down menu of the Test List box b Click Test button in the dialog box Then Handler I O Board tests dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 56 Chapter 4 253 Figure 4 56 Figure 4 57 NOTE Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Handler I O Board tests dialog box Not Done Exit 5070 135 Click the Test button in the dialog box message of Connect Handler I O Test Kit will be displayed Connect the handler I O test kit to the Handler I O connector on the rear panel Click OK button dialog box displays Now testing while the Handler I O Board test is in progress RE When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail of test result as shown in Figure 4 57 Handler I O Board test result example aan Start Test e5070bse136 g Ifthe Handler I O Board test failed refer to Table 4 11 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information h To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button To end the external test click Exit button in the External Test
317. eral Information Required Equipment Required Equipment Table 1 1 lists the recommended equipment for performing maintenance on the 5070 5071 Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Critical specifications Recommended Model Qty Use Frequency Counter Frequency 50 MHz to 3 GHz Agilent 53181A with 1 RA 2 Accuracy lt 2 5 ppm Opt 010 amp 030 Frequency Standard Frequency 10 MHz Time Base Agilent 5071A 1 A Error lt 1x 107 year Power Meter No Substitute Agilent 4419 3 or 1 4418 Power Sensor No Substitute Agilent 8482A 1 Power Sensor No Substitute Agilent E4412A 1 PA Dynamic Accuracy No substitute Agilent Z5623A with Opt 1 Test Kit H01 Calibration Kit No Substitute Agilent 85032F 1 Short Type N m part of Agilent 4 85032F 54D 33E S0D with Type N adapter Load Type N m part of Agilent 2 P 85032F 54D 33E S0D with Type N adapter Fixed attenuator 6 50 O N m N f VSWR x 1 015 Agilent 8491A w Opt 006 1 dB and H60 Fixed attenuator 10 50 N m N f Agilent 8491 A B C 1 T dB Handler I O Test Kit No substitute Agilent p n E5070 65001 1 T Cable BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm Agilent p n 8120 1839 1 Coaxial cable with Type N Agilent N6314A p n 1 connectors 61 cm 24 in 2 ea 8120 8862 Adapter N m BNC f Adapter Agilent p n 1250 0780 1 Torque Wrench Size 3 4 inch Agilent p n 8710 1766 1 To
318. ermometer on Al HHH 25 A1 PLL FVT 2 80000GHz Fixed synthesizer on Al 26 FVT 2 84375GHz Fixed synthesizer on Al 27 SVT 2 11GHz Source swept synthe Al 28 LVT 2 11GHz Local swept synthe Al 29 SVT 4 25GHz Source swept synthe Al 30 LVT 4 25GHz Local swept synthe on Al Chapter 4 223 4 a 2 2 e e Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Table 4 1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test Test First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly No group Al A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver 7 Sre Lvl Amp Sw T Att Vern Mod ctrl A15 17 31 Al ALC SAV DAC100 Source level control on Al 32 SAV DAC2000 Source level control on Al 33 SOP f 300k Source ALC on Al 34 LOP f 300k Local ALC on Al TH 35 SOP f 1 3G Source ALC on Al HHH 36 LOP f 1 3G Local ALC on A1 37 SOP f 1 31G Source ALC on Al THE 38 LOP f 1 31G Local ALC on Al HE 39 SOP f 2 1G Source ALC on Al HHH 40 LOP f 2 1G Local ALC on A1 HHH 41 SOP f 2 11G Source ALC on A1 42 LOP f 2 11G Local ALC on Al TH 43 SOP f 4 25G Source ALC on Al HE 44 LOP f 4 25G Local ALC on Al Hit 45 A3 DC VTEMP Thermometer on A3 HHH 46 VCNTL ATT Control Voltag
319. est name Objective of the test Connect an N Sweep freq span IFBW cable between Nop and RF power settings Automatic S12 Receiver linearity for Port 1 Port 1 and Port 2 Full span 10 KHz BW 201 max source power and 10 dBm below max 521 Receiver linearity for Port 2 Port 1 and Port 2 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 max source power and 10 dBm below max 531 Receiver linearity for Port 3 Port 1 and Port 3 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 Opt 313 314 413 414 max source power and 10 dBm below max S41 Receiver linearity for Port4 Port 1 and Port 4 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 Opt 413 414 max source power and 10 dBm below max 246 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Receiver Linearity tests are in progress e When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 46 Figure 4 46 Receiver Linearity test results example E5070B E5071B Opt 413 414 512 Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass 521 Mag Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass 531 Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass 541 Mag Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse125 f If at least one of the Receiver Linearity tests failed refer to Tabl
320. eyboard and press of the keyboard Boot Menu Select a irst device 15120 HDD 0 SCRI CDROM HDD 1 HDD 2 HDD 3 ZIP100 USB FDD USB ZIP USB CDROM USB HDD LAN 11 Move ENTER Accept F4 Exit e5070buj035 Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the create user backup image press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options for the E5070 71B Choose One of the following Recover Factory Backup Image Create User Backup Image Recover User Backup Image WN np Exit Enter a Choice _ NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 482 Appendix B System Recovery System Recovery Step 8 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the create user backup image press here You chose to create a backup image file of your system The system will perform a quick integrity check of the file structure on the C Drive It will then copy the C partition to an image file and store it on the System Recovery partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit Step 9 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard to start the create user backup image If you want to cancel the create user
321. fastening the fan Replacement Procedure Fasten the new fan to the fan assembly Replace the fan assembly by inverse procedure of removal Fasten the fan in the direction as shown in Figure 6 23 424 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure B1 Fan Replacement Figure 6 25 Fan 3 Removal D D D o D O e E v E o D e5070bse093 Chapter 6 425 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Replacement Procedure A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK or MY421 E5071B S N prefix JP1KK or MY421 Option 214 314 and 414 A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix MY421 E5071B S N prefix or MY421 Option 214 314 and 414 Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in lb for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 26 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx 42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42
322. for E5071B with S N prefix JPIKK or MY421 Figure 5 30 on page 344 for E5070B with S N prefix MY422 and above for E5071B with S N prefix MY422 and above Remove the all TORX T10 screws fastening the extractor item 1 414 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A2 Receiver Board Replacement Step 5 Slide the receiver module using the extractor NOTE Slide the two board at once if two A2 receiver boards are slotted D D 5 Q D U Replacement Procedure Step 1 Replace the A2 receiver boards by inverse procedure of removal NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement Figure 6 19 A2 Receiver Removal e5070bse103 Chapter 6 415 Step 1 Step 2 Step 1 Step 2 Replacement Procedure A2 Receiver Board Replacement Module Disassemble Procedure Skip this procedure if the option 213 or 214 is installed Refer to Figure 6 20 for this procedure Remove the eight TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the A2 receiver boards Separate the two 2 receiver boards Board Disassemble Procedure Refer to Figure 6 20 for this procedure Remove the seven T15 screws item 2 fastening the 15 Receiver RF board item 3 and the 17 Receiver IF board item 4 Separate the two boards 416 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A2 Receiver Board Replacement Figure 6 20 Receiver Disassem
323. for replacing an assembly in a E5070B E5071B RF Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to This chapter and Chapter 7 Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustment 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 Performance Tests WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from its power supply CAUTION Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap 380 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Required Tools Required Tools The following tools are required for repair of E5070B E507 1B Table 6 1 Required Tools 20 D U O D Q Assembly TORX screwdriver flat edge torque cutting file hex key open wrench open torque screwdriver screwdriver plier wrench TORX
324. formance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Description This test checks the system dynamic range for the receiver ports of the E5070B E5071B The system dynamic range is tested by performing an Isolation measurement 16 times with segment sweep points for specified frequency ranges after the response and isolation calibrations are performed and calculating the RMS deviation value from the 16 measurement data for each sweep frequency point The maximum RMS deviation value in each frequency range is extracted to determine the system dynamic range performance Specification I 5 9 3 D 2 o n Serial Prefix MY421 JPIKK E5070B 95 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 97 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 122 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz IFBW 10 Hz E5071B 95 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 97 dB 23 5 1 5 GHz to 4 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 93 dB 23 5 C 4 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 88 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 81 dB 23 5 C 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 122 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 4 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 118 dB 23 5 C 4 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 113 dB G 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 106 dB 23 5 C 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz Serial Prefix MY422 and above E5070B 95 dB 2
325. formed is recovered 2 This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher 474 Appendix B System Recovery System Recovery Procedure to execute the factory recovery for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below This section describes how to return the contents of the C drive to the factory state You need the keyboard for this operation Shut down the E5070B E5071B Connect the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B Insert the disk for the system recovery which is furnished with the E5070B E5071B into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B E5071B Press the standby switch of the E5070B E5071B to turn it on When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold of the keyboard until this screen disappears EE Agilent Technologies Press TAB to show POST screen DEL to enter SETUP F12 to select Boot DEVICE ES e5070buj034 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor Appendix B 475 00 lt m 3 2 lt System Recovery System Recovery Step
326. gid Cables Opt 414 336 Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Salk ce e E EVE VELO CERNERET eek at 338 Front View Analog 5 5 eei ute ed rete e ce eee Mace lege e e de en c mice E RN 338 Front View Miscellaneous 340 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 4 341 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 342 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 1 74 344 Replac able Parts List Others er Cep RR RU Baa STRUCT RR ORC 346 Front Panel DS bb IP E bU reb SED eee 346 Rear View xi sek concept eR ee eR SA le tede E ut Rokk Re 348 Side ete eet eee n CE Det ERU Reena 350 Cover Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JPIKK MY423 and below E5071B serial prefix JP1KK MY423 and bel W esce Ie eee ey he ees 351 Cover Assembly for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above 352 28 FDD Assembly cuisse Ree CEDAR ERAT hen ee en 353 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly for E5070B se
327. h your finger automatically concludes the touch screen calibration With no operation on the touch screen calibration screen for a preset time it automatically closes and the previous measurement screen reappears 496 Appendix B Firmware Update This appendix describes how to update the E5070B E5071B firmware When you want to update the E5070B E5071B firmware refer to this appendix m z 497 Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 06 51 or lower Firmware Update for revision A 06 51 or lower Required Equipment e 5070 or E5071B with keyboard and mouse e Several blank floppy disks DOS format How to make E5070B E5071B Firmware Installation Disk The following is the procedure to make the E5070B E5071B Firmware Installation Disk Step 1 Copy the following files from Agilent Technologies web site to the several floppy disks using your computer s FDD You need the same number of floppy disks as that of cab files Where n indicates the maximum number of floppy disks e disk1 1 of n e5070 msi e507001 cab e disk2 2 of n e507002 cab e disk3 3 of n e507003 cab e diskn n of n e5070xx cab Step 2 Assign the Label name as follows using the properties of your computer s Windows Explorer as shown in Figure C 1 DISK 1 for disk1 DISK 2 for disk2 DISK 3 for disk3 DISK 7 for diskn Figure C 1
328. hard disk assembly item 4 e Connected to the A32 USB connector item 5 Remove three TORX T10 screws item 6 fastening the guide plate Remove eight TORX T10 screws item 7 fastening the digital motherboard Lift the digital motherboard 408 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 Replacement Procedure Step 1 Disassemble the guide plate from rear side of the mother board Step 2 Assemble the removed part on the new board 20 D U O D Q Step 3 Clamp the two clips using the new cable tie for DIMM memorys Step 4 Install the new board by the reverse procedure of removal Figure 6 16 A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above eS5070bse3016 Chapter 6 409 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement fo
329. he CPU s clock on Control frequency and voltage page 276 Change Supervisor The method to assign a password This on Password option is used only when the password has page 277 not been set in the E5070B E507 1B Change User Password None This option is unnecessary for the E5070B E5071B Load Setting 1 None This option is unnecessary for the Defaults E5070B E5071B Load Setting 2 The procedure to initialize BIOS option on Defaults settings This option is used only when the page 266 A20 digital motherboard is replaced with a new one Save amp Exit Setup The procedure to save the option settings and on exit from BIOS setup utility page 277 Exit Without Saving The procedure to exit from BIOS setup utility on without saving the option settings page 278 Load Setting 2 Defaults Perform the following procedure only when the A20 digital motherboard is replaced Jump to Standard CMOS Features when you check whether the BIOS options are correctly set or not Load Setting 2dialog box is displayed by choosing Load Setting 2 Defaults using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu The dialog box prompts you to select Y Yes or N No about Load Setting 2 Defaults Y N as shown in Figure 4 62 Press and to load the setting 2 stored in the BIOS ROM As a result almost of all the BIOS options are automatically configured to the optimal settings for the E5070B E5071B 266 Chapter 4 Troubles
330. he semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement 428 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix MY422 and above E5071B S N prefix MY422 and above Option 214 314 and 414 Figure 6 27 7 Source Step Attenuator Removal for Opt 214 D D 5 Q D U O D Us e5070bse3019 Chapter 6 429 Replacement Procedure A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix MY422 and above E5071B S N prefix MY422 and above Option 214 314 and 414 Figure 6 28 A7 Source Step Attenuator Removal for Opt 314 or 414 e5070bse3018 430 Chapter 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Replacement Procedure A8 RF Switch Replacement A8 RF Switch Replacement 20 D U O D Q Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in lb for reconnecting SMA connector 8 RF Switch source board side Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 29 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY
331. he source power adjustment Description Recommended Model Power Meter Agilent E4419A B Power Sensor Agilent E4412A Power Sensor Agilent 8482A Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust source match directivity and tracking Required equipment for the test port characteristics adjustment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit Agilent 85052F N m N m Cable Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 co gt 2 c o E oO 5 qe Chapter 3 197 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly 198 Chapter 3 4 a 2 2 e e Troubleshooting This chapter provides procedure to isolate a faulty assembly in the E5070B E5071B Network Analyzer 199 WARNING WARNING CAUTION CAUTION Troubleshooting Introduction Introduction These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid possible electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from its power supply beforehand Many of the assemblies in the instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap DO NOT operate w
332. he stop frequency to a value of about 4 times or more the start frequency and then set the low seep Peak not found This warning message is displayed when with the tracking turned on the peak specified by the marker search has not been found by the time the sweep is finished with the tracking executed Segment table changed This warning message is displayed when the setting specified segment by segment in the segment table is automatically changed by a change in the other setting For example this warning message is displayed when with the power specified segment by segment in the segment table the power setting for a segment is adjusted by a change in the power range setting 536 Appendix F Messages Sweep mode changed to stepped sweep Sweep mode changed to stepped sweep This message appears when you set the sweep type to power sweep power slope function to enabled ON correction coefficient is other than zero power calibration to ON frequency offset to enabled spurious avoidance of frequency offset to enabled or external signal source control to enabled while the sweep mode is set to swept mode or high speed swept mode When this message is displayed the sweep mode is automatically set to step mode during swept mode or high speed step mode during high speed swept mode Target value not found This warning message is displayed when with the tracking turned on the target specified by the marker search has no
333. he user backup image for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below This section describes how to create the user backup image The C drive contents saved in this creation are recalled when the user recovery function is executed NOTE This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation Step 1 Shut down the E5070B E5071B Step 2 Connect the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B Step 3 Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the 5070 5071 Step 4 Press the standby switch of the E5070B E5071B to turn it on Step 5 When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold of the keyboard until this screen disappears Agilent Technologies starting usses 1 2 w a 3 2 0 65061541034 Q lt lt After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor Appendix B 481 System Recovery System Recovery Step 6 The following screen appears Check that Floppy is selected highlighted if Floppy is not selected select it with of the k
334. hooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below When the mass storage is detected the HDD model name is displayed as shown in Figure 4 9 in the Standard CMOS Features window under the BIOS setup utility If the mass storage is not detected None is displayed The A27 mass storage is connected to the IDE connector on the A20 digital motherboard via A30 3 5 2 5 adapter and a flat cable Check the flat cable first If it has no problem replace the A27 mass storage Step 4 Windows boot screens The Windows boot screens are displayed The Windows boot screens consists of three screens Each screens is display in the order as shown in Figure 4 10 If the Windows boot screens are displayed it is assumed that the A27 works While the Window screens are displayed Windows operating system is starting up Figure 4 10 Windows boot screens Windows 2000 on NT Technology e5070bse161 If you encounter the following problems try to reinstall the operating system before replacing the A27 xxx file is missing is displayed on DOS screen E 9 2 2 O e The Window boot screen is not displayed after the splash screen is displayed e Windows always boots up with Safe Mode NOTE If the E5070B E5071B was turned off without shutdown process Microsoft Scandisk runs while the windows boot screen
335. hooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Figure 4 62 Load Setting 2 dialog box CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2881 Award Software Standard CMOS Features gt Frequency Voltage Control gt Advanced BIOS Features Load Setting 1 Defaults gt Advanced Chipset Features Load Setting 2 Defaults gt Integrated Peripherals Set Supervisor Password gt Power Management p word PnP PCI Configuraj Load Setting 2 Defaults Y N tup gt PC Health Status aving Esc Quit Select Item F18 Save amp Exit Setup Load Setting 2 Defaults Standard CMOS Features Standard CMOS Setup options are displayed by choosing Standard CMOS Setup using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu The current setup states are displayed as shown in Figure 4 63 If date or time is incorrect select it using 1 keys and change the setting by pressing keys If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press E key A 2 2 Chapter 4 267 Figure 4 63 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 nd below tandard CMOS Features window CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2881 Award Softw
336. i Press 6 G n J to enter 6 GHz as the stop frequency The Points will be focused aj Press 0 to set the number of sweep points to 20 Power will be focused ak Press x1 to set the power level to 7 dBm al Press C gt S to focus on the Start frequency of fourth segment am Press 6 J 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 Len to enter 6 000000001 GHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused an Press 8 J 5 Gin to enter 8 5 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused ao Press 3 J 0 1 to set the number of sweep points to 30 Power will be focused 68 Chapter 2 NOTE Table 2 16 NOTE Table 2 17 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST ap Press 5 J to set the power level to 5 dBm See Table 2 16 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B for serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B Segment Table setting for serial prefix MY422 and above Start Stop Points Power 1 300 kHz 3 GHz 35 10 dBm 2 3 000000001 GHz 4 25 GHz 15 9 dBm A 3 4 250000001 GHz 6 GHz 20 7 dBm 4 6 000000001 GHz 8 5 GHz 30 5 dBm 9 2 Press Sweep Setup lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt select Sweep Type Enter to set the Sweep type to Segment Response Thru calibration Press CY Ct and to select Cal Kit
337. ibutor 00 lt m 3 2 lt Appendix 489 System Recovery System Recovery Procedure to execute the user recovery function for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Returns the contents of the C drive to a user specified state To use this function you must create the user backup image in advance For more information see the description Procedure to create the user backup image for 5070 MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above on page 484 This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher You need the keyboard for this operation Shut down the E5070B E5071B Connect the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B E5071B Press the standby switch of the E5070B E507 1B to turn it on When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold E of the keyboard until this screen disappears EE Agilent Technologies starting usse 28 4 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 e5061buj034 NOTE After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer c
338. igure 2 64 NOTE The test setups and Select Ports settings for each option configuration are described in Table 2 27 Chapter 2 107 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 62 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 213 214 5070 5071 aa qa 2 0000 oa 59 0000 oo 00 N m N m Cable 5070 033 Figure 2 63 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B aa an A 0000 cuan OO 0000 0000 oo e 000 a0 00 N m N m Cable e5070bse034 108 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 64 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B EYE E 211 0000 0000 0000 aa Ja 0000 oo n N m N m Cable m D m 3 5
339. ion 016 of the E5070B E5071B For the option 016 instruments the touch screen operating procedures corresponding to the described procedures may be used The E5070B E5071B performance test procedure Para Title 1 Frequency accuracy test 2 RF output level accuracy and flatness test 3 RF output level linearity test 4 Trace noise CW test 5 Crosstalk test 6 System dynamic range test 32 Chapter 2 Performance Tests Introduction Table 2 1 The E5070B E5071B performance test procedure Para Title 7 Dynamic accuracy test 8 Uncorrected system performance test Test Equipment Required The required equipment for the performance test is listed on Table 1 1and Table 1 2 Use only calibrated equipment when doing the performance test Softkey Selection Procedure for Performance Test m D m 3 5 NOTE The procedure of the softkey selection depends on the firmware revision Please note that some softkey selection procedures for your E5070B E5071B might be a little bit different from the procedure described in this chapter Chapter 2 33 Step 1 NOTE NOTE Performance Tests 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST Description This test checks the frequency accuracy of the E5070B E507 1B test port output signal The frequency accuracy is checked at 50 MHz and 3 GHz with a frequency counter Since the E5070B E50
340. ion Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 3G 6G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 6G 85G 51 0 Port 2 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Directivity 3G 6G lt 20 Directivity 6G 85G lt 15 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3G 6G lt 20 Source match 6G 8 5 G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 8 5G lt 10 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 3G 6G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 6G 85G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 3G 6G 1 0 170 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK System performance Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB Reflection Tracking 6G 85G 1 0 Port 3 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Directivity 3G 6G lt 20 Directivity 6G 8 5G lt 15 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3G 6G lt 20 Source match 6G 8 5 G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 85G lt 10 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 3G 6G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 6G 85G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Reflection Tracking 3G 6G
341. ion of 521 Phase receiver for Port 1 14 521 2 Mag IF signal level S21 T2 Phase ranging 12 R2 Mag operation of SI2 R2 Phase receiver for Port 2 15 531 3 Mag IF signal level HHH S31 T3 Phase ranging S13 R3 Mag operation of S13 R3 Phase receiver for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 16 S41 T4 Mag IF signal level TH S41 T4 Phase ranging 514 Mag operation of 514 4 Phase receiver for Port 4 Opt 413 414 17 Receiver S12 Mag Receiver gain Hitt Linearity S12 Phase linearity for Port 1 18 S21 Mag Receiver gain 521 linearity for Port 2 19 S31 Mag Receiver gain HHH S31 Phase linearity for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 20 S41 Mag Receiver gain 541 linearity for Port 4 Opt 413 414 21 Dynamic 12 13 Dynamic range TH Range 14 821 for all test ports 523 531 532 534 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 S41 543 Opt 413 414 Chapter 4 257 IN 4 o o gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Table 4 11 External test failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly No test Al A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A23 Src Lev Pow Sw T Hnd Vern Amp cont A15 A17 22 Trace Noise S11 Mag Phas Trace noise for HHH THE THE
342. irection 521 I 5 3 D 2 o E n CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction S12 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction 23 Option 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Chapter 2 145 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Direction 532 Option 313 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction 543 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction 534 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 1 3G 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k l
343. irectivity 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Port 4 Options 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Reflection Tracking 3M 3G 1 0 Chapter 2 153 I 5 3 D 2 o n Lan Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JPIKK Agilent Technologies E5071B RF Network Analyzer Serial Number Option Temperature C Test Date Humidity Tested by Frequency Accuracy Test Without Option 1E5 Frequency Hz Test limit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 250 11 3G 15k k 0 64 With Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Test limit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 50 11 3G 3 00 k k 0 64 Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Level Accuracy Test Port 1 Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement dBm Hz dB dB uncertainty dB 0 50M 0 65 0 16 Level Flatness Test Port 1 at 0dBm relat
344. is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument If this error occurs the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off Port 3 receiver overload for Options 313 314 413 and 414 only The input to Test Port 3 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When a DUT is an amplifier or the like this error may occur damaging the receiver in the worst case Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or with nothing connected to the test port this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument If this error occurs the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off Port 4 receiver overload For Options 413 and 414 only The input to Test Port 4 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When a DUT is an amplifier or the like this error may occur damaging the receiver in the worst case Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or with nothing connected to the test port this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument If this error occurs the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off Power meter not settled The measurement value of the power meter is unstable or it goes outside the tolerance This error occurs when the power
345. is invalid see 7 7 7 2 IEEE488 2 Parentheses are not paired or illegal characters are used for example Invalid separator The parser a syntactic analysis program had been expecting a delimiter but a character that is not a delimiter has been sent Invalid string data Character string data has been expected but the character string data that appears is invalid for some reason see 7 7 5 2 IEEE488 2 The END message is received before the ending quotation mark character appears for example Appendix F 527 131 53 109 70 52 120 128 Messages Invalid suffix Invalid suffix The suffix does not comply with the syntax defined in 7 7 3 2 IEEE488 2 Or it does not suit E5070B 5071B L Log sweep requires 2 octave minimum span The span of sweep range is not satisfied the requirement for logarithmic sweep The sweep type is automatically changed to linear sweep when this error occurs For example this error occurs when with the start and stop frequency are set 1 MHz and 2 MHz respectively the sweep type is changed to logarithmic sweep Set the stop frequency to more than four times as many as the start frequency And then select logarithmic sweep M Missing parameter The number of parameters is less than that required for the command or the parameter has not been entered For example the command SENS 1 6 SWE POIN requires one more parameter Therefore when a message SENS1 SWE POIN
346. ish button to finish the initial registration of the E5070B E5071B Figure B 4 Then the measurement display of theE5070B E5071B appears Figure B 5 Network Identification Wizard dialog box 2 2 Completing the Network Identification Wizard You have succesfully completed the Network Identification Wizard To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Finish Cancel e5070bqj005 Appendix B 495 w 42 lt o 0 3 2 lt lt __________ __ Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 7 1 Step 5 NOTE System Recovery Calibration of the Touch Screen Calibration of the Touch Screen When you have executed system recovery on the E5070B E5071B equipped with an Option 016 touch screen you have to calibrate the touch screen Follow the procedure described below to calibrate the touch screen Press System Press Service Menu Press Test Menu Press Adjust Touch Screen The touch screen calibration screen Figure 7 1 appears Touch Panel Calibration Screen Device 1 Touch the center of each cross as it appears Calibration will terminate if no touch is received within 10 seconds Press escape to abort the calibration process e507 0auj 26 Touch the x mark on the upper left with your finger The mark x appears also on the lower left upper right and lower right Touch the x marks in that order with your finger Touching the four locations described above wit
347. ith the required voltmeter accuracy and resolution Power sensor Agilent 11730A p n Any equivalent cable 8120 8319 Cable BNC 50 Any Any Adapter for Any Any connecting BNC cable to DVM inputs Required accuracy and resolution at the following voltage levels 14 mV input 0 0100 accuracy 10 nV resolution 0 14 V input 0 0050 accuracy 100 nV resolution 0 45 V input 0 0030 accuracy 100 nV resolution Description of the Test The power meter accuracy is verified for various power inputs and the actual readings are recorded in a test record A range calibrator is used to provide the reference inputs 26 Chapter 1 General Information Power Meter Accuracy Test Q B NOTE It is recommended that a copy of the test record on page 30 be made and the values be recorded on the copy thus preserving the original for future use 5 D Test Procedure 5 This procedure assumes the use of the recommended equipment model numbers The actual steps required therefore may differ for other model numbers of equipment used Step 1 Setup the equipment as shown in Figure 1 2 a Connect the DC REFERENCE OUTPUT connector on the rear panel of the range calibrator to the DVM voltage input b Connect the POWER METER output of the range calibrator to the input of the power meter being tested c Switch on the power to
348. ithout following instructions Programs or files in the instrument may be broken 200 Chapter 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 4 1 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE NOTE Troubleshooting How to exit from the E5070B E5071B Measurement View How to exit from the E5070B E5071B Measurement View You need to exit from the E5070B E5071B Measurement View to perform some troubleshooting The following is the procedure to exit from the E5070B E5071B Measurement View Connect the mouse and external keyboard to the connectors on the E5070B E5071B rear panel Turn the instrument on Press key Click Service Menu Service Function Password dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 1 Password dialog box Cancel Enter the password kid in the Password box and then click OK button Click Exit in Service Functions Menu Then the E5070B E5071B exit the Measurement View then windows desktop screen appears with 4 icons My Computer Recycle Bin My Network Places and Network Analyzer If you wish to return to the Measurement View double click Network Analyzer icon If you need to shut down the E5070B E5071B and again turn on perform in accordance with the following procedure a To get Start menu bar displayed move the pointer to the bottom of the screen with mouse b Click Start and Shut Down in the pull down menu Shut Down Windows dialog box opens Select Shut down button in the pull d
349. ive 391 Calibration of the Touch 391 Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above oss hte hates tte ag Shek aes Sap Nis E motu 392 Tools Requited o el delle eaten 392 Removal procedure i veu EIE NUUS EROR TUSCE NIE etes 392 R placement Procedure iR e eb S UPS RUE POEM PIA 393 Restore Backup Files onto the New Removable Hard Disk 394 Calibration of th Touch Screen puer epe epe eene es 395 Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N 42402 455 os PIED OREL be 396 Tools sses Dese es Ehe teo GS hide OR DAE SR OE HP EE f heus 396 Removal procedure 2 ade e Exp ur PI e sp d pee dis 396 Replacement Procedures suot sae eee ees WR E OE HEATERS ees 396 A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive 398 Tools Required Sep REEL Seas PIPER CERTA 398 Removal ptocedure cuc bebo dee Ape 3
350. ive to 50 MHz reference Frequency Hz Testlimit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10M 0 37 550 M 0 17 154 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Frequency Hz Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 1 05 G 1 0 0 17 1 556 1 0 0 19 2 05 G 1 0 0 20 3 00 G 1 0 0 20 4 25G 1 0 0 36 5 05 G 1 0 0 36 6 05 G 1 0 0 36 7 05 G 1 0 0 36 8 05 G 1 0 0 36 8 50G 1 0 0 36 RF Output Level Linearity Test Port1 CW Frequency 10 MHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 75 0 27 9 0 75 0 26 8 0 75 0 24 7 0 75 0 23 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 Chapter 2 155 U 3 9 E D 2 n Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17
351. justment Warm up the E5070B E5071B for at least 30 minute before performing any of the following Adjustment procedures to ensure proper results and correct instrument operation Required Equipment Table 1 1 on page 24 lists the equipment required to perform the Adjustment procedures described in this chapter Use only calibrated test equipment when adjusting the 5070 5071 194 Chapter 3 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly After replacing the following assembly the adjustment items described in Table 3 1 must be required The adjustment must be performed Agilent s qualified service personnel If you need the adjustment for your E5070B E507 1B it should be sent to the nearest Agilent Technologies service office Table 3 1 Required Adjustment Item after Replacing Assembly Replaced Assembly Adjustment Item Frequency Reference Adjustment Oven Reference Adjustment Opt 1E5 IF Range Gain Phase Adjustment Source Power Adjustment Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment a en 5 co Source Board 4 4 4 gt 2 Receiver RF Board 4 a E Receiver IF Board 4 4 4 RF Switch 4 4 Crystal Oven Opt 1E5 4 Attenuator Opt 214 314 and 414 4 4 Hard Disk Drive Analog Interface Board Level Vernier Power Amp Module Writing ID This item writes the serial number and the option st
352. k drive model Table 5 7 Top View Cables Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 2 04287 61607 0 1 FLAT CABLE 3 E5070 61616 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 4 E5070 61623 8 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 5 E5070 61624 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 6 E5070 61692 2 1 WIRE ASSY Opt 1 5 7 E5070 61692 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY Opt 1 5 1400 1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE e 2 oO n Chapter 5 303 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Top View Miscellaneous Parts Figure 5 8 Top View Miscellaneous Parts e5070bse3002 304 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above A27 mass storage disk drive model Table 5 8 Top View Miscellaneous Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0430 3 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 2 E5070 01229 4 1 ANGLE 3 0515 1946 8 4 SCREW 4 0515 0430 3 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 5 0515 1382 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 6 FL T15 6 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 7 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 8 0515 1946 8 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 9 0515 1402
353. keyboard d The external computer displays a message of ping command response from the E5070B E5071B Figure 4 33 shows an example of normal result that indicates the IP address packet size and a response time counted by the computer The ping command is repeated 4 times Figure 4 33 Example of normal ping command test result 2MS DOS Prompt If the E5070B E5071B doesn t return the response the external computer displays 236 Chapter 4 Figure 4 34 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting message of Request timed out as shown in Figure 4 34 In this case a failure in the A20 digital motherboard is suspected Example of no response for ping command efe A WINDOWS gt To Check the Printer Parallel Port Test equipment e Supported printer Please refer http www agilent com find ctdkobe_printers for the latest supported printers Printer cable Parallel cable Procedure Connect the printer cable between the printer and the 5070 507 printer parallel port Turn the printer on Press and Enter to initialize the 5070 5071 Press key Click Printer Setup in the softkey menu Depending on the printer used Click proper icon with the right button in the Property window Then click Set as Default Printer button PN o gt Click Pri
354. l prefix CW frequency 10 MHz and 3 GHz 10 MHz and 3 GHz MY422 and above Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0 10 a REF 9 a REF 8 a REF 7 a REF 6 a REF 5 a REF 4 a REF 3 a REF 2 a REF 1 a REF E a REF 120 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation NOTE dBm a REF 2 a REF 3 a REF 4 a REF 5 a REF 6 a REF 7 a REF 8 a REF 9 a REF 10 a REF 11 a REF 12 a REF 13 a REF 14 a REF 15 a REF U 3 3 D 2 n Make copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies listed below E5071B for serial prefix 4 25 GHz MY422 and above CW frequency Hz Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0 9 a REF 8 a REF 7 a REF 6 a REF 5 4 3 Chapter 2 121 Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 2 a REF 1 a REF 1 a REF 2 a REF 3 a REF 4 a REF 5 a REF 6 a REF
355. le 0000 agag aA aoa Lo d 19 5 3 D 2 o E n Lan oi N m N m Cable Press gt and Enter to select Transmission calibration and to go down to its menu Press to perform Port 1 2 Thru calibration Perform Return Press C gt CV Enter to Perform Done Press and verify that the Correction function is set to ON Directivity source match load match transmission tracking and reflection tracking test Press Load Project Open uncorrected system test vba The program uncorrected system test vba can be downloaded from Agilent Technologies web site to a floppy disk using you computer s FDD Press to run the test program This test program displays the values of the directivity source match and load match at each sweep frequency point and extracts the maximum value for each of the following frequency ranges E5070B 3 MHz to 3 GHz 1 range E5071B 3 MHz to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 8 5 GHz 3 ranges The maximum value in each frequency range is represented in dB and displayed in the VBA UserForm window as shown in the display example below Directivity test for port 1 a Set Parameter Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2 47 Chapter 2 103 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 47 Directivity test window
356. le Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Top View Motherboard and Other Parts Figure 5 17 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts 0000000000 Q 9 akeo JO 19 4 JO 5070 4006 322 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Table 5 17 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0430 6 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 2 1400 0611 1 CLAMP CABLE 3 0515 2216 4 SCREW MACH 4 0 x 40 PN T20 4 0361 1875 RIVET PLASTIC 5 1400 1391 1 CLAMP CABLE 6 E5070 01267 1 BRACKET PS N Dn C N oo 7 0515 1402 2 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN 8 1420 0356 1 BATTERY LITHIUM CR2032 3V 22A HR e 2 oO n Chapter 5 323 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK and 421 E5071B serial prefix JP1KK and MY421 Replaceable Parts List Front View for E5070B serial prefix and MY421 E5071B serial prefix and 421 Front View Analog Figure 5 18 Front View Analog Cir Lo 5 8 e5070bse071 324 Chapter 5 Replac
357. level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 2 a REF 1 a REF 1 2 2 4 a REF 5 a REF 6 a REF 7 a REF 8 a REF 29 a REF 10 a REF 11 a REF 12 a REF 13 a REF 14 a REF 15 a REF 124 Chapter 2 4 Trace Noise CW Test NOTE Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the S parameters Listed below Option 212 213 Option 313 314 Option 413 414 S21and 512 521 512 523 532 521 512 543 and 534 One calculation sheet can cover 2 parameters S parameter E5070B and E5071B I 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Lan oi CW frequency Hz s dev nU Trace noise level dB rms Test result equation 3 MHz 1 3 GHz Trace noise level 2 1 GHz 20 log 1 s dev x 10 3 GHz E5071B only CW frequency Hz s dev nU Trace noise level dB rms Test result equation 4 25 GHz 6 GHz Trace noise level 15 GHz 20 log 1 s dev x 1079 8 5 GHz S parameter E5070B and E5071B CW frequency Hz s dev nU Trace noise level dB rms Test result equation 3 MHz 1 3 GHz Trace noise level 21 GHz 20 log 1 s dev x 109 3 GHz Chapter 2 125 Performance Tests E5070B E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet
358. lt dB Measurement uncertainty dB 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 12 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 186 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 531 Options 313 314 413 and 414 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10
359. m Plug BS 1363 A 250V 10 Cable 8120 1351 8120 8705 OPTION 902 Continental Europe Plug CEE 7 Standard Sheet 250V 10A Cable 8120 1689 OPTION 904 U S Canada Plug NEMA 6 15P 250V 6A Cable 8120 0698 OPTION 912 Denmark Plug SR 107 2 D 250V 10A Cable 8120 2956 OPTION 918 Plug JIS C 8303 125V 12A Cable 8120 4753 OPTION 921 Plug CEI 23 16 250V 10 Cable 8120 6978 OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand Plug AS 3112 250V 10A Cable 8120 1369 U S Canada OPTION 903 Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 10A Cable 8120 1378 OPTION 906 Switzerland Plug SEV Type 12 250V 10A Cable 8120 2104 OPTION 917 India Republic of S Africa Plug IEC 83 B1 250V 10A Cable 8120 4211 OPTION 920 Argentina Plug Argentine Resolution 63 Annex IV 250V 10A Cable 8120 6870 OPTION 922 Plug GB 1002 250V 10A Cable 8120 8376 NOTE Each option number includes family of cords and connectors of various materials and plug body configurations straight 90 etc 378 Chapter 5 20 D U O D Q Replacement Procedure This chapter provides procedure for removing and replacing the major assemblies in the E5070B E5071B ENA Series Network Analyzer 379 Replacement Procedure Replacing an Assembly Replacing an Assembly The following steps show the sequence
360. m 8 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm 10 dBm NOTE The RF output level linearity is tested at the minimum maximum and proper frequencies other than the source adjustment frequencies within the specified frequency range Step 7 Press C and to make a Single sweep measurement Step 8 Wait for the power meter reading to settle Then record the reading in the calculation sheet Step 9 Power meter reading a column for the level linearity test Change the E5070B E5071B power level setting in accordance with Table 2 3 and perform 42 Chapter 2 Table 2 5 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Performance Tests 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST Step 7 and 8 for each power level to 10 8 or 6 dBm for serial prefix MY421 or KPIKK Change the E5070B E5071B power level setting in accordance with Table 2 4 and perform Step 7 and 8 for each power level to 10 9 or 7 or 5 dBm for serial prefix MY422 and above Press Sweep Setup 1 J x1 to set the power level to 1 dBm which is the second value of the level linearity test levels listed in Table 2 5 RF output level linearity test conditions Test 5070 5071 E5071B only frequency 10 MHz 3 GHz 4 25 GHz 6 GHz 8 5 GHz Power level 0 dBm reference level 1 dBm 2 dBm 3 dBm 4 dBm 5 dBm 6 dBm 7 dBm 8 dBm 9 dBm 10 dBm 11 dBm 12 dBm 13 dBm 14dBm 15 dBm I 5 9 3 D 2 o
361. mp in OUTPUT 712 at 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 0 Adjust the source power for 10 dBm on the power meter display Wait for power meter Chapter 2 91 NOTE Step 50 Step 51 Step 52 Step 53 Step 54 Step 55 Step 56 Step 57 Step 58 Step 59 Step 60 NOTE Step 61 Step 62 Step 63 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result Since the source power resolution is 0 05 dB adjust for the nearest possible value to 10 dBm Perform Step 16 through 19 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 0 Perform Step 16 through 19 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 5 dBm using the following equation D A Tx DAS Tx 10 Pm DAS Pm 10 Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running D A dB and True D A dB columns for DAS Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 0 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 0 Perform Step 16 through 19 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 0 dBm using the following equation D A Tx DAO Tx 9 10 Pm DAO Pm DA10 Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running D A dB and True D A dB col
362. n printing fails for reasons other than Error 120 Printer error Program currently running This error occurs when the PROG SEL STAT RUN command is executed with the VBA program in the Run state Program mnemonic too long The length of the header exceeds 12 characters see 7 6 1 4 1 IEEE488 2 Program runtime error An error occurring when VBA is executed Q Query DEADLOCKED The state that generates a DEADLOCKED Query error see 6 3 1 7 IEEE488 2 This error occurs when both input and output buffers have become full preventing the instrument from continuing processing for example Query error 4 A comprehensive query error has occurred showing that this instrument cannot detect a more detailed error This code simply shows that a query error defined in 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 IEEE488 2 has occurred Query INTERRUPTED The state that generates a INTERRUPTED Query error see 6 3 2 3 488 1 This error occurs when data bytes DAB or GET are received before the transmission of the response after a query has not been completed for example Query UNTERMINATED The state that generates an UNTERMINATED Query error see 6 3 2 IEEE488 2 This error occurs when this instrument is designated as the talker and an incomplete program message is received for example Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response After a query asking for an indefinite response has been run another query i
363. n to each test port as shown in Figure 2 26 Opt 313 314 and Figure 2 27 Opt 413 414 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 313 314 5070 5071 2 73 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Figure 2 27 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B Co c aa aann aa 0000 0000 oo ooo aaa Good e5070bse020 Step 34 Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes IF Bandwidth 10 Hz IF Bandwidth 0 Averaging ON D D BD select Averaging Averaging factor now is set to 16 preset value Step 35 Press _Cal_J and Enter to select Calibrate function Step 36 Press lt gt lt gt and to select Response Thru calibration Step 37 Press to go down to Select Ports menu Step 38 Select 2 1 21 for the option 313 314 instruments and 4 1 S41 for the option 413 414 instruments as shown in the third row in Table 2 19
364. nd above November 2005 Fifth Edition May 2006 Sixth Edition February 2007 Seventh Edition November 2008 Eighth Edition NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment In addition it violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements E5070B E5071B comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 in IEC61010 1 E5070B E5071B are INDOOR USE product LEDs in E5070B E5071B are Class 1 in accordance with IEC60825 1 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT This equipment is MEASUREMENT CATEGORY I CAT I Do not use for CAT II III or IV This equipment is tested with stand alone condition or with the combination with the accessories supplied by Agilent Technologies against the requirement of the standards described in the Declaration of Conformity If it is used as a system component compliance of related regulations and safety requirements are to be confirmed by the builder of the system Ground The Instrument To avoid electric shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to a safety ea
365. ne button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box Chapter 4 243 Figure 4 41 Figure 4 42 e5070bse048 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test 10dB 1 amp 2 dialog box Connect 10dB ATT between Port 1 and Port 2 ca e5070bse123 c Connecta 10 dB fixed attenuator and an type N m coaxial cable in series between the test ports in accordance with Table 4 6 Make the connection as shown in Figure 4 42 10 dB attenuator and cable connection E5070B E5071B Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B 9 0000 oa 0000 0000 0000 oo gt oaao n QOO n 1 10dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable Table 4 6 Tch IF Ranging tests setups Test name Objective of the test Connect a 10 dB Center Span freq IFBW attenuator Nop and RF power settings cable between Automatic Port 1 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 of test channel receiver for Port 1 5 dBm Port 2 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 of test channel receiver for Port 2 5 dBm Port 3 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 3 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 of test channel receiver for Port 3 5 dBm Opt 313 314 413 414 Port
366. neos v meer e 446 Removal Procedure cp sb ege E eR eek ee eee dod Shs ie ES 446 Replacement Procedure ee m hes e E ATE YR PR Rer rr e DS 446 A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JPIKK 4232454 and 212 448 Tools Required se es ba eS ho CI a a 448 Removal Proced re cce eee ened eek E 448 Replacement cos scd era e RU Rope 448 22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above cse EU mede UE aes ee gets 450 Tools Requitfed ei ee shines te E NH Ue en NUR en eta ols 450 Removal Procedure ree et RR RU E CERERI C RECO 450 Replacement Procedure edm eee ee pedem sedere 450 A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N Contents prefix JPIKK MY4232454 and below 452 Tools Required eR eee RU Rr xe uei iu Gua Sehr ete DUE 452 Removal Procedure n sso ex ee RR Re E RNC ETE ERE IRR UE Eu er ed 452 Replacement Procedure uec E ERE den eie eere E 452 A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and abov
367. no operation on the touch screen calibration screen for a preset time it automatically closes and the previous measurement screen reappears Chapter 6 391 Figure 6 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 e507 0bse4012 Replacement Procedure Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 above Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T8 T10 T15 and T20 Removal procedure Refer to Figure 6 7 for this procedure Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 1 and remove the removable hard disk drive s lid item 2 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 3 fastening the HDD bracket Remove the two TORX T8 screws item 4 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 5 and remove the HDD bracket Remove the hard disk drive from the connector board Removable Hard Disk Drive Removal 392 Chapter 6 Figure 6 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Replacement Procedure Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Replacement Procedure Paste the heat transfer sheet to the hard disk drive rear side Refer to Figure 6 8 Heat Transfer Sheet 20 D UV O D Ca Heat Transfer Sheet 450754013
368. ns the information required to adapt this manual to versions or configurations of the E5070B E5071B manufactured earlier than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to E5070B E5071B units with the serial number that is printed on the title page of this manual Appendix B System Recovery This appendix describes how to recover the operating system Windows 2000 when the operating system has been damaged 1 21 General Information Organization of Service Manual Appendix C Firmware Update This appendix describes how to update the E5070B E5071B firmware When you want to update the E5070B E5071B firmware refer to this appendix Appendix D Computer Virus Check This appendix describes an example of how to check the system of E5070B E5071B for computer viruses using computer viruses check software Appendix E Power Requirement Appendix F Messages The 5070 507 can display error messages as well as messages that indicate the internal operating status of the equipment This appendix explains what these messages mean by listing them in alphabetical order 22 Chapter 1 Figure 1 1 General Information Instrument Covered by This Manual Instrument Covered by This Manual ES 0 D 2 D m 5 x 5 Agilent Technologies uses a two part ten character serial number label See Figure 1
369. nt in the softkey menu Confirm the printout of the display image If the printer fails to work the problem seems in the A20 digital motherboard printer driver or connection of the printer cable Chapter 4 237 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting To Check the GPIB Procedure Perform the E5070B E5071B performance test program If the controller cannot detect the E5070B E5071B the problem seems in the A24 GPIB card or the connection of the GPIB cable To Check the USB USBTMC Interface Card Procedure Connect the USB cable between the controller PC and the E5070B E5071B Turn the controller PC on If the E5070B E5071B cannot detect the controller PC the problem seems in the USB USBTMC Interface Card or the A20 digital motherboard is suspected 238 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Troubleshooting Using External Test External test is the diagnostic test function to supplement the internal test To enable a diagnosis for the analog measurement blocks uncovered with the internal test the external test is performed using a coaxial cable a fixed attenuator coaxial terminations a calibration kit and a handler I O test kit The following paragraphs describe the procedure to perform the external test Contents of the external test The external test contains 7 test groups shown in Table 4 3 Each test group can be performed independently and verifies one of various operating cha
370. o Connect an external VGA monitor to the VIDEO output port on the E5070B E5071B rear panel Ifthe monitor screen view is the same as the LCD display the problem seems the A26 LCD interface card Check first if the A26 board is securely connected to the A20 board e Ifonly the LCD display has a problem check the flat cable between the A26 and A31 LCD connector Chapter 4 231 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Ifthe LCD is not illuminated with backlight check A52 inverter board and the cable between the A52 and A26 Also check the cables between the A51 LCD and A52 Ifthe cables are normal check the A51 LCD To Check the External Keyboard Procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E5070B E5071B rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Press key Press and keys on the external keyboard and verify that the cursor on the menu bar moves up and down If it doesn t work the external keyboard or the A20 digital motherboard may be faulty To Check the Mouse Procedure Connect the mouse to the E5070B E5071B rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Move the mouse and verify that the mouse pointer moves smoothly If it doesn t move smoothly check first whether a foreign substance dust lint etc is in the track b
371. o be operated as a talker listener or system controller on IEEE 488 interface bus Refer to To Check the GPIB on page 238 Handler I O port The Handler I O port can be used to transfer a comparator decision output data to and perform timing synchronization with an external handler Perform 7 Handler I O Board tests in Troubleshooting Using External Test on page 239 Step 1 Step 2 Figure 4 23 To Check the Device Driver Make sure first whether the E5070B E5071B device drivers are installed properly or not by the following procedure if a function of specific device in the E5070B E5071B doesn t work Exit from the E5070B E5071B measurement view in accordance with the procedure described in How to exit from the E5070B E5071B Measurement View on page 201 Then Windows desktop screen is displayed Click My Computer with the right button and select Properties as shown in Figure 4 23 Then the System Properties Figure 4 24 will appear Opening System Property Window Open Explore Search Manage Map Network Drive Disconnect Network Drive Create Shortcut Rename Properties e5070bse110 228 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Figure 4 24 System Properties Window General System Properties 127 xi Network Identification Hardware User Profiles Advanced System Microsoft Windows 2000 5 00 2195 Service P
372. o invoices In order for Agilent to provide these advantages please send a check or money order with each order Mail order forms and specific ordering information are available through your local Agilent sales office Addresses and telephone numbers are located in a separate document shipped with the manuals 288 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Exchange Assemblies Exchange Assemblies Under the rebuilt exchange assembly program certain factory repaired and tested assemblies are available on a trade in basis These assemblies are offered al lower cost than a new assembly but meet all factory specifications required of a new assembly The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the rebuilt exchange assembly program Any spare assembly stock desired should be ordered using the new assembly part number e 2 o D amp o U e m 7 Chapter 5 289 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx 42301396 and below Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Top View Major Assemblies Figure 5 1 Top View Major Assemblies e5070bse056 290 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List To
373. ocol TCP IP Properties dialog vbox click the OK button Figure D 4 8 Inthe Local Area Connection Properties dialog box click the OK button 3 in Figure D 3 9 Inthe Local Area Connection Status dialog box click the Close button 3 in Figure D 2 10 Click the x button 2 in Figure D 1 in the upper right of the Network and Dial up Connection window Step 2 Confirm the computer name of the E5070B E5071B 1 Press System key 2 Press Misc Setup Network Setup Network Identification 3 The System Properties dialog box as shown in Figure D 5 will appear Click the Properties button 1 in Figure D 5 510 Appendix D Figure D 5 Figure D 6 System Properties dialog box System Properties General Network Identification Hardware User Profiles Advanced e Windows uses the following information to identify your computer a onthe network Full computer name AGENA MPTYL8GOU Workgroup WORKGROUP To use the Network Identification Wizard to join a domain and create a local user click Network ID To rename this computer or join a domain click Properties J amp 5070buj043 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check 9 o E 5 lt 2 9 4 The Identification Change dialog box Figure D 6 appears Confirm the computer name in the Computer Name box 1 in Figure D 6 Identification Change dialog box Identification Change
374. of the E5070B E5071B therefore connect the mouse and the keyboard before turning on the power NOTE If you perform the following procedure incorrectly a message asking you whether to return to the previous registration screen and perform the registration appears In this case follow the instruction to return to the previous registration screen Step 1 Turns on the E5070B E5071B Step 2 The Windows 2000 Professional Setup wizard appears Click the Next button Figure B 1 Figure B 1 Windows 2000 Professional Setup wizard Windows 2000 Professional Setup Welcome to the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard Back Next e5070bqj001 Appendix B 493 w lt en 3 2 lt lt System Recovery Initial Registration of E5070B E5071B Step 3 In the Windows 2000 Professional Setup dialog box select the accept this agreement box and click the Next gt button Figure B 2 Then the Windows 2000 operating system is restarted automatically Figure B 2 Windows 2000 Professional Setup dialog box 100 Professional Setup License Agreement Do you accept the terms of the License Agreement for Windows 20002 P v Please read the following License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement To continue with Setup you must accept the agreement pee Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Licensed Copes END USER LICENSE AGREEM
375. ooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Figure 4 19 Internal Test dialog box Internal Test 03 00 x A2 Master DC Not Done Detail IV A2 Slave DC Not Done Detail a6 DC Not Done _ Detail A1DC Not Done _ Detail Al PLL Not Done _ Detail Al ALC Not Done _ Detail A3DC Not Done _ Detail Rch Power Gain Not Done Detail Step Attenuator Not Done _ Detail Select All Select None Copyright 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc e5070bse138 Step 11 All the test groups are preset to take effect If it is necessary to perform a specific test group or some test groups only check in click the check boxes for the desired test group s and clear the other check boxes NOTE Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Clicking Detail button displays the names of individual tests included in each test group Click Exit to return to the Internal Test dialog box Step 12 Click Start Test button to run the internal test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the internal test is in progress Step 13 When the internal test is completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test group as an example shown in Figure 4 20 Figure 4 20 Internal test result display example A2 Master DC Pass A2 Slave DC Pass Detail a6 DC Pass Detail A1 DC Pass Detail A1 PLL Pass Detail Pass Detail
376. or Turn the instrument on Del Press key as soon as the message Press TAB to show POST screen DEL to enter SETUP F12 to select BOOT DEVICE is displayed Wait a few seconds until the message Enter CURRENT Password appears Press key The LED in the key lights Enter password e507xa and press Enter J Then BIOS setup utility main menu is 264 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 px and below displayed as shown in Figure 4 61 Figure 4 61 BIOS setup utility main menu CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2881 Award Software gt Standard CMOS Features gt Frequency Voltage Control gt Advanced BIOS Features Load Setting 1 Defaults gt Advanced Chipset Features Load Setting 2 Defaults Integrated Peripherals Set Supervisor Password Power Management Setup Set User Password PnP PCI Configurations Save amp Exit Setup gt PC Health Status Exit Without Saving Esc Quit Select Item F10 Save amp Exit Setup Time Date Hard Disk Type Step 6 The BIOS setup utility has 14 selectable windows Brief descriptions and reference pages for these windows are provided in Table 4 14 The details of the BIOS option settings in each window are described on the page listed in the table Step 7 Select a desired window using keys To perform an operation use
377. or in the instrument status bar exhibits Ready in blue Do not operate front panel keys keyboard and mouse during the external test Changing the instrument settings while the external test is in progress will cause incorrect test results Connect a mouse to the rear panel connector Press Macro Setup key Press C gt C gt keys or click Load Project to select Load Project function Open dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 35 Open dialog box Open 2 x Look in E User D Al c Agilent Files of type vea Project Files Cancel 2 Select User D preset state from menu Lock in box Double click Agilent folder to open it and to access its menu Double click Service folder to open it Click External Test VBA program file to select it from program menu Click Open button to download the external test program Press P gt gt CD or click Select Macro to select Select Macro function Press or click Module1 main to open the Module1 main program file External Test window will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 36 This window shows the test items and their results 240 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 36 External Test Window External Test Rev A 03 00 X Tch Power Gain NotDone Test IF Ranging Not Done Test Receiver Linearity Not Done Test Dynamic Range Not Done Test Trac
378. ormance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 2 40 0 067 0 016 g 45 0 078 0 019 5 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 7 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Uncorrected System Performance Test Correction Off System Correction On Chapter 2 Port 1 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 25 Directivity 3G 6G lt 20 Directivity 6G 8 5G lt 15 Source match 3M 3G lt 25 Source match 3G 6G lt 20 Source match 6G 85G lt 15 169 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 85G lt 10 Transmission 3M 3G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 3G 6G 1 0 Tracking Transmission 6G 85G 1 0 Tracking Reflect
379. oting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Select Advanced Chipset Control using keys The current chipset control states are displayed as shown in Figure 4 76 Select Video boot type using 1 1 keys and change the setting to Disable Onboard Video by pressing keys and then return to Advanced Menu as shown in Figure 4 75 Figure 4 76 Advanced Chipset Control Sub menu fiduanced Chipset Control TUR Specific He cM Specific Ip Onboard Video 188 Select Onboard Video to enable the onboard Video boot type Primary Video PCI cc UGA Adapter Priority First the boot display Graphics Aperture 1 64 Mbl device Select either 512K or IMB of System Enable memory gap Disabled to be allocated to the onboard video controller ACS Audio Enabled Enbedded USB Device Enabled Select Enbedded USB Device 2 Enabled Disable Onboard Video egacy USB Support to disable the onboard EMI Reduction Enabled video controller No Susten Memory will be allocated for video 2 Select Iten Change Values Setup Defaults ie pe im Select gt Sub Menu Save and Exit e5070bse3017 NOTE When PCI Video Card has not been installed do not set Advanced Chipset Control Advanced OS Options Select Advanced OS Options using 1 J 1 keys The curr
380. ove for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above 4 1400 1334 1 CLAMP CABLE 5 1400 3360 2 CLAMP CABLE e 2 D ud D m 7 Chapter 5 371 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Removable Hard Disk Assemblies for E5070B S N MY424 1101and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Figure 5 56 Removable Hard Disk Assemblies for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above e5070bse4009 372 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Table 5 56 Removable Hard Disk Assemblies for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above 5071 S N MY42402455 and above Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 01254 1 HDD BOX 2 E5070 01253 1 INNER COVER 3 E5070 66534 1 INTERFACE BD PCA 4 0515 0430 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 5 0515 0430 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 6 0515 0430 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN TIO 7 0515 0372 1 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN TIO 8 E5070 66535 1 CONNECTOR BD PCA 9 E5070 01255 1 HDD BRACKET 10 0515 2028 2 SCREW MACH M2 5 x 6 FL T8 11 E5070 82201 1 HDD INSTALLED 12 E5070 25061 1 HEAT TRANSFER SHEET 13 E5070 61638 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 14 0515 2146 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 4 FL T10 15 0515 0374 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 10 PN T10 e 2 oO n Chapter 5 373 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Cover A
381. ove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Remove the three TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the fan plate Disconnect the fan cable from the fan amp switch control board Remove parts and cables which may block operation Remove the eight rivet plastic fastening the fan as shown in Figure 6 24 Fan 1 and 2 Removal e5070bse092 Step 1 Replacement Procedure Replace the fan by inverse procedure of removal NOTE Fasten the fan in the direction as shown in Figure 6 23 Chapter 6 423 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Replacement Procedure B1 Fan Replacement Fan 3 Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 25 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Disconnect the fan cable from the fan amp switch control board Remove parts and cables which may block operation Remove the three TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the fan assembly Slide the fan assembly as shown in Figure 6 25 Remove the four TORX T20 screws item 2
382. over Assembly HDD cover on top view TA LII 5 e5070bse4010 Table 5 36 Cover Assembly HDD cover on top view Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 4 E5070 01252 1 REMOVABLE HDD COVER 5 0515 2146 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 4 FL TIO 352 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others A28 FDD Assembly Figure 5 37 A28 FDD Assembly 5070 057 Table 5 37 A28 FDD Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 01203 1 HOLDER FDD 2 0950 3334 1 A28 FDD 3 5 3 E5070 04005 COVER FDD 4 0515 2146 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 4 FL T10 N N O A A 5 0515 2146 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 4 FL T10 e 2 D ud D m 7 Chapter 5 353 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY423 and below E5071B serial prefix JPIKK MY423 below Figure 5 38 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JPIKK MY423 and below 5071 serial prefix JPIKK MY423 and below e5070ase055 Table 5 38 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK 423 and below E5071B serial prefix MY423 and below Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5070 82201 1 HDD INSTALLED 2 E5070 01205 6 1 HOLDER HDD 3 5070 66530 6 1 DISK
383. own position press the switch to the popped up position SEE Press the standby switch to the pressed down position 1 This operation turns ON the power and the E5070B E5071B starts the self test Confirm that the self test indicates normal operation Normal operation is confirmed by the self test if no error message appears Turning the power OFF Use either of the following methods to turn OFF the E5070B E5071B e Press the standby switch 5 in the lower left part of the front panel now in the pressed down position to the popped up position e Send the shutdown command from an external controller These operations will start the 5070 5071 shutdown process required software hardware processes for turning the power off and the power will turn OFF after a few seconds Under normal circumstances always press the standby switch or send the shutdown command from the external controller to actuate the 5070 5071 shutdown process Never cut off the power supply directly by disconnecting the power cable plug from the rear panel of the unit If the power supply is cut off directly by disconnecting the power cable plug or by disconnecting the power supply to the AC outlet the shutdown process will not be carried out and there is a risk of damage to the software or hardware of the E5070B E5071B 520 Appendix E 4 Messages The E5070B 5071B can dis
384. own menu d Click OK button in the dialog box A o gt 4 201 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Troubleshooting To Troubleshoot the Instrument To Troubleshoot the Instrument This section describes basic procedural flow of troubleshooting when servicing the E5070B E5071B The primary procedural tool in this section is the flowchart The flowchart contains entire troubleshooting path from a failure symptom to the isolation of faulty assembly and will direct you to the completion of repair in an ordinary manner through the possible failure symptoms Reference letters Yes No on the flowcharts point to procedural steps that briefly explain the troubleshooting method to be performed next Primary Trouble Isolation The primary trouble isolation procedure can be performed without disassembling the E5070B E5071B Figure 4 2 shows the trouble isolation flow chart Turn the instrument power on About a few minutes after the 5070 507 is turned on the measurement view is displayed on the screen The display on the screen should be similar to Figure 4 12 Measurement view on page 213 Check the display e display appears on LCD after the E5070B E5071B is turned on go to Display troubleshooting on page 204 Ifthe E5070B E5071B stops in booting process despite something being displayed on the LCD go to
385. p View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Table 5 1 Top View Major Assemblies Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0950 4773 3 1 50 POWER SUPPLY 2 5070 66521 5 1 A21 ANALOG INTERFACE BOAR 3 5185 3792 9 1 A24 GPIB CARD 4 54810 66525 1 1 A26 LCD INTERFACE CARD 5 5070 66523 7 1 A23 HANDLER I O BOARD 6 See service note 1 1 A20 DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD E5070B 02D E5071B 02D 7 1818 8783 8 1 DIMM 32 64 8 04287 61001 8 1 FAN ASSY 9 See Table 5 37 1 A28 FDD ASSEMBLY 10 E5070 61004 9 1 FAN ASSY 11 E5070 61005 0 1 FAN ASSY 12 See Table 5 38 1 A27 MASS STORAGE DISK DRIVE ASSEMBLY 13 E4991 66505 7 1 5 CRYSTAL OVEN Opt 1 5 14 See Table 5 46 1 A6 RF SWITCH TEMP CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY Chapter 5 291 e 2 oO n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Top View Cables Figure 5 2 Top View Cables
386. placement Procedure Step 1 Remove the replaceable parts on the old board a Remove the DIMM modules as described in DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 below on page 404 20 D U O D Q b Disassemble the guide plate from rear side of the mother board Step 2 Assemble the removed parts on the new board Step 3 Install the new board by the reverse procedure of removal Figure 6 15 A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below 5071 JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below guide plate e5070bse086 Chapter 6 407 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru 4232
387. play error messages as well as messages that indicate the internal operating status of the equipment This appendix explains what these messages mean by listing them in alphabetical order Messages showing the status of the E5070B 5071B are displayed in the lower left area of the E5070B 5071B LCD screen These messages include error messages that occur during 521 Messages the execution of GPIB commands and others that indicate the internal status of the equipment Error messages are indicated following the character string Err can be read out by a GPIB command Other kinds of messages are indicated without the Err character string and cannot be read out by a GPIB command This section explains the meaning of each message and how to resolve the problem it indicates 522 Appendix F 20 168 240 22 148 Messages Additional standard needed Error Messages An error message is displayed against a red background in the instrument message warning area in the lower left part of the screen Pushing a front panel key or executing DISP CCL command clears the error message Errors caused by the operation of a front panel key simply appear on the display They are not stored in the error queue with some exceptions An error with a positive error number is one uniquely defined for this instrument On the other hand an error with a negative error number is basically one defined for common GPIB devices in IEE
388. problem or not The BIOS setup procedure is described in To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 264 To Identify the Motherboard Installed Confirm the splash screen is displayed in the beginning of the boot process as shown in Figure 4 7 Configure the Motherboard There is a jumper on the A20 digital motherboard that must be configured to the correct setting Confirm the jumper settings and set the jumpers correctly as shown in Figure 4 59 When the power shutdown occurs without a beep clear A20 CMOS and set BIOS according to the following procedure To clear A20 CMOS 1 Power off the system 2 Remove jumper from 1 1 pins 1 2 and put on JP1 pins 2 3 Wait for a few seconds and set JP1 back to its default setting pins 1 2 3 Power on the system 4 After powering on the system press 7 to enter the BIOS setup utility 262 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 cesi and below Figure 4 59 A20 digital motherboard jumpers location and settings
389. pter 2 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Direction 521 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0 091 0 019 55 0 106 0 022 60 0 125 0 022 65 0 151 0 025 70 0 189 0 025 75 0 248 0 028 80 0 346 0 028 85 0 509 0 030 90 0 785 0 030 95 1 248 0 032 100 2 008 0 032 Direction 12 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10 0 207 0 060 5 0 075 0 022 0 0 042 0 012 5 0 031 0 012 Chapter 2 149 I 9 5 9 3 D 2 o E n Lan oi Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 15 0 030 0 0087 20 0 035 0 0087 25 0 040 0 012 30 0 045 0 012 35 0 056 0 016 40 0 067 0 016 45 0 078 0 019 50 0
390. ptions 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G Frequency range Hz 10 Direction 514 Options 413 and 414 only IF bandwidth Hz lt 120 Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 System Dynamic Range Test Direction 521 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 3 156 3k lt 95 1 5G 3G 3k lt 97 Direction S12 Options 21 3 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB Chapter 2 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 1 5G 3G 3k lt 97 135 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Direction 32 Options 313 314 413 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Direction S23 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit AB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k
391. py Disk Drive Video Output GPIB Interface LAN Port Printer Parallel Port External Trigger Input and Handler I O Port Go to No Display Troubleshooting Display and Boot up Problems Display on screen Power on Go to Function Specific Troubleshooting Go to Booting Process Stop in booti 2 POOH proceso Troubleshooting Go to Troubleshooting 2 Power on self test pass Using Internal Test Go to Function Specific Troubleshooting o Check the LCD n case of display scan brightness and color problems Problems on Measurement Performance and Measurement Result Performance Test Internal test Go to Performance Test Performance test pass Failure Troubleshooting Internal test pass Go colnet Test Failure Troubleshooting Yes External test Go to External Test Failure 2 External test pass Troubleshooting e5070bse179 Chapter 4 203 Troubleshooting No Display troubleshooting No Display troubleshooting If the E5070B E5071B displays nothing despite it is powered from proper ac power line isolate the failure in accordance with the procedure shown in Figure 4 3 Connect the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B rear panel connector turn the power on and start trouble isolation The methods of trouble isolation are described in the procedural step 1105 Figure 4 3 No display trouble isolation procedure No Display Trouble Isolation start Check
392. r 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Table 2 27 Test setup Select Ports settings and calibration sequence Option Select Testsetup Calibration Termination and cable connection Ports Figure for calibration 3 4 Figure 2 69 Port 3 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 3 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 3 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Port 4 Open Open to Port 4 E Port 4 Short Short to Port 4 Port 4 Load Load to Port 4 5 Figure 2 68 Thru N N cable between Port 3 and Port 4 Perform Step 29 and 30 Record the test results in the performance test record port 4 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match Transmission tracking Reflection tracking test are as follows Response Port 4 Stimulus Port 3 Record the test results in the performance test record port 4 Figure 2 65 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B 0000 0000 c 0000 20 609 Go 200 mue N m N m Cable NN TIE TIL TL Lm OSL OSL f 5 m m m e5070bse036 Chapter 2 113 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST
393. r E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 above Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Cutting plier or scissors Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 17 for this procedure Remove the mouse the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are connected to the rear panel Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above on page 396 If it is a version where the E5070B 71B doesn t have the removable hard disk assembly skip this step Remove the following assemblies e 50 ATX Power Supply Assembly refer to A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement on page 400 e 23 Handler I O board refer to A23 Handler I O Board Replacement on page 402 e A21 Analog Interface board refer to A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement on page 440 e A24 GPIB board refer to A24 GPIB Card Replacement on page 442 e A26 LCD Interface Card refer to A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S N prefix MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JPIKK MY4232454 and below on page 444 Disconnect the following cables e Connected to the Front Panel item 1 Connected from the A10 Analog Mother Board item 2 e Connected from the A28 FDD item 3
394. r more effective operation and has different functions that are not part of the Windows operating system for ordinary PCs personal computers Therefore do not attempt to use the system in ways other than those described in this manual or to install Windows based software including anti virus software for ordinary PCs as doing so may cause malfunctions Also note the followings Do not update the Windows operating system installed in this machine to the Windows operating system for ordinary PCs Doing so will cause malfunctions Do not attempt to update VBA Visual Basic for Applications software installed in this machine to its equivalent developed for ordinary PCs Doing so will cause malfunctions Do not allow any computer virus to infect the system This machine has no virus check function nor anti virus software installed Agilent Technologies will not be held liable for any failure or damage arising from negligence regarding these prohibitions and warnings If the pre installed software is damaged somehow resulting in errant behavior by the machine perform a system recovery For further details of system recovery refer to Appendix B 20 Chapter 1 General Information Organization of Service Manual Organization of Service Manual ES 0 D 2 D m 5 x 5 Tabs are used to divide the major chapter and appendix of this manual The contents of each chapter and appendix in
395. r s FUNCTION switch to CALIBRATE e Press Zero Cal Cal then Cal A or Cal B as appropriate Wait for the operation to complete Record the DVM voltage reading as value A in the test record on page 30 All DVM readings in this procedure should be recorded showing five significant digits The reading on the power meter should be 0 000 0 001 dBm Switch the range calibrator RANGE to 300 uW Record the DVM voltage reading as value B in the test record Wait for the power meter reading to settle no settling drift within 20 seconds Record the power meter reading as value C in the test record Switch the range calibrator RANGE to 100 uW 28 Chapter 1 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 NOTE General Information Power Meter Accuracy Test Record the DVM voltage reading as value D in the test record Wait for the power meter reading to settle no settling drift within 20 seconds Record the power meter reading as value E in the test record If testing a dual channel power meter perform Step 7 through Step 19 for the other channel Perform the pass fail calculations indicated on the test record If a channel of the power meter does not pass this test the power meter cannot be used in applications that require Option G12 or H12 There are no adjustments that can be performed to improve the performance of the power meter Typically replacing the A6 measurement assembly associated with the failed channel
396. racteristics of the analog measurement section Table 4 3 External test group menu 1 Tch Power Gain 2 IF Ranging 3 Receiver Linearity 4 Dynamic Range 5 Trace Noise 6 Error Term 7 Handler I O Board Test equipment required for external test Table 4 4 shows the equipment required for performing the external test Table 4 4 Required equipment Required test equipment Qty Recommended model 8 Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in 1 N6314A E Fixed attenuator 10 dB N m N f 1 8491A B C H Calibration kit 1 85032 Type N coaxial Short termination 3 part of 85032F 85054D or part of 85033E 85050D with Type N adapter Handler I O test kit 1 E5070 65001 NOTE Required quantity of Short termination is 3 in addition to one included in the calibration kit Chapter 4 239 NOTE NOTE Figure 4 35 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test To Execute the External Test To isolate faulty board assembly in analog section execute the external test in accordance with the following procedure The test procedure needs to be performed using a mouse in addition to the front panel keys To perform the external test properly the following conditions must be met 1 Environmental temperature 23 C 5 C 2 Warm up status indicat
397. rd to the E5070B E5071B Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B E5071B Press the standby switch of the E5070B E507 1B to turn it on When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold of the keyboard until this screen disappears Agilent Technologies starting usse 0 c NOTE NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 e5061buj034 NOTE After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 484 Appendix B System Recovery System Recovery Step 6 The following screen appears Select Removable Devices with of the keyboard and press of the keyboard Boot Menu Hard Drive CD ROM Drive Network Boot LAN lt Enter Setup gt Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the create user backup image press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options for the E5070 71B Choose One of the following 1 Recover Factory Backup Image 2 Create User Backup Image vv 3 Recover User Backup Image 2 lt 4 Exit 3 Enter a Choice _
398. real number based command for which the parameter can be rounded exceeds the range of 9 9e37 to 9 9 37 for example This error occurs also when a numeric value other than a specified one is entered into a command in which the port number and CalKit number are specified as parameters and hence the parameters are not rounded Such commands are for example CALC FSIM BAL TOP BBAL PPOR SENS CORR COLL ACQ OPEN SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLT3 SENS CORR COLL CKIT ORD LOAD etc Data type error The parser has recognized a data element that must not exist Block data has been sent instead of numeric value data or character string data that had been expected for example E ECal module not in appropriate RF path This error occurs when an ECal command SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLTn or SENS CORR OFFS COLL ECAL xxxx is executed with the port on ECal module not connected correctly to the instrument Execution error An error associated with execution has been generated for which this instrument cannot specify the error message This code shows that an error associated with execution defined in 11 5 1 1 5 IEEE488 2 has occurred This error occurs also when a calibration measurement is aborted Exponent too large The absolute value of the exponent exceeds 32 000 see 7 7 2 4 1 IEEE488 2 524 Appendix F 178 170 31 76 102 104 103 100 101 257 Messages Expression data not allowed Expression data not
399. received at a position where this instrument does not accept one O Option not installed The command received has been ignored because of the mismatch between the contents of an option for this instrument and the command For example this error occurs when the source attenuator power range is set at a value other than zero SOUR POW ATT command in a model not having the extended power output option It also occurs when you try to enable the time domain function in a model not having the time domain option This holds true for the frequency offset option This error is not generated by front key operations Out of memory Insufficient memory is available in this instrument to perform the required operation P Parameter error When a parameter related error other than Errors 221 through 229 occurs that error is displayed Parameter not allowed 4 The number of parameters exceeds that required for the command For instance when a program message SENS 1 SWE TYPE LIN SEGM is sent instead of a correct program message with a command SENS1 SWE TYPE LIN which requires a parameter the instrument receives the message as the number of parameters is invalid See the command reference to confirm the required number of parameters Peak not found This error occurs when after specifying a peak and executing the CALC MARK FUNC EXEC and CALC FUNC EXEC commands the specified peak is not foun
400. rial prefix MY423 and below E5071B serial prefix JPIKK MY423 2 354 A4 Power Amp Module Assembly 7 356 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY421 E5071B serial prefix or DEA 357 8 Switch Assembly for 5070 serial prefix MY422 above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and bib eels ae eu e UEM bole sth Slats Mae cath 358 7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix or MY421 E5071B serial prefix JPIKK or MY421 Opt 214 314 414 2 eee RC E e 359 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix M Y422 and aboye Opt 214 isa Sen ote REOR SoA pad UE RO Rus 360 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above Opt 314 414 2 220522 2944 use eR RR bee cR Roe 361 RF Switch Tempereature Controller Assembly 362 A2 Receiver Board Assembly 0 5 0 0 escasas pe up Rr ERR epee 363 Receiver Module Assembly Opt 31 41 364 Analog Motherboard Assembly
401. rque 136 N cm 24 Chapter 1 General Information Required Equipment Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Critical specifications Recommended Model Qty Use Personal Computer Windows 95 98 NT4 or 2000 1 with GPIB board 5 0 or 6 0 P Performance Tests A Adjustment T Troubleshooting 2 Opt 050 and Opt 124 can be substituted for Opt 030 In this case a N m BNC f adapter is necessary 3 The accuracy of a standard E4419A B or E4418A B of 0 02 dB is adequate for all tests adjustment except Dynamic Accuracy Test This test requires a power meter with Option G12 or H12 that has been certified to a higer accuracy specification If an Option G12 or H12 power meter is not available a test is provide on Power Meter Accuracy Test on page 26 to verify the accuracy of a standard power meter Table 1 2 Alternative Test Equipment Equipment Critical specifications Model Qty Use Frequency Counter Frequency 50 MHz to 3 GHz Agilent 53131 2A with Opt 010 1 Accuracy lt 2 5 ppm and 030 Power Meter No Substitute Agilent 4418 3 1 Short Type N m Agilent 11512A 4 Load Type N m Agilent 909F Opt 012 4 P Performance Tests Adjustment T Troubleshooting 2 050 and Opt 124 can be substituted for Opt 030 In this case N m BNC f adapter is necessary 3 If an accurate measurement of the dynamic accur
402. rrected System Performance Test Chapter 7 467 n T 20 O m D Q D n Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Interface Board adjustments using Analog Interface in Spot Adjustment of the program Writing ID Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC 10 Analog No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process Motherboard 2 When the symptom of failure is out of specification perform the performance test A20 Digital Set jumpers and BIOS parameters on Inspect the Booting Process Motherboard the A20 For details see To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 262 A21 Analog Perform the following required Inspect the Booting Process To Check the Front Panel on page 230 To Check the External Trigger Input on page 233 A22 Front Panel No adjustment needed To Execute the External Test on page 240 Keyboard To Check the Front Panel on page 230 A23 Handler I O No adjustment needed To Execute the External Test on page 240 Board A24 GPIB Board No adjustment needed To Check the GPIB on page 238 USB USBTMC Interface Card No adjustment needed To Check the USB USBTMC Interface Card on page 238
403. rs access this Permissions folder over the network click Permissions To configure settings for Offline access to Cachi this shared folder click Caching SEO Remove Share Cancel Apply e5070buj048 5 Turn the E5070B E5071B power off 516 Appendix D m T 2 5 3 E Power Requirement 517 Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply Preparation for Power Supply Before turning on power to the equipment be sure to verify the following Power Requirements The E5070B E5071B requires the following power source Requirements Voltage 90 to 132 or 198 to 264 VAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption 350 VA Switched automatically by the E5070B E5071B in conformity to the voltage Power Cable In accordance with international safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet this cable grounds the instrument frame The type of power cable shipped with each instrument depends on country of destination Refer to Figure E 1 for the part numbers of the power cables available WARNING For protection from electrical shock the power cable ground must not be defeated The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective earth ground connection 518 Appendix E Figure E 1 Power cable options OPTION 90
404. rth ground by the supplied power cable with earth blade DO NOT Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away From Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them DO NOT Service Or Adjust Alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument Return the instrument to a Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that WARNING M LL WARNING CAUTION NOTE safety features are maintained Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followe
405. rth segment am Press 6 J 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 8 n to enter 6 000000001 GHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused an Press 8 J 5 Len to enter 8 5 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused ao Press 3 0 to set the number of sweep points to 30 Power will be focused ap Press 5 J 1 to set the power level to 5 dBm NOTE See Table 2 11 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B for serial prefix MY422 and above Table 2 11 E5071B Segment Table setting for serial prefix MY422 and above Start Stop Points Power 1 300 kHz 3 GHz 35 10 dBm 2 3 000000001 GHz 4 25 GHz 15 9 dBm 3 4 250000001 GHz 6 GHz 20 7dBm 4 6 000000001 GHz 8 5 GHz 30 5 dBm Step 6 Press Sweep Setup J C gt CHD CHD CHD C select Sweep Type Enter 10 set the Sweep type to Segment Response calibration Step 7 Press WD AW Cho CV and to select Cal Kit Step 8 Press lt gt lt gt CV and to select 85032F NOTE If Cal Kit is set to 85032F press lt gt QC Cv to select Restore Cal Kit Chapter 2 55 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Table 2 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Press C and to select Calibrate function Press C gt and Enter to select Response Thru
406. ructure into the E5070B E5071B Required equipment for the writing ID None Frequency Reference Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the 10 MHz frequency reference on the source board 3 195 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly Required equipment for frequency reference adjustment Description Recommended Model Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A Opt 010 Frequency Standard Agilent 5071A BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm Agilent p n 8120 1839 Oven Reference Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the frequency of the crystal oven on the crystal oven assembly Required equipment for the oven reference adjustment Description Recommended Model Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A Opt 010 Frequency Standard Agilent 5071A BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm Agilent p n 8120 1839 IF Range Gain Phase Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust difference of the gain and phase between neighbor IF ranges Required equipment for the F rang gain phase adjustment Description Recommended Model 6 dB Attenuator Agilent 8491A w Opt 006 and H60 N m N m Cable 61 cm Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 Source Power Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the output level from the source board 196 Chapter 3 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly Required equipment for t
407. run problem seems in the A21 analog interface board or the flat cable between the A21 and the A22 front panel keyboard In this case remove the E5070B E5071B outer cover and make sure whether the fans run or not If a beep and a power shutdown occur immediately after power is turned on there is a possibility that either of the fans won t run There are three system fans which are independently controlled by A6 RF switch temperature controller board These fans initially run fast after the power is turned on and usually stop after a while One or some of them restart running when the instrument warms up The power shutdown occurs the moment the system fan stops by any anomaly In this case check the A6 board and the fan that doesn t run If the power shutdown occurs without a beep the problem seems in the A21 or the A20 board Check BIOS status of A20 is correct as described in Configure the Motherboard on page 262 Before replacing the board check if the jumper setting on the A20 is correct as described in Configure the Motherboard on page 262 Check LED of Num Lock key Press Num Lock key on the keyboard If the LED in the key doesn t light as shown in Figure 4 4 a problem seems in the A20 digital motherboard gt LED of the Num Lock key o 2 Make sure the followings before replacing the 20 board Chapter 4 205 Step 4 NOTE Step 5 Step 6 Troubleshooting No
408. s fou can change the name and the membership of this computer Changes may affect access to network resources Full computer name AGENA MPTVL8GDU Member of C Domain Workgroup WORKGROUP More e5070buj044 22 C Cancel 5 Turn the E5070B E5071B power off and then turn it on 1 Press Save Recall and then press Explore Step 3 Set for sharing the hard disk C or D drive in the E5070B E5071B 2 The Windows Explorer opens Right click on C or USER D and then click Properties in the File menu 3 The C or USERS D Properties dialog box Figure D 7 appears Select the Sharing tab Appendix D 511 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Figure D 7 USERS D Properties dialog box General tab USER D Properties 2 x General Tools Hardware Sharing Label USER Type Local Disk File system FAT32 Wi Used space 6 668 288 bytes 6 35 MB Free space 3 145 629 696 bytes 2 92 GB Capacity 3 152 297 984 bytes 2 93 GB Drive D Disk Cleanup Apply e507 0buj047 4 Select the Share this folder if C is selected Click the New Share button 1 in Figure D 8 Figure D 8 USERS D Properties dialog box Sharing tab General Tools Hardware Sharing You can share this folder among other users on your Ex network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder C
409. s are displayed If a serious problem is found in the scandisk reinstall the operating system For details of the operating system installation refer to Appendix B System Recovery on page 473 If the operating system still doesn t boot up properly after reinstallation replace the A27 Chapter 4 211 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below NOTE The operating system automatically checks the device drivers which are necessary to use the E5070B E5071B functions and are installed in the system before the E5070B E5071B is shipped from Agilent factory If the operating system doesn t detect them a message box is displayed In this case install the device driver Figure 4 11 Step 5 NOTE Revision and option information The firmware revision and hardware option information along with copyright declaration is displayed as shown in Figure 4 11 The E5070B E5071B firmware quickly starts up just before this display appears While the revision and option information is displayed the applications of various devices in the system are initialized Firmware revision and option information Agilent Technologies 50718 Network Analyzer Rev A 03 00 Build Jul 24 2002 09 46 49 Option 414 010 016 1E5 Copyright C 2001 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc Portions C Copyright 1996 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserv
410. s received in the same program message See 6 5 7 5 7 IEEE488 2 Queue overflow The queue contains a specific code in place of the code which caused this error The code indicates that the error occurred because of no space available in the queue but the error is not recorded Appendix F 531 105 106 33 57 50 23 21 51 26 150 Messages Recall failed R Recall failed This error occurs when reading an instrument status file StateO1 sta etc MMEM LOAD STAT command fails S Save failed This error occurs when writing an instrument status file StateO1 sta etc MMEM STOR STAT command fails Selected parameter not valid for confidence check This error occurs when the mix mode S parameter has been selected for the S parameter you want to check while using the confidence check function for calibration coefficient SnP request not valid for selected measurement This error occurs when you try to save data to a Touchstone file but no measurement has been executed This error also occurs when you try to save a Touchstone file with power sweep measurement specified or with the frequency offset function set to ON Specified channel hidden This error occurs when an attempt is made to activate a channel not on display using the DISP WIND command This error is not generated by front key operations Specified error term does not exist The error occurs when the calibration coeffici
411. screws item 9 fastening the A51 LCD display to the front panel Replacement Procedure Replace the A51 LCD display by inverse procedure of removal Fasten the TORX T15 screws item 9 using a torque screwdriver set to 1 02 N m 9 0 lb in When you have replaced the LCD on a E5070B E5071B equipped with an Option 016 touch screen you have to calibrate the touch screen Follow the procedure described on Calibration of the Touch Screen on page 391 458 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above E5071B S N MY42402455 and above Figure 6 43 A51 LCD Removal E5070B S N MY4241101 and above E5071B S N MY4242455 and above 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D 2 50706 5009 Chapter 6 459 Figure 6 44 Step 1 Step 2 Replacement Procedure LCD Backlight Replacement LCD Backlight Replacement Tools Required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 44 for this procedure Remove the A51 LCD display as described in A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JPIKK MY42300632 thru MY4231100 E5071B S N prefix MY42301397 thru M
412. ssembly 1 Figure 5 57 Cover Assembly e5070bse5002 Table 5 57 Cover Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61657 8 1 FLAT CBL ASSY Opt 016 2 0515 0374 4 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 10 PN T10 Opt 016 3 5183 4184 2 1 CNTR TOUCH PANEL Opt 016 4 0515 0430 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 Opt 016 5 1400 3156 4 2 SADDLE EDGE Opt 016 6 5070 00621 8 1 COVER 7 0515 0430 2 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 374 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Cover Assembly 2 Figure 5 58 Cover Assembly 25070bse5003 Table 5 58 Cover Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61628 3 1 WIRE ASSY 2 1400 1334 6 2 CLAMP CABLE 3 1400 1391 1 CLAMP CABLE 4 E5070 6653 1 7 1 LCD ADAPTER 5 1400 0611 0 1 CLAMP CABLE for E5070B S N MY42401101 and above for E5071B S N MY42402455 and above 6 1400 0611 0 1 CLAMP CABLE 7 E5070 61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY e 2 o D amp o U e m 7 Chapter 5 375 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Label on Rear Face Figure 5 59 Label on Rear Face UPTIUNTES joe OPTTONDTE id UPTURTA 0718 WARNING No oparato e5070bse073 Table 5 59 Label on Rear Face Ref Agilent Part Number C D Q
413. standard But it exceeds the amount that can be processed under the condition of the memory or conditions specific to memory related devices In this instrument this error occurs when the number of characters exceeds 254 in a character string parameter Appendix F 533 54 211 300 113 34 30 71 Messages Transform Gate not allowed Transform Gate not allowed This message appears when you turn on the gating conversion function of the time domain feature while frequency offset is enabled measurement points are set to two or sweep type is set to other than linear sweep Turn off the frequency offset SENS OFFS OFF command set the measurement points to three or more and the sweep type to linear sweep and then turn on the gating conversion function Trigger ignored This instrument receives and detects a trigger command TRIG or an external trigger signal But it is ignored due to the timing condition This instrument is not in the wait for trigger state for example Change the setup so that a trigger command or an external trigger signal can be sent after the instrument has entered the wait for trigger state U Unable to estimate adapter length Adapter length can not be estimated at zero span Change the frequency span other than 0 Undefined header A command not defined in this instrument though not illegal in the syntactic structure has been received For example when a message DISP WIND1 TAB
414. surement uncertainty dB 6 0 75 0 21 5 0 75 0 20 4 0 75 0 19 3 0 75 0 18 2 0 75 0 18 1 0 75 0 17 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 Chapter 2 159 U 3 9 E D 2 n Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 15 0 75 0 17 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude Direction 521 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 001 6G 3k lt 0 003 7 5G 3k 0 003 856 3k lt 0 005 Direction 12 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 1 3 G 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25 G 3k lt 0 001 6G 3k lt 0 003 7 5 G 3k lt 0 003 8 5G 3k lt 0 005 Direction 23 Option 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth
415. t 0 001 Crosstalk Test Direction 21 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 12 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 146 2 Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Performance Tests E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 523 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G Frequency range Hz 10 Direction 514 Options 413 and 414 only IF bandwidth Hz lt 120 Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 System Dynamic Range Test Direction 521 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 3
416. t Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B aa aa a000 aa oc 0000 aa eas 0000 gt QOO U V N m N m Cable e5070bse012 Step 19 Perform the response calibration for each of the Select Ports settings shown in the third and fourth rows in Table 2 12 Crosstalk measurement Step 20 Press and verify that Correction is set to ON Step 21 Disconnect the N N cable and connect an N type coaxial Short termination to each test port as shown in the following figures Chapter 2 57 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Opt 213 214 Figure 2 15 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 16 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 15 Crosstalk test setup Opt 213 214 5070 5071 e5070bse013 Figure 2 16 Crosstalk test setup Opt 313 314 5070 5071 e5070bse014 58 Chapter 2 Figure 2 17 e5070bse015 NOTE Table 2 13 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Crosstalk test setup Opt 413 414 E5070B 5071B
417. t Procedure Insert the whole jut of the rubber key into the hole on the new 22 front panel keyboard Replace the A22 front panel keyboard by inverse procedure of removal 448 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S N prefix JP1KK MY4231100 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK MY4232454 and below Figure 6 38 A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal E5070B S N prefix JP1KK or S N MY42300632 and below E5071B S N prefix JP1KK or S N MY42301396 and below 2 20 D U E5070B S N MY42300633 thru 4231100 E5071B S N MY42301397 thru MY4232454 D e5070bse3013 Chapter 6 449 Step 1 Step 2 N
418. t Segment Table Enter The first Start frequency entry box in the Segment Sweep table will be focused m D a 3 5 b Press in the ENTRY block The softkey menu title area is displayed in blue c Press CY C select List Power to set the list Power function to ON The row Power for setting appears in the segment table d Press in the ENTRY block The window frame of the segment table is displayed as bright e For the E5070B proceed to the next Step f For the E5071B skip to Step j or Step x E5070B f Press 0 0 to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused g Press J to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused h Press 5 0 to set the number of sweep points to 50 Power will be focused i Press 1 9 set the power level to 10 dBm NOTE See Table 2 9 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5070B Table 2 9 E5070B Segment Table setting Start Stop Points Power 1 300 kHz 3 GHz 50 10 dBm E5071B for serial prefix MY421 or j Press 0 0 to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused k Press 4 2 5 to enter 4 25 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused Chapter 2 53 NOTE Table 2 10 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST 4 250000001 G
419. t been found by the time the sweep is finished with the tracking executed This warning message is displayed also when with the bandwidth marker displayed the setting for the bandwidth marker is changed at the end of the sweep or when with the active marker changed or moved the bandwidth is not found Transform Gate not allowed This message appears when you have set the measurement points to two sweep type to other than linear sweep or frequency offset to enabled while the gating conversion function of the time domain feature is turned on If this message is displayed the gating conversion function is automatically turned off User Preset File not found This warning message is displayed if no user preset file D UserPreset sta exists when executing the SYST UPR command If this message is displayed a normal preset SYST PRES will be performed 4 Appendix F 537 Messages User Preset File not found 538 Appendix F REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products applications services and for a current sales office listing visit our web site http www agilent com find tmdir You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative 21 01 2004 United States Test and Measurement Call Center tel 1 800 452 4844 fax 1 888 900 8921 Canada Test and Measurement Call Cent
420. t e b ta aer BEER ELEM 478 Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below 5071 JPIKKxxxxx 42301396 and 27 481 15 Contents Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 cie estes esc ee es a et lars 484 Procedure to execute the user recovery function for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx 42301396 and 487 Procedure to execute the user recovery function for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above rete ce dec ee er Rc e ER RIDE 490 Initial Registration of 5070 5071 493 Calibration of the Touch 496 C Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 06 51 498 Required Equipment Spee eae hha be bene ened bere go 498 How to make E5070B E5071B Firmware Installation Disk 498 How to update the E5070B E5071B firmware 2 499 Firmware Update for revision A 08 01 and 08 11 501 Required Equipment ea
421. t key execute log off and re login as agena 3 When prompted for a password enter the password e507xa into the Password box then click OK Figure C 5 Password Box 504 Appendix C Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 09 10 or later 4 Press Cancel if you are asked to insert a disk into drive A and select the D drive from Look in 5 Confirm that E5070 msi is displayed at the File name column Select it then press the Open button and the Windows installer will appear Step 7 After installation is fininshed the instrument will be restarted and the measurement view will appear Step 8 Press Firmware Revision Confirm the firmware revision you have just installed Figure C 6 Firmware Revision soft key Step 9 To unplug USB mass storage device press Ctrl amp ESC on the keyboard The Windows toolbar should appear There should be the Unplug Eject Hardware a green arrow icon in the system tray Figure C 7 Windows toolbar Step 10 Left click on the icon to stop USB mass storage device or right click on the icon then Unplug or eject to show Unplug or Eject Hardware screen 21 E z 9 505 Firmware Update Firmware Update for revision A 09 10 or later Figure C 8 Unplug or eject hardware 506 Appendix C 9 o E 5 lt 2 9 Computer Virus Check This
422. t limit AB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 15G 4G 10 lt 122 46 66 10 lt 118 66 7 56 10 lt 113 75G 85G 10 106 3M 1 5G 3k 95 1 5G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 93 6G 7 5G 3k lt 88 7 5G 8 5G 3k lt 81 164 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY421 or JP1KK Direction 523 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 15G 10 lt 120 1 5G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 118 6G 7 5G 10 lt 113 750 856 10 lt 106 A 3M 15G 3k lt 95 3 1 5G 4G 3k 97 3 4G 6G 3k lt 93 A 6G 7 5G 3k lt 88 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 81 Direction S41 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 118 6G 7 5G 10 lt 113 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 106 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 1 5G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 93 6G 7 5G 3k lt 88 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 81 Direction S14 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 118 6G 7 5G 10 lt 113 Chapter 2 165 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix M
423. tal attenuation for the A1 and A2 attenuators is 15 dB Perform Step 16 through 19 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 15 dBm using the following equation D A DAI5 Tx DA10 Pm DA15 Pm DA10 The records for 10 dBm are used as the reference values in the dynamic accuracy calculation Record the calculated value in the calculation sheet Running D A dB column for DA15 Record the same value in the True D A dB column in the calculation sheet Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 10 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 10 Chapter 2 87 Step 26 Step 27 Step 28 Step 29 NOTE Step 30 Step 31 Step 32 Step 33 NOTE NOTE Step 34 Step 35 Step 36 Step 37 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST The total attenuation for the Al and A2 attenuators is 20 dB Perform Step 16 through 19 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 20 dBm using the following equation D A Tx DA20 Tx DA10 Pm DA20 Pm DA10 Record the calculated value in the calculation sheet Running D A dB and True dB columns for DA20 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 0 dB and the second attenuator A2 to 20 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at_a 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 20
424. tep 9 Step 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test To perform the internal test properly the following conditions must be met 1 Environmental temperature 23 C 5 C 2 Warm up status indicator in the instrument status bar exhibits Ready in blue Do not operate front panel keys keyboard and mouse during the internal test Changing the instrument settings while the internal test is in progress will cause incorrect test results Connect a mouse to the rear panel connector Press Macro Setup key Press CV gt CY Enter keys or click Load Project to select Load Project function Open dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 18 Open dialog box pen L2 1x use _____ Agilent Files of type vea Project Files Cancel 2 Select User D preset state from menu in the Lock in box Double click Agilent folder to open it and to access its menu Double click Service folder to open it Click Internal Test VBA program file to select it from program menu Click Open button to download the internal test program Press P gt CY 5 CV or click Select Macro to select Select Macro function Press or click Module1 main to open the Module1 main program file Internal Test dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 4 19 The dialog box shows the menu of test groups to choose from 220 Chapter 4 Troublesh
425. tep Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S N prefix MY422 and above E5071B S N prefix MY422 and above Option 214 314 and 414 Tools Required e TORX screwdriver T10 T15 and T20 e Flat edge screwdriver e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 27 for Opt 214 and Figure 6 28 for Opt 314 or 414 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx 42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx 42301396 and below on page 384 or Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 on page 386 Remove the three TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the fan plate Disconnect the semi rigid cables item 2 and 3 from the A7 source step attenuator The label on the semi rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number Disconnect the flat cable item 4 from the attenuator Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 5 fastening the A7 source step attenuator holder from the front side Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 6 fastening the A7 source step attenuator to the holder Replacement Procedure Fasten the new source step attenuator to the holder as shown in Figure 6 27 or Figure 6 28 Replace the A7 source step attenuator holder by inverse procedure of removal Fasten t
426. ter 4 271 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 below Figure 4 66 Integrated Peripheral window CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2881 Award Software Integrated Peripherals gt IDE Mode Setup Press Enter On Chip Primary PCI IDE Enabled On Chip Secondary PCI IDE Enabled USB Controller Enabled USB Keyboard Support Enabled USB Mouse Support Enabled Init Display First PCI Slot ACS Audio Enabled gt Onboard 1 0 Chip Setup Press Enter Item Help Menu Level To setup the PIO mode and DMA of each IDE channels f4 Move Enter Select PU PD Value 10 5 F1 General Help F5 Previous Values F6 Setting 1 Defaults Table 4 17 IDE Mode Setup gt IDE Primary Master PIO gt IDE Primary Slave gt IDE Secondary Master gt DE Secondary Slave PIO gt DE Primary Master UDMA gt IDE Primary Slave UDMA gt DE Secondary Master UDMA gt DE Secondary Slave UDMA On Chip Primary PCI IDE On Chip Secondary PCI IDE USB Controller USB Keyboard Support USB Mouse Support Init Display First AC97 Audio Onboard I O Chip Setup 272 Auto Auto Auto Auto Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled PCI Slot Enabled Setting 2 Defaults Chapter 4 Table 4 17 NOTE CAUTIO
427. the following equation True D A Running D A dB DA25 True D A dB DA20 When the A2 decade attenuator setting is increased from X dB to X10 dB calculate the True D A value as follows True D A X 10 Running D A X 10 True D A X Where True D A X 10 True value when A2 X 10 dB Running D A X 10 Running D A value when A2 X 10 dB True X True value when 1 10 dB and 2 dB m D m 3 5 Record the true D A in the calculation sheet True D A column for DA25 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 10 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 20 Perform Step 16 through 19 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 30 dBm using the following equation D A Tx DA30 Tx DA20b Pm DA30 Pm DA20b Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running D A dB column for DA30 Calculate the true dynamic accuracy using the following equation True D A Running D A dB DA30 True D A dB DA20 Record the true D A in the calculation sheet True D A column for DA30 Subsequently perform Step 29 through 45 for the attenuator settings of 35 dB to 100 dB DA30a to DA100 shown in Table 2 22 Z5623A attenuator settings A1 setting A2 setting GPIB command dB dB DA10 0 10 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUT
428. the keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLT ALT DEL to restart your system If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 486 Appendix B System Recovery System Recovery Procedure to execute the user recovery function for E5070B JPIKKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Returns the contents of the C drive to a user specified state To use this function you must create the user backup image in advance For more information see the description Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B MY42300632 and below E5071B JPIKKxxxxx MY42301396 and below on page 481 NOTE This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation Step 1 Shut down the E5070B E5071B Step 2 Connect the keyboard to the E5070B E5071B Step 3 Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B E5071B Step 4 Press the standby switch of the E5070B E5071B to turn it on Step 5 When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold of the keyboard until this screen disappears 3 Agilent Technologies starting EN E 5 4 4 E 3 2
429. the performance test record Test result column for the level accuracy test RF output level flatness test a Record the power meter reading same as that in Step 5 b in the calculation sheet Power meter reading Ref column for the level flatness test 38 Chapter 2 NOTE Performance Tests 2 RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST b Press Center 1 J 0 J change the E5070B E5071B center frequency to 10 MHz which is the first one of the frequency flatness test frequencies listed in Table 2 2 Table 2 2 RF output level flatness test conditions Agilent E5070B E5071B Center Frequency E5070B E5071B 10 MHz 550 MHz 1 05 GHz 1 55 GHz 2 05 GHz 3 GHz E5071B only 4 25 GHz 5 05 GHz 6 05 GHz 7 05 GHz 8 05 GHz 8 5 GHz m D m 3 5 The RF output level is measured at the minimum maximum and proper frequencies other than the source adjustment frequencies within the specified frequency range c Press C and to make a Single sweep measurement d Wait for the power meter reading to settle Then record the reading in the calculation sheet Power meter reading a column e Change the E5070B E5071B center frequency in accordance with Table 2 2 and perform Step 6 c and 6 d for each frequency f Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the calculated test results in the performance test r
430. the test program with a proper file name Test Program Sub Main 60 Chapter 2 Dim Ver As String Dim MaxValA As Variant Dim MaxValB As Variant MaxValE As Variant Ver Name If Ver SCPI CALCulate 1 SCPI CALCulate 1 SCPI CALCulate 1 SCPI CALCulate 1 SCPI CALCulate 1 SCPI CALCulate 1 E5070B Then PA SI SI ected Function jected Function ected Function jected Function MaxValC As Variant Rameter 1 SELect N v 3 5 O DOMain STARt 3000000 a N DOMain STOP 3000000000 ee DOMain STATe True EXECute Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST ected Function TYPE MAX MaxValD As Variant MaxValA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA frmCrossTalkl txtVal Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValA 0 frmCrossTalkl Show ElseIf Ver E5071B Then SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function TYPE MAX SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 30000004 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 3000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValB SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 3000000000 SCPI CAL
431. this case the E5070B E5071B may have a problem around the A27 Chapter 4 209 4 a 2 2 e e Figure 4 8 Message of Boot Failure Intel R Boot Agent Version 4 0 14 Copyright C 1997 2888 Intel Corporation CLIENT MAC ADDR 88 38 64 81 56 57 GUID 9C4D3388 CE32 11D6 049C 883865481555 PXE E53 No boot filename received PXE M F Exiting Intel PXE ROM DISK BOOT FAILURE INSERT SYSTEM DISK AND PRESS ENTER Check whether the A27 has a problem or is not using BIOS setup utility as shown in Figure 4 9 For details of how to run the BIOS setup utility refer to Run the BIOS setup utility on page 264 Move the cursor to Integrated Peripherals using keys on the keyboard and press Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Figure 4 9 Auto Detect Hard Disk page CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2881 Award Software Integrated Peripherals gt IDE Mode Setup Press Enter Item Help PCI IDE Enabled On Chip Primary n Chip Secondary PCI IDE Enabled Menu Level gt USB Controller Enabled USB Keyboard Support Enabled To setup the PIO mode USB Mouse Support Enabled and DMA of each IDE Init Display First PCI Slot channels ACS Audio Enabled gt Onboard 1 0 Chip Setup Press Enter Enter Select PU PD Value F1 Save ESC Exit F1 General Help F5 Previous Values F6 Setting 1 Defaults Setting 2 Defaults 210 Troubles
432. this manual is as follows Chapter 1 General Information The Service Manual is a guide to servicing the E5070B E5071B ENA Series Network Analyzer The manual contains information requisite to do performance tests adjustments troubleshooting and repairs Chapter 2 Performance Tests This chapter provides information on how to verify the E5070B E5071B performance Chapter 3 Adjustment This chapter provides the adjustment information for the E5070B E5071B ENA Series Network Analyzer to ensure that the it is within its specifications The adjustment must be performed Agilent s qualified service personnel If you need the adjustment for your E5070B E5071B it should be sent to the nearest Agilent Technologies service office Chapter 4 Troubleshooting This chapter provides procedure to isolate a faulty assembly in the E5070B E5071B Network Analyzer Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the E5070B E5071B ENA Series RF Network Analyzers Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure This chapter provides procedure for removing and replacing the major assemblies in the E5070B E5071B ENA Series Network Analyzer Chapter 7 Post Repair Procedures This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the E5070B E5071B operation after an assembly is replaced with a new one Appendix A Manual Changes This appendix contai
433. thru MY4232454 Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru 4231100 E5071B MY42301397 thru MY4232454 Tools required TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 e flat edge screwdriver Procedure Refer to Figure 6 3 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 382 Step 2 Release the cable item 8 from the cable clamp item 1 Step 3 Remove the top trim item 2 using a flat edge driver Step 4 Remove the eight TORX T15 screws item 3 fastening front panel Step 5 Gradually push the front panel assembly towards the outside Step 6 Release the mylar cable item 4 from the cable clamp item 5 Step 7 Disconnect the three cables item 6 7 and 8 from the front panel NOTE Keep the mylar cable item 4 connected 386 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Front Panel Removal for E5070B MY42300633 thru MY4231100 E5071B MY 42301397 thru MY4232454 Figure 6 3 Front Panel Removal 2 D D 3 2 U E o o D gt el jp e elo e5070bse3020 Chapter 6 387 Replacement Proce
434. ting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Exit menu for Load Setup Defaults PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Security Power Boot Specific Help Exit Saving Chances Exit Discarding Changes Load Setup Defaults Discard Changes Seve Changes CMOS Restore Condition Save CMOS to Flash Erase CMOS from Flash Restore CMOS from Flesh F1 Help tl Select ltem Change Values F9 Setup Defaults ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Execute Command F10 Save and Exit 5 61 5 Advanced Menu The Advanced Menu shown below is displayed by choosing Advanced using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press le key Advanced Menu Seo Wang Setting items on this menu to incorrect values may cause your system to malfunction Advanced Version Information Advanced Boot Options Advanced HOD Options Advanced Chipset control Advanced OS Options System Monitoring Cache Control PC Configuration VO Device Configuration 1 Select item le Change Values Setup Defauts ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit 95061259054 gt gt gt gt gt gt e Advanced Chipset Control for PCI Video Card Chapter 4 283 7 Troublesho
435. tion FW 3 60 and above and press Servise Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function FW 3 54 and above Set System Correction function to ON in accordance with the following procedure a Press System gt C gt CN 5 C CY GD GAD CN D CY select Service Menu Enter b Confirm that the System Correction is ON If it is OFF proceed to the next c and d c Press C select System Correction OFF Erter d The message box is displayed Then press OK button The System Correction function will be changed to ON Press and select Log Mag from display format menu Set the test frequencies using the Segment Table as follows a Press Sweep Setup J lt gt Ct 5 C 5 CHD CH C select Edit Segment Table Enter The first Start frequency entry box in the Segment Sweep table will be focused b Press to enter 3 MHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused c Press 0 to enter 10 MHz as the stop frequency Points will be Chapter 2 99 NOTE NOTE Table 2 25 NOTE NOTE Table 2 26 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST automatically set to 2 d Press C gt S to focus on the Start frequency of the second segment e Press 0 to enter 50 MHz The Stop frequency will be focused f For the E5070B proceed to the next
436. to 3G Hz e5070bse173 Figure 2 58 Transmission Tracking for E5071B UNCORRECTED SYSTEM ki xi 3M to 3G Hz 3G to 6 G Hz 6 G to 8 5 G Hz e5070bse174 1 Record the displayed values in the performance test record Test results dB column in Port 1 table for the uncorrected system performance test 106 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Reflection Tracking test for port 1 m Set Parameter Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2 59 Figure 2 59 Reflection Tracking test window UNCORRECTED SYSTEM _ gt Parameter Reflection Tracking Response 1 Stimulus Port 2 ok I About U e5070bse175 A 9 n Press OK button The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in 8 Figure 2 60 or Figure 2 61 9 Figure 2 60 Reflection Tracking for E5070B 2 3M to 36 Hz EIST e5070bse176 Figure 2 61 Reflection Tracking for E5071B UNCORRECTEDSYSTEM laxVal dB 3M to 36 He 36 to 66 Hz 6 G to 8 5 G Hz e5070bse177 o Record the displayed values in the performance test record Test results dB column in Port 1 table for the uncorrected system performance test Test procedure for other test setups Step 30 Connect the N N cable as shown in the following figures Option 213 214 Figure 2 62 Option 313 314 Figure 2 63 Option 413 414 F
437. top Points Power 300 kHz 3 GHz 50 10 dBm E5071B for serial prefix MY421 or Press 0 0 to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused Press 4 2 8 Gin to enter 4 25 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused Press 0 x1 to set the number of sweep points to 50 Power will be focused Press 1 9 to set the power level to 10 dBm Press lt gt S to focus on the Start frequency of the second segment Press 4 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 Gn to enter 4 250000001 GHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused Press 6 Jto enter 6 GHz as the stop frequency The Points will be focused Press 0 to set the number of sweep points to 20 Power will be focused Press to set the power level to 8 dBm Press CV S S to focus on the Start frequency of the third segment Press 8 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 61 to enter 6 000000001 GHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused Press 8 J 5 Gin J to enter 8 5 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused Press 3 2 x1 to set the number of sweep points to 30 Power will be focused Press 6 to set the power level to 6 dBm Chapter 2 67 NOTE Table 2 15 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RA
438. ttings m D a 3 5 S Parameter Measure Test setup setting SVC Opt 213 214 Opt 313 314 Opt 413 414 12 Tl Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 38 531 T3 Not required Figure 2 37 Figure 2 39 S41 T4 Not required Not required Figure 2 40 Chapter 2 93 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 35 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 213 214 E5070B 5071B GPIB Controller Cable 6dB Fixed Attenuation GPIB Interface Cable 25623 1 Power Meter E HE peers Ol Power Sensor e5070bse024 Figure 2 36 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B GPIB Controller aa aa 9 0000 cu 0000 aa 6019 amp 000 000 7724 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable Z5623A H01 Power Sensor e5070bse025
439. tures System BIOS Cacheable Enabled Item Help Video BIOS Cacheable Enabled CPU Latency Timer Enabled Menu Level gt Delayed Transaction Enabled AGP Graphics Aperture Size 64MB1 Allows caching of the Write Protection Disabled system BIOS ROM On Chip Video Window Size Disabled resulting in better sustem performance 74 gt lt Enter Select PU PD Value 10 5 ESC Exit Fi General Help F5 Previous Values Setting 1 Defaults Setting 2 Defaults Table 4 16 System BIOS Cacheable Enabled Video BIOS Cacheable Enabled CPU Latency Timer Enabled Delayed Transaction Enabled AGP Graphics Aperture Size 64MB FWH Write Protection Disabled On Chip Video Window Size Disabled 1 The setting is different from that of Load Setting 2 Defaults on page 266 Integrated Peripherals A 2 2 Integrated Peripherals options are displayed by choosing Integrated Peripherals using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 66 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 17 If there is any difference select it using 1 and 1 keys and change the option setting by pressing 5 or 8 8 keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press le key Chap
440. ty Description Desig 1 E5070 87107 7 1 LABEL E5070B E5071 87102 2 1 LABEL E5071B 2 5185 3713 5 1 LABEL OPTION 213 5185 3714 6 1 LABEL OPTION 214 5185 3715 7 1 LABEL OPTION 313 5185 3716 8 1 LABEL OPTION 314 5185 3717 9 1 LABEL OPTION 413 5185 3718 0 1 LABEL OPTION 414 5185 3720 4 1 LABEL OPTION 016 5185 3722 6 1 LABEL OPTION 1 5 5080 3939 5 1 LABEL OPTION 010 5185 3719 1 LABEL OPTION 015 5185 3795 1 LABEL OPTION 008 3 E5070 87103 3 1 LABEL NOTE for Switch 376 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Others Other Parts Table 5 60 Other Parts Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description E5070 900x0 6 1 USER S GUIDE E5070 900x1 7 1 INSTALLATION AND QUICK START GUIDE E5070 900x2 8 1 PROGRAMMER S GUIDE E5070 900x3 9 1 VBA PROGRAMMER S GUIDE 5070 903 0 7 l SERVICE MANUAL E5070 9050x 1 1 CD ROM DOCUMENTATION 1150 7846 6 1 MOUSE 1150 7970 7 1 KEYBOARD The number indicated by x in the part number of each manual sample program disk or CD ROM 0 for the first edition is incremented by 1 each time a revision is made The latest edition comes with the product 2 Opt OBW only e 2 o D amp o U e m 7 Chapter 5 377 Figure 5 60 Replaceable Parts Power Cables and Plug Configurations Power Cables and Plug Configurations Power Cables and Plug Configurations OPTION 900 United Kingdo
441. ubleshooting Using External Test NOTE Clicking Select All button checks all the check box Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box Figure 4 38 THRU 1 amp 2 dialog box Connect THRU between Port 1 and Port 2 Cancel e5070bse120 c Connect an type N m coaxial cable to the test ports in accordance with Table 4 5 Table 4 5 Tch Power Gain tests setups Test name Objective of the test Connect an N Freq and IFBW settings cable between Automatic 12 Source power for port 2 Port 1 and Port2 50 MHz 3 GHz 6GHz 10 and test channel kHz BW receiver gain for port 1 521 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz 3 GHz 6GHz 10 and test channel kHz BW receiver gain for port 2 531 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port3 50 MHz 3 GHz 6GHz 10 and test channel kHz BW receiver gain for port 3 Opt 313 314 413 414 S41 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port4 50 MHz 3 GHz 6GHz 10 and test channel kHz BW receiver gain for port 4 Opt 413 414 NOTE RF output power is 5 dBm and Nop is 101 for all the tests shown in the table d 242 Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Tch Power Gain tests are in progress When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 39 Chapter 4 Figure 4 39 Figure
442. ult dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 216 3k 0 001 3G 3k 0 001 4 25 G 3k 0 0012 6G 3k 0 0036 7 5G 3k 0 0036 8 5G 3k lt 0 006 Direction 23 Option 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 0012 Chapter 2 179 m D m 3 5 Performance Tests E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix MY422 and above CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 6G 3k lt 0 0036 7 5 G 3k lt 0 0036 8 5 G 3k lt 0 006 Direction 532 Optio n 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 0012 6G 3k lt 0 0036 7 5G 3k 0 0036 8 5 G 3k lt 0 006 Direction 543 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 0012 6G 3k lt 0 0036 7 5G 3k 0 0036 856 3k lt 0 006 Direction 534 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF b
443. umns for DAO Set source power to IdBm Adjust the source power for 5 dBm on the power meter display Wait for power meter reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result Since the source power resolution is 0 05 dB adjust for the nearest possible value to 5 dBm Perform Step 16 through 19 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 5 dBm using the following equation D A Tx DA 5 Tx 9 DA10 Pm DA 5 Pm DAI10 Record the true D A in the calculation sheet True column for DA 5 92 Chapter 2 Step 64 Step 65 NOTE Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Set source power to 6dBm Adjust the source power for 10 dBm on the power meter display Wait for power meter reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result Since the source power resolution is 0 05 dB adjust for the nearest possible value to 10 Table 2 23 Step 66 Step 67 Step 68 Step 69 Step 70 dBm Perform Step 16 through 19 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 10 dBm using the following equation D A Tx DA 10 Tx DA10 Pm DA 10 Pm DA10 Record the true D A in the calculation sheet True D A column for DA 10 Dynamic accuracy tests for other test ports Connect the test equipment and select S parameter in accordance with Table 2 23 Perform Step 10 through 67 for each test setup and S parameter shown in Table 2 23 Dynamic accuracy test setups and S parameter se
444. ure xu b ha ee hh UE ME OP i epe c 37 RE OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST ERROREM NUR 40 Description cx CN e soU obw bier ue opibus od buds ausu ire eek nar 40 Specificato srei eos et HER SE Rese Gites Bek Mende see EIS ERES 40 Test equipment Rer RUD CPU uerb pesce ene xps 41 E TIED 41 4 TRACE NOISE CW TESI 44 44 SDecIEICatlOnc se doe opo els desee RR Re e e E pe 44 Test equipment cs mete Hp UE LS 44 Procedute cuneos EE ES PUE enu Eee bites ed heu ede ipt 45 J CROSSTALK TEST A T ERE ele ee Sad pU She aes EA Sog 50 dao edd ud censes 50 Specification ede CEN I CIS URE eRe EY RAR AE ERO EARR HIER 50 Test equipment o ess eres d vp SUN EE deesse obi abu vit anh ante bes 51 Proceduitec e oe BARE Ip dees ge eee 51 Crosstalk test program iuro Reda ur ap quei bee pane ient dep 60 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC 8 63 D SCHDptlon euo eve ee t EE BERE Euer agni kr eon 63 Specificato or ost eS RP Re DERE RUD PES ERR RSEN 63
445. utdown occurs the A21 board fails in starting up The following message may be displayed before the shutdown occurs Fatal Error Failed to Initialize DSP Driver or Fatal Error Failed to Initialize DSP This message indicates that the A21 board doesn t work or is not properly connected to the A20 Fatal Error Failed to Update DSP Code If this happened the A21 board failed in writing DSP program into flash ROM when the firmware was installed first or updated to the newest version A problem in the A21 or A20 is suspected PN o gt Measurement view The measurement view as shown in Figure 4 17 is displayed after the system initialization is completed without problem Chapter 4 217 Troubleshooting Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B MY42300633 and above E5071B MY42301397 and above Figure 4 17 Measurement view 1 Active 2 3 Stimulus 4Mkr Analysis 5 Instr State vu 521 Log Mag 10 00 Ref 0 000dB E5071B Menu Measurement Sil Format Log Mag Display 0 000 pS 1 Start 300 kHz IFBW 70 kHz 2002 09 23 13 24 Step 5 Power on self test The power on self test is executed once automatically before the measurement starts While the power on self test is in progress Power on test is displayed at the left in the instrument status bar If the power on test fails an error message is displayed there
446. ws Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 10 MHz Center 1 0 Wa Frequency span 0 Hz 0 Chapter 2 41 Performance Tests 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value Step 4 Press C and to make a Single sweep measurement Step 5 Wait for power meter reading to settle Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Power meter reading Ref column for the level linearity test Step 6 Press Sweep Setup J 1 J x1 to set the power level to 1 dBm which is the second value of the level linearity test levels listed in Table 2 3 Table 2 3 RF output level linearity test conditions for serial prefix MY421 JPIKK Test E5070B E5071B E5071B only frequency 10 MHz 3 GHz 4 25 GHz 6 GHz 8 5 GHz Power level 0 dBm reference level 0 dBm ref 0 dBm ref 1 dBm 1 dBm 1 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 7 dBm 7 dBm 8 dBm 8 dBm 9 dBm 10 dBm Table 2 4 RF output level linearity test conditions for serial prefix MY422 and above Test E5070B E5071B 5071 only frequency 10 MHz 3 GHz 4 25 GHz 6 GHz 8 5 GHz Power level 0 dBm reference level 0 dBm ref 0 dBm ref 0 dBm ref 1 dBm 1 dBm 1 dBm 1 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm 4dBm 4dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm dBm dBm 6dBm 7 dBm 7 dBm 7dBm 8 dB
447. xceeds the limit system speaker will 26 U beep for a warning alarm U Y U 95 U ru 1 2 4 3 2 4 5 1 14 y E 4 74 Enter Select PU PD Value F18 Save ESC Exit F1 General Help F5 Previous Values F6 Setting 1 Defaults Setting 2 Defaults CPU Warning Temperature 70 158 Frequency Voltage Control Frequency Voltage Control options are displayed by choosing Frequency Voltage Control using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 70 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 21 If there is any difference select it using L1 and keys and change the option setting by pressing or keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press E key 276 Chapter 4 Figure 4 70 Table 4 21 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B JP1KKxxxxx MY42300632 and below E5071B JP1KKxxxxx MY42301396 and below Frequency Voltage Control window CMOS Setup Utility Copyright C 1984 2801 Award Software Frequency Voltage Control Auto Detect DIMM PCI Clk Enabled Item Help Spread Spectrum 28 25 Cnt Menu Level gt Enabled BIOS will detect if SDRAM and PCI devices are at slot or not then close the clock of unused slots Disabled
448. y menus and references Menu Options Ref page Main Product description including processor and on memory fitted page 281 Date and time IDE disks found and sub menus for extra configuration Advanced Start up display mode silent boot etc on Operating system type ACPI etc page 283 Advanced chipset configuration Processor cache control PCI space configuration devices configuration Advanced hard disk drive options System monitoring Version information Security Passwords and permissions on page 286 Power Action after AC reconnect Power savings modes and timers Boot Selects device boot order on page 283 Exit Save with or without changes on Load save default settings from flash ROM page 286 Load Setup Defaults Perform the following procedure only when the A20 digital motherboard is replaced Jump to Advanced Menu when you check whether the BIOS options are correctly set or not Exit menu shown below is displayed by choosing Exit using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Select Load Setup Default using keys The dialog box Setup Comfirmation prompts you to select Y Yes or N No Press YJ and to load the manufacture Setup Defaults into the BIOS ROM As a result almost all of the BIOS options are automatically configured to the optimal settings for the E5070B E5071B 282 Chapter 4 Figure 4 74 Figure 4 75 Troubleshoo
449. you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an address automatically IP address 192 168 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 222 1 Obtain DNS server addre Use the following DNS server addresses Prefered DNS server Loon ot Alternate DNS server I ou Cancel e5070bse116 d If the IP Address and the Subnet Mask are already assigned go to Step 6 If they are not assigned yet enter them as follows IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway blank To enter a specific IP Address and Subnet Mask click Use the following IP address option button to select it Input your IP address in the IP Address box and your subnet mask in the Subnet Mask box overwrite the initial values e Double click My Computer icon on Windows desktop of the external PC And double click Control Panel The Control Panel window will appear From Step e to Step h are procedures for Windows f Inthe Control Panel window double click Network The Network dialog box shown in fig will appear In the Configuration tab select TCP IP display it in revers video and press the Properties button g The dialog box appears If Specify an IP address has been selected record the IP address and subnet mask PN e 47 gt O e 3 h If the Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected select
450. z IFBW 3 kHz 10 dBm through lt 3 rms 23 5 C 4 25 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 8 dBm through 3 mdB rms 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 6 dBm through 5 rms 23 5 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 6 dBm through Serial Prefix MY422 and above E5070B lt 1 mdB rms 23 5 C 3 MHz to 3 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 10 dBm through E5071B mdB rms 23 5 C 3 MHz to 3 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 10 dBm through lt 1 2 mdB rms 23 5 C 3 GHz to 4 25 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 9 dBm through 3 6 rms 23 5 C 4 25 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 7 dBm through 3 6 mdB rms 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 5 dBm through 6 mdB rms 23 5 C 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 5 dBm through Test equipment Coaxial cable with Type N m connectors 61 cm 24 in Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 44 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Procedure Step 1 Connect test equipment N N cable as shown in the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 5 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 6 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 5 Trace Noise CW Test setup Opt 213 214 E5070B 5071B N m N m Cable e5070bse006 Figure 2 6 Trace Noise CW Test setup Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B N m N m Cable
451. z 7 5 GHz 8 5 GHz 2 1G 3GHz Power level 10 dBm 9 dBm 7 dBm 5 dBm NOTE The CW trace noise level is tested at the minimum and maximum frequencies of the specified frequency range the frequencies where an internal frequency divider works between 1 3 GHz and 2 1 GHz and the frequency where the signal source frequency band is switched 4 25 GHz Step 12 Record the calculated values of the trace noise level in the performance test record Test result dB rms column for the CW trace noise test Step 13 Press and select 812 from S parameter menu Step 14 Press 3 to set the frequency to 3 MHz Step 15 Perform Step 8 through 12 for the S12 measurement Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Chapter 2 47 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST NOTE Perform Step 16 through 19 for the option 313 314 413 and 414 instruments only Step 16 Connect the test equipment N N cable as shown in Figure 2 8 Opt 313 314 and Figure 2 9 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 8 Trace Noise CW Test setup Opt 313 314 E5070B 5071B aa 0000 aa OO 0000 803 0000 ooo m a mi oo N m N m Cable e5070bse009 Figure 2 9 Trace Noise CW Test setup Opt 413 414 5070 5071 aa ga 2 oa 0000 aaa es ad

Service Guide - Agilent Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents